V 


I 


INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  INFANTRY. 


^REGULATIONS 


FOR  THE 


riELD  EXERCISE,  MANCEUVRES,  AND  CONDUCT 


OF  THE 


INFANTRY 

OP   THE   UNITED  STATES: 


DRAWN  UP  AND  ADAPTED  TO  THE  ORGANIZATION  OF  THE 

MILITIA 

AND 

REGULAR  TROOPS. 


BY  AN  OFFICER  OF  THE  ARMY.    ^n)uf(\     f\  |e;<. 
By  order  of  the  Secretary  of  War.  / 


WITH  EXPLANATORY  PLATES. 


PHILADELPHIA: 

?Tl?N"TED  BY  FRY  AND  KAMMERER 
1812. 


a' 


vv:^ 


ERRATA. 

Page  3,  line  12th,  strike  out  "  platoon,"  insert "  company.'^ 

6,  line  6th,  take  the  dash  out  of  the  command,  "  to  the  right 

face." 
16,  line  7th,  strike  out  the  comma  after  "  through." 
18,  line  18th,  strike  out  "  load  arms,"  insert  "  open  pan." 
31,  34,  35,  51,  52,  insert  a  dash  in  the  command,  "  Right 

about — face." 
45,  line  5th  from  the  bottom,  strike  out "  To,"insert"  On." 
53,  line  17th,  strike  out  "  platoons,"  insert  "  companies." 
61,  after  the  18th  line,  insert"  Article  III." 
121, after  the  23d  line,  insert  «  Article  III.", 


CONTENTS, 


PART  THE  FIRST, 


SECTION  I. 

Page 

Formation  of  a  regiment  in  line,    -         -         .         -  i 

Places  of  the  officers  and  non-commissioned  officers  in  line,  2 

Places  of  the  commanding  officer,  major,and  adjutant  in  line,  3 

Places  of  the  musicians  in  line, 3 

Guard  of  the  colours,            ..,.-.  3 

Instruction  of  regiments, -  3 

SECTION  II. 

The  Soldier's  Drill,            _          _  4 

PART  I. 

Lesson  I.  Position  of  the  soldier,     -        -         -        ^        .  5 

Lesson  II.  The  facings, 6 

Lesson  III.  Principles  of  the  direct  march  in  ordinary  time,  7 

Observations  on  the  principles  of  the  step,          -         -  7 

Lesson  IV.  Principles  of  the  oblique  step,        -         -         -  g 

Observations  relating  to  the  oblique  step,           -         -  9 

General  observations  on  the  direct  and  oblique  steps,        -  1 0 

PART  II. 

Of  Shouldered  ylrms,        -         -         -11 

Lesson  I.  Principles  of  shouldered  arms,            -          -  l  ] 

Lesson  II.  The  manual  exercise,          -           -          -         -  12 

Lesson  III.  On  loadings          -          •          -          -          -  15 
Lesson  IV.  On  firing,         -----}.'? 


iviSlOh'oji 


viii  CONTENTS. 

PART  III. 

Page 

Lesson  I.  Of  marching;  in  line,  different  steps  and  time,  19 

Lesson  IL  Marching  by  a  flank,         -         -          -          -  20 

Lesson  IIL  The  principles  of  dressing  into  line,         -         -  21 

Lesson  IV.  Of  wheeling  and  changing  the  direction,      -  22 

Wheeling  on  a  fixed  pivot,         -         -          -         -         -  23 

Wheeling  on  a  march,         -           -         -         ...  23 

Change  of  direction  to  the  side  of  the  guide,         -         -  24 


SECTION  IIL 

Drill  of  the  Company,  -  -  25 

LESSON  I. 

Article  I.  Opening  ranks,  -  -  -         -         -  25 

Article  II.  Dressing  at  open  order,  -  .         -  26 

Article  III.  Manual  exercise,      -       -         -         -         -  26 

Article  IV.  Closing  ranks,       ---...  27 

Article  V.  Dressing  at  close  order,        -       -         -         -  27 

LESSON  11. 

Article  I.  Loading  in  quick  time?         -         -         -         -  28 

Article  II.  Loading  in  quickest  time,       ...  29 

Article  III.  Firing  by  the  company,    -         -         -         -  29 

Article  IV.  Firing  by  file,       -         -  -         _         .  30 

Article  V.  Firing  to  the  rear,       -         -         -         .         .  3Q 

LKSSON  III. 

Article  I.  Marching  in  line,         -         -  -         .         -  31 

Article  II.  To  halt  and  dress  the  company,        -        -  32 

Article  III.  The  march  oblique,  -  -         -         -  33 

Article  IV.  To  mark  time,  march  in  quick  time,  and  step 

back.      '------  34 

Article  V.  To  march  to  the  rear,  ...  34 

LESSON  IV. 

Article  I.  Marching  by  a  flank,  -         -  -         -  35 

Article  II.  To  change  direction  by  file,  -         -         -  36 

Article  III.  To  halt  and  front  the  company,  marching  by  a 

flank, 36 


CONTENTS.  ix 

Page 
Article  IV,  The  company  marching  by  a  flank,  to  form 

.  line  by  file  to  the  right  or  left,         -         -        36 
Article  V.  The  company  marching  by  a  flank,  to  form  in 

line  or  platoons  on  the  march,  -        -      37 

LESSON  V. 

Article  I.  To  form  column  of  platoons  from  the  line,      -  38 

Article  II.  To  march  in  column,         .        -        -        -  39 

Article  III.  To  change  direction  in  column,  -  40 

Article  IV.  To  halt  the  column,  -         .        -         -  40 

Article  V.  To  form  in  line  to  the  right  or  left,        -  41 

LESSON  VI. 
Article  I.  To  break  off  files  to  the  rear,  and  bring  them 

again  into  line,         -----      42 
Article  II.  To  march  in  column  by  the  route  step,      -  43 

Article  III.  To  break  into  platoons,  and  form  company,        43 
Article  IV.  To  countermarch,         -  -  .  -  44 

Article  V.  Being  in  qolumn  by  platoons,  to  form  line  on  the 

right  or  left,         -         -        -         -  -         45 


SECTION  IV. 
Drill  of  the  Battalion,        -         -  47 

PART  I. 

Article  I.  To  open  the  ranks,  -         -         -  .         43 

Article  II.  Manual  exercise,        _        -        .         -  -     49 

Article  III.  Loading  in  the  quickest  time,  and  the  firings,    50 

PART  II. 

Various  modes  of  forming  Column  from  the  Line^       -     52 
Article  I.  Wheeling  by  companies  to  the  right  or  left  into 

column,        - 52 

Article  II.  To  form  the  open  column  by  filing  by  companies 

to  the  rear,        -----  53 

Article  III.  To  form  close  column  from  the  line,  -       54 

b 


X  CONTENTS. 

PART  III. 

*  Page 

Article  I.  To  march  in  column  at  full  distance  of  companies,  56 

Article  II.  Column  of  route, 58 

To  form  platoons  on  the  march,  -  60 

To  form  companies  on  the  march,  -  60 

Article  III.  To  change  the  direction,  -  -  -  -  61 
Article  IV.  Change  of  direction  by  the  prompt  manoeuvre,  61 
Article  V.  To  halt  the  column,  -  -  -         -         63 

Article  Vi.  To  close  the  column,  -  -  .  63 

Article  VII.  To  march  in  close  column,  -  -  -  64 
Article  VIII.  To  change  direction  in  columti,  at  half  or 

platoon  distance*  -  .  -         -         64 

Article  IX.  To  change  the  direction  Of  the  close  column,  65 
Article  X.  To  countermarch,  .  .  .  .  -  65 
Article  XI.  To  form  divisions  from  the  close  column  of 

companies,  at  the  halt,         -         .  -  67 

PART  IV. 

Different  Modes  of  forming  the  Line  from  Colu?7ins,     -     68 
Article  I.  Methods  of  ascertaining  the  line  to  be  formed  on,  68 
Article  II.  Different  methods  of  forming  a  column  at  full 

distance,  right  in  front,  into  line,  -  69 

To  form  the  line  by  inversion,  ■  -  -         70 

To  form  the  line  on  the  right,       -         -         -     7 1 

To  form  the  line  to  the  front,  -  -         72 

To  form  the  line  faced  to  the  rear,         -         -      74 

Article  III.  To  form  the  line  by  two  kinds  of  movement       75 

Article  IV.  Different  methods  of  forming  a  column  at  half  ■ 

distance,  right  in  front,  into  line,      -        -       76 

Column  at  half  distance,  right  in  front,  to  the 

left  in  line,       -----  76 

Column  at  half  distance,  right  in  front,  on  the 
right  in  line,         -         -         -         -         -      77 

Column  at  half  distance,  to  form  to  the  front  in 
line,         ------  77 

Column  at  half  distance,  to  form  facing  to  the 

rear  in  line, 77 

Article  V.  To  display  the  close  column  into  line,       -  77 


CONTENTS.  xi 

PART  V. 

Page 
To  March  in  Line,         -         -         -         80 

Article  I.  To  march  in  line  to  the  front,  -  -  -  80 
Article  II.  To  pass  obstacles  when  marching  in  line  to  the 

front  or  rear,       -----  82 

Article  III.  To  change  direction  when  marching  in  line,  84 
Article  IV.  To  march  in  line  obliquely,  -  -  -  US 
Article  V.  To  halt  the  battalion  marching  to  the  front,  and 

to  dress  it,         -         -  -  -         -  85 

Article  VI.  To  march  in  retreat,  -         -  -         -       86 

Article  VII.  To  halt  the  battalion  marching  in  retreat,  and 

face  it  to  the  front,       -         -         -         -  87 

Article  VIII.  To  march  in  line  by  a  flank,  -  -     87 

Article  IX.  To  form  the  battalion  marching  by  a  flank,  into 

line  by  file, 88 

Article  X.  Passage  of  lines,          -         -        -        -        -      89 

Movement  of  the  first  line  in  retreat,      -  89 

Movement  of  the  second  line  in  passing  lines,   90 

Article  XI.  To  change  front,  -  -         -  -  92 

Article  XII.  To  pass  a  defile  in  retreat  by  the  right  or  left 

wing,  -  -  -  -  -         -      94 

Article  XIII.  To  form  the  column  of  attack,      -        -  95 

To  display  the  column  of  attack,  -  -  96 
Article  XIV.  Of  rallying  when  dispersed.         -  -  97 


SECTION  V. 

Evolutions  of  the  Brigade,          -         -  98 
Places  of  the  commander  in  chief,  of  brigadier  generals,  and 

of  colonels  in  line,         ------  98 

General  rules  for  the  words  of  command,          -         -         -  99 

Formation  of  a  regiment  in  line  before  its  quarters,        -  99 

Formation  and  order  of  march  of  the  escort  of  the  colours,  100 

Honours  paid  to  the  colours,         -        -        -        -         -  101 

PART  I. 

x\rticle  I.  To  open  the  ranks,          -          .        -        -  loi 

Article  II.  Manual  exercise,        ...         -         -  102 

Article  III.  Loading  §nd  firings,      .        .        .        -  102 


xii  CONTENTS. 

PART  II. 

Page 

Various  modes  of  forming  Column  from  the  Line^        -        105 

Article  I.  Wheeling  by  companies  to  the  right  or  left,        105 

Article  II.  To  form  the  open  column  by  filing  by  compa- 
nies to  the  rear,         .         -         >  .  105 

Article  III.  To  break  into  column  to  the  right  in  order  to 

march  towards  the  left,         -         .         .         106 

x\rticle  IV.  To  form  the  close  column  from  the  line,  106 

PART  III. 

Article  I.  To  march  in  column  at  full  distance,  •  109 

Article  II.  Column  of  route,         -         -         -         -         -110 

Article  III.  Change  of  direction  of  an  open  column  at  full 

distance  of  companies,         -         -         -  111 

Article  IV.  Change  of  direction  by  the  prompt  manoeuvre,  1 1  1 
Article  V.  To  halt  the  column,  -  -  -         -      112 

Article  VI.  To  close  the  column  to  half  distance  or  into 

close  column,         -         -         -         -         -      114 

Article  VII.  To  march  in  column  at  half  distance,  or  in 

close  column,  -         -  -         -  114 

Article  VIII.  Change  of  direction  of  a  column  at  half  dis- 
tance,        -  -  -  -         -         -      115 

Article  IX.  Changing  the  direction  of  a  close  column,        1 15 
Article  X.  To  countermarch,  -  -  -  -  116 

Article  XI.  Being  in  column  of  companies  at  the  halt,  to 

form  divisions,       -         -         -         -         -       1  If 

PART  IV. 

Different  methods  of  forming  in  Line  from  ojicn  and  close  Co- 

lum7is^         -         -         -         -         -         -  118 

Article  I.  Methods  of  determining  the  line,     -        -         -  118 
Article  II.  Different  methods  of  passing  from  open  co- 
lumn into  line,          -          -          -          -  118 
Column  at  full  distance,  with  the  right  in  front, 

to  form  to  the  left  in  line,         -         -         -  1 18 

To  form  the  line  by  inversion,         -  -  119 

General  rules  for  formations  in  succession,  1 19 

To  form  the  column' at  full  distance,  the  right 

in  front,  on  the  right  in  line,         -         -  120 


CONTENTS.  xiil 

Page 

To  form  the  column  at  full  distance,  to  the 

front  in  line,  -  -  -  -  -  121 
The  column  at  full  distance,  with  the  right  in 

front,  to  face  to  the  rear  in  line,  -  -  123 
Article  III.  To  form  the  line  by  two  kinds  of  movement,  124 
Article  IV.  Different  methods  of  forming  a  column  at 

half  distance  into  line,         -         -         .  127 

To  form  the  column  at  half  distance,  with  the 

right  in  front,  to  the  left  in  line,  -  -  128 
To  form  the  column  at  half  distance,  with  the 

right  in  front,  on  the  right  in  line,  -  129 
To  form  the  column  at  half  distance,  to  the 

front  in  line,  -  -  -  -  129 

To  form  the  column  at  half  distance,  facing 

to  the  rear  in  line,  -  -  -  -  129 
Article  V.  Of  close  columns,  -  -  -  -  -  129 
To  display  the  close  column  faced  to  the  front 

in  line, 130 

To  display  the  close  column  faced  to  the  rear 

in  line,  -  -         -         -         -        -     134 

To  display  the  close  column  to  the  left  in  line,  1 34 
To  display  the  close  column  to  the  right  in 

line,  -  -  -         -  -         -         134 

PART  V. 

Article  I.  To  march  in  line,         -----  135 

Article  II.  To  change  the  direction  when  marching  in 

line,         -  -  -         -         -         -  137 

Article  lil.  To  halt  and  dress  the  line,  -         -         -  138 

Article  IV.  Firing  advancing,         -  -         -         -  140 

Article  V.  To  march  in  retreat,  -         -  -         -  141 

Article  VI.  To  change  the  direction  when  marching  in 

retreat,  -  -  -  -  -  142 

Article  VII.  To  fire  when  retreating  in  line,         -         -  143 

Article  VIII.  To  pass  a  defile  to  the  front,        <-         -  144 

Article  IX.  To  pass  a  defile  to  the  rear,         -         -         -  146 

Article  X.  Changes  of  front,     -----  147 

Change  of  front  by  two  lines,        -        -         -  143 
Changing  the  front  perpendicularly  forward, 
on  the  extremity  of  the  right  wing  of  the 

first  line, 14'> 


xiv  CONTENTS. 

Pagg 

Chill) ge  of  front  perpendicularly  to  the  rear, 
upon  the  extremity  of  the  right  wing  of  the 
first  line,  -         -  -         -         -         149 

Changing  the  front  perpendicularly   on  the 
centre  of  the  first  line,  the  left  wing  thrown 
forward,         -         -         -        -         -         -      150 

Changing  the  front  obliquely  forward  upon  the 

extremity  of  the  right  wing  of  the  first  line,  151 

Akticlk  XL  Of  echellon  movements,         .         -  -  153 

Article  XII.  To  retreat  in  chequer,       -         .         -         -     15S 

Article  XIII.  Passage  of  lines,         -         -         -         -  158 

Article  XIV.  To  oppose  cavalry,  ...        -     I6O 


PART  THE  SECOND. 

SECTION  I. 

Of  the  March  of  an  Army^          -  -           165 

Article  I.  The  order  of  the  march,       -         -  -         .     165 

Article  II.  Of  the  baggage  on  a  march,            -  -         167 

SECTION  II. 

Duties  of  the  Cajnp,           -  -            16a 

Article  I.  Order  of  encampment,      -        -         .  .       168 

Article  II.  Manner  of  entering  a  camp,          -  -             170 

Article  III.  Police  of  the  camp,         -         -         .  _       j^j 

Article  IV.  Of  roll  calls,       -         -         .         .  .             173 

Article  V.  Of  the  inspection  of  companies,        -  -       174 

Article  VI.  Of  the  different  beats  of  the  drum,  -             175 

SECTION  III. 

Of  the  Service  of  the  Guards,        -  -          176 

Article  I.  Of  the  different  guards  with  their  use,  -       176 

Article  II.  Of  the  grand  parade,           -           -  .            173 
Article  III.  Of  relieving  guards  and  sentinels,     -         -       180 

Article  IV.  Instructions  to  officers  on  guard,  -           182 


CONTENTS.  XV 

Page 
Article  V.  Method  of  going  and   receiving  the   grand 

rounds,         -         -         -         -         -         -185 

Article  VI.  Honours  due  from  guards  to  general  officers, 

and  others,         -         -         -         -         -  >  87 

SECTION  IV. 

Of  the  Arms  and  Ammunition^  ivith  the  Method  of  preserv- 
ing thenif       '         -         -         -      .    -  188 

SECTION  V. 

Of  Reviews,         -         -          -  189 

Article  I.  Of  reviews  of  parade,          -          -          -        -  189 

Article  II.  Of  reviews  of  inspection,        -         -         -  192 

SECTION  VI. 

Instructions,  ...  193 
Article  I.  Instructions  for  the  commandant  of  a  regiment,  193 
Article  II.  Instructions  for  the  adjutant,  -  -  .  194 
Article  III.  Instructions  for  the  quarter  master,  -  195 
Article  IV,  Instructions  for  the  captain,  -  -  -  195 
Article  V.  Instructions  to  an  officer  commanding  a  post,  198 
Article  VI.  Instructions  for  the  first  sergeant  of  a  com- 
pany, -  -  .  -  -  -  199 
Article  VII.  Instructions  for  the  sergeants  and  corporals,  200 
Article  VIII.  Instructions  for  the  private  soldier,  -  202 
Article  IX.  Instructions  for  the  drum  major,         -        -  203 


SECTION  VII. 

Various  Regulations,         -  -         _     205 

Article  I.  Regulation  relative  to  subordination,  -  205 

Article  II.  Regulation  respecting  roll-calls,   -         -         -  205 

Article  III.  Regulation  of  the  salute  with  swqrd  or  colours,  208 

,\rticle  IV.  Regulation  respecting  funerals,      -        -  209 


WAR  UEPARTMENT, 

March  SOtli,  1812. 

The  annexed  regulations  are  hereby  or- 
dered, for  the  goyernment  of  the  Infantry  of 
the  Army  of  the  United  States. 

Commanding  Officers  of  regiments  will 
report  to  the  Brigadier  Generals,  Brigadier 
Generals  to  the  Major  Generals,  Major  Ge- 
nerals to  the  Department  of  War,  such  altera- 
tions and  improvements  as  experience  may 
suggest. 

By  command  of  the  President, 

W.  EUSTIS. 


llSSTRUCTIOlSr  FOll  INFANTRY. 


PART  THE  FIRST. 


SECTION  I. 

Formation  of  a  Regiment  in  Line, 

A  REGIMENT  of  ten  companies  will  be  formed  as  a  single 
battalion.  Two  of  the  companies  shall  be  designated  as  gre- 
nadiers or  light  infantry;  they  will  be  distinguished  as  the 
first  and  second,  and  form  a  division  on  the  right. 

The  eight  infantry  companies  will  be  placed  according  to 
the  rank  of  the  officers  commanding  them,  in  this  order,  be- 
ginning on  the  right;  the  first  in  rank,  the  fifth,  the  third,  the 
seventh,  the  second,  the  sixth,  the  fourth,  the  eighth.  But 
they  will  be  designated  by  the  names  of  the  first,  second, 
third,  fourth,  fifth,  sixth,  seventh,  and  eighth,  commencing 
on  the  right,  and  ending  on  the  left  of  the  battalion. 

The  battalion  shall  be  divided  into  right  and  left  wings. 

When  the  battalion  of  five  companies  exercises  separately, 
the  light  company  will  be  on  the  right,  and  the  other  com- 
panies will  be  placed,  according  to  the  rank  of  the  officer 
commanding,  in  this  order,  beginning  on  the  right;  the  first 
in  rank,  the  third,  the  second,  the  fourth. 

In  forming  the  battalion  of  eight  companies,  the  first  and 
second,  counting  from  the  right,  will  form  the  first  division; 
the  third  and  fourth  companies,  the  second  division;  the 
fifth  and  sixth  companies,  the  third  division;  and  the  se- 
venth and  eighth  companies  will  form  the  fourth  division. 

Each  company  will  be  divided  into  two  equal  parts,  called 
platoons;  that  on  the  right  shall  be  called  the  first,  and  that 
r»n  the  left  the  second  platoon. 

A 


The  men  of  each  company  will  be  arranged  in  ranks,  ac- 
cording to  size;  the  tallest  on  the  flanks;  the  shortest  in  the 
centre. 

The  distance  from  rank  to  rank  will  be  one  pace,  measur- 
ed from  heel  to  heel. 

When  regiments  are  on  a  peace  establishment,  and  exer- 
cised in  battalion,  the  companies  will  be  formed  two  deep, 
in  order  to  occupy  nearly  the  same  extent  of  ground  as  if 
formed  three  deep,  and  on  a  war  establishment.  The  com- 
panies are  always  to  be  equalized  by  transferring  men,  if 
necessary,  from  one  company  to  another. 

Places  of  the  Officers  and  Non-commissioned  Officers  in  Line. 

The  captain  will  take  his  post  on  the  right  of  his  company 
in  the  first  rank.  The  first  lieutenant  in  the  fourth  or  file 
closer's  rank,  two  paces  in  the  rear  of  the  centre  of  the  se- 
cond platoon.  The  second  lieutenant  in  the  same  rank,  two 
paces  in  the  rear  of  the  centre  of  the  first  platoon.  The  en- 
sign in  the  same  rank,  behind  the  left  section  of  the  second 
platoon. 

The  first  sergeant  in  the  rear  of  the  captain,  and  covering 
him  in  the  third  rank.  In  the  evolutions  this  sergeant  will 
be  called  the  covering  sergeant,  and  will  be  the  guide  on  the 
right  of  his  company.  The  second  sergeant  in  the  rear  ot  the 
left  of  the  second  platoon.  This  sergeant  in  the  evolutions 
will  be  the  guide  on  the  left  of  his  company. 

In  the  eighth  company  of  the  battalion,  the  second  sergeant 
will  be  posted  on  the  left  of  the  battalion  in  the  front  rank, 
covered  by  a  corporal  in  the  rear  rank. 

The  third  sergeant  in  the  rear  of  the  right  of  the  second 
platoon.  The  fourth  sergeant  in  the  rear  of  the  left  of  the 
first  platoon.  The  senior  corporal  will  be  one  of  the  guard 
of  the  colours.  The  other  corporals  will  be  placed  on  the 
right  and  left  of  their  companies,  in  the  front  and  rear  ranks. 

The  replacing  of  officers  in  each  company,  and  also  of 
non-commissioned  officers,  will  be  regulated  by  rank.  In  the 
absence  of  the  captain,  and  of  the  first  lieutenant  of  a  com- 
pany, the  commander  of  the  regiment  may  order  a  first 
lieutenant  of  another  company,  to  command  that,  during  the 
drill,  whose  captain  and  first  lieutenant  are  absent. 


Places  of  the  Commanding  Officer^  Major  y  and  Adjutant  in 

Line. 

The  colonel  and  major  will  be  mounted,  and  the  adjutant 
shall  be  on  foot. 

The  colonel  will  be  posted  twenty  paces  in  the  rear  of  the 
centre  of  the  battalion;  the  major  ten  paces  in  the  rear  of 
the  centre  of  the  right  wing;  the  adjutant  ten  paces  in  the 
rear  of  the  centre  of  the  left  wing. 

Places  of  the  Musicians  in  Line. 

The  drums  and  fifes  of  the  battalion,  formed  in  two  ranks, 
with  the  drums  in  front,  will  be  placed  fifteen  paces  in  the 
rear  of  the  fifth  platoon  of  the  battalion.  If  there  be  a  band, 
it  shall  be  formed  in  one  rank,  two  paces  in  the  rear  of  the 
fifers. 

Guard  of  the  Colours. 

The  guard  of  the  colours  of  the  battalion  will  consist  of 
eight  senior  corporals,  from  the  eight  battalion  companies. 
It  will  be  posted  on  the  left  of  the  second  platoon  of  the 
fourth  company,  and  will  constitute  a  part  of  that  platoon. 

The  first  rank  of  this  guard  will  be  composed  of  the  en- 
sign who  carries  the  colours,  and  of  two  corporals,  one  on 
his  right,  the  other  on  his  left.  The  centre  and  rear  ranks 
shall  be  formed  each  of  three  corporals.  These  corporals  and 
the  sergeants  shall  carry  their  arms  at  the  advance. 

The  three  corporals  who  may  be  distinguished  for  regu- 
larity and  perfect  appearance  under  arms,  and  in  marching, 
shall  be  placed  in  the  centre  rank  of  the  colour  guard. 

The  colonel,  and  in  his  absence  the  commanding  officer  of 
the  regiment,  shall  select  in  each  regiment,  the  ensign  who 
is  to  carry  the  colours. 

It  is  of  the  utmost  importance  in  marching  in  line,  that 
this  ensign  should  be  thoroughly  instructed  to  observe  the 
precise  length  and  exact  cadence  of  step,  and  able  to  follow 
a  given  direction  without  deviation. 

Instruction  of  Regiments. 

The  colonel,  and  in  his  absence,  the  commanding  officer 
of  each  regiment,  will  be  responsible  for  the  general  instruc- 


tion  of  the  officers,  non-commissioned  officers,  and  soldiers, 
of  his  rcgimiMit. 

The  officers  will  be  instructed  in  the  drill  of  the  soldier, 
that  of  the  company,  and  that  of  the  battalion;  they  will  be 
frequently  exercised  bj^  a  superior  officer. 

The  instruction  of  the  non-commissioned  officers  will  com- 
prehend the  drill  of  the  soldier,  and  that  of  the  company. 
And  when  they  are  sufficiently  instructed,  the  instruction  of 
the  recruits  will  be  committed  to  them. 

Th(^  commanding  officer  of  each  company  will  be  respon- 
sible for  the  general  instruction  of  his  company. 

The  most  particular  attention  will  be  given  to  the  instruc- 
tion of  the  ensigns,  to  give  them  the  habit  of  pursuing  a 
given  dirt- ction  without  varving  to  the  righ;  or  left;  and  of 
maintaining,  with  the  utmost  precision,  the  length  as  well  as 
the  cadence  of  the  step. 


SECTION  II. 

THE  SOLDIER'S  DRILL, 

The  object  of  the  soldier's  drill  is  the  instruction  of  re- 
cruits. The  first  part  will  comprehend  what  is  to  be  taught 
to  the  soldier  before  arms  are  put  into  his  hands. 

There  are  two  kinds  of  words  of  command;  to  wit;  those 
of  caution,  and  those  of  execution.  In  this  work  they  will 
be  distinguished  by  the  type.  The  first  will  be  distinctly  pro- 
nounced, dwelling  a  little  on  the  last  syllable.  The  second 
will  be  pronounced  with  a  firm  quick  tone.  All  words  of 
command  shall  be  animated  and  loud. 


PART  I. 

The  first  part  of  the  soldier's  drill  shall  be  taught  as  often 
as  possible  to  the  recruits  singly,  or  to  not  more  than  three  at 
once,  unless  the  number  of  recruits  is  so  great  that  the  in- 
structor is  compelled  to  pursue  a  different  course. 

The  recruits  will  be  placed  in  a  single  rank,  without  arms., 
at  such  distance  as  not  to  touch  each  other. 


LESSON  I. 
Positian  of  the  Soldi gr. 

The  heels  on  the  same  line,  and  as  close  together  as  the 
shape  of  the  man  will  allow;  the  toes  turned  out  equally; 
the  knees  straight,  without  stiffness;  the  low<;r  part  of  the 
back  rising  erect  on  the  haunches;  the  upper  part  of  the  bo- 
dy inclined  a  little  forward;  the  shoulders  kept  back,  and  of 
an  equal  height;  the  arms  hanging  naturally,  the  elbows 
close  to  the  bod)';  the  palms  of  the  hands  a  little  turned  for- 
ward; the  little  finger  behind  and  touching  the  seam  of  the 
breeches;  the  head  erect  without  constraint;  the  chin  drawn 
inward;  the  eyes  fixed  on  the  ground  fifteen  paces  forward. 

After  having  established  the  position,  the  instructer  will 
teach  the  recruits  the  motions  of  turning  the  head  to  the  right, 
to  the  left,  and  to  the  front. 

1  Eyes  RIGHT. 

2  Steady. 

At  the  first  command,  the  soldier  will  turn  the  head  with 
an  easy  motion  to  the  right,  so  far  that  the  left  eye  may  be  in 
a  line  with  the  waistcoat  buttons,  his  eyes  fixed  on  the  line  of 
the  eyes  of  the  men  of  the  same  rank.  At  the  second  com- 
mand, he  brings  his  head  to  the  front;  which  i*s  the  habitual 
position  of  the  soldier. 

The  motion  of  turning  the  head  to  the  left,  will  be  execu- 
ted in  the  contrary  manner. 

The  instructer  will  take  care  that  the  motion  of  the  head 
does  not  alter  the  squareness  of  the  shoulders,  which  might 
happen  if  the  motion  was  too  quick. 

When  the  instructer  wishes  to  relieve  the  soldiers  from 
the  position  of  attention,  and  to  allow  them  to  stand  at  ease, 
he  will  command, 

Rest. 

At  this  word,  the  soldier  will  bring  back  his  right  foot, 
plant  it  six  inches  behind  the  left,  and  bend  the  left  knee; 
bringing  his  hands  together  before  the  body.  In  this  posi- 
tion, he  may  turn  his  head,  and  move  himself;  taking  care 
to  keep  his  left  heel  in  its  place. 

When  the  instructer  desires  that  the  soldier  shall  give  his 
attention,  and  resume  his  erect  position,  he  will  command, 


Attention. 

At  this  word,  the  soldier  will  fix  his  attention,  resume 
the  position  described,  and  stand  perfectly  still. 


LESSON  II. 
The  Facings. 
The  instructer  will  command, 

To  the  right — face. 

At  the  word  "  face,"  the  recruit  will  turn  on  his  left  heel, 
a  quarter  circle  to  the  right,  the  knees  kept  straight,  raising 
a  little  the  point  of  the  left  foot,  and  will  at  the  same  time 
carry  back  the  right  heel  to  the  side  of  the  left,  placing  them 
even. 

In  facing  to  the  left,  the  right  heel  will  be  brought  forward. 

To  face  to  the  right  about,  the  instructer  will  command, 

Right  about — face. 

At  the  word  "  about,"  make  a  half  face  to  the  right,  draw 
back  the  right  foot,  so  that  the  hollow  is  opposite  to,  and  two 
inches  from  the  heel  of  the  left,  laying  hold  of  the  cartridge 
box  with  the  right  hand. 

At  the  word  "  face,"  the  soldier,  raising  the  toes,  and 
keeping  the  knees  straight,  will  turn  on  both  heels  to  the 
rear,  bringing  back  the  right  heel  to  the  side  of  the  left,  quit- 
ting the  cartridge  box. 

When  the  soldier  carries  arms,  at  the  first  part  of  the  word 
of  command  to  face  to  the  right  about,  he  shall  turn  his  mus- 
ket with  the  left  hand,  the  lock  forwards;  and  he  will  resume 
the  proper  position  of  shouldered  arms,  at  the  moment  of 
placing  the  right  heel  even  with  the  left. 

The  instructer  will  take  care  that  these  motions  do  not 
derange  the  position  of  the  body,  which  ought  to  remain  in- 
clined a  little  forward. 


>  LESSON  III. 

Principles  of  the  Direct  March  in  ordinary  Time. 

The  length  of  the  ordinary  step  will  be  two  feet,  measuring 
from  heel  to  heel;  and  seventy-five  such  paces  will  be  taken 
in  a  minute.  The  instructer,  seeing  the  recruit  confirmed  in 
his  position,  will  explain  to  him  the  principles  and  mechanism 
of  the  step,  by  placing  himself  facing,  and  three  or  four 
paces  in  front  of  the  recruit,  and  by  stepping  slowly  himself, 
show  him  how  to  execute  the  stepj  thus  joining  precept  and 
example.  And  he  will  command, 

1  Forward. 

2  March. 

At  the  first  word,  the  soldier  will  bear  the  weight  of  the 
body  on  the  right  l:g,  keeping  the  left  knee  straight. 

At  the  second  u oid,  the  soldier  will  step  off  with  the 
left  foot,  taking  a  pace  of  two  feet,  the  toe  lowered,  so  that 
the  foot  may  be  flat;  the  knee  straight;  the  toe  a  little  turn- 
ed outwards.  He  will  bear  forward  the  weight  of  the  body, 
and  plant  the  foot  flat  and  easily  at  the  prescribed  distance 
from  the  right  foot;  the  weight  of  the  body  borne  on  the 
foot  which  comes  to  the  ground.  He  will  then  advance  the 
right  foot,  passing  it  near  the  ground,  and  bring  it  down  as 
directed  for  the  left.  He  will  march  on  in  this  manner, 
without  throwing  his  legs  across  each  other,  keeping  his 
shoulders  square  to  the  front,  and  his  head  in  the  direct  po- 
sition prescribed. 

When  the  instructer  desires  to  halt,  he  will  command, 

1  Platoon. 

2  Halt. 

At  the  second  command,  which  will  be  given  as  one  or 
the  other  foot  is  coming  to  the  ground,  the  recruit  will  bring- 
up  the  other  foot  without  stamping,  and  place  it  at  the  side 
of  the  one  already  fixed. 

Observations  on  the  Principles  of  the  Step. 

To  bear  the  weight  of  the  body  on  the  right  leg,  at  the 
command  "  forward;"  thereby  to  enable  the  recruit  to  take 
the  step  with  life,  which  is  very  essential  in  line. 


s 

The  toe  a  little  lowered,  without  constraint;  this  stretches 
the  ham,  and  the  foot  is  ready  to  be  brought  to  the  grouna 
flat. 

The  point  of  the  foot  turned  out  only  a  little;  for  if  it  is 
too  much  turned  out,  it  will  create  an  unsteadiness  in  the 
body. 

The  upper  part  of  the  body  inclined  a  little  forward;  that 
the  weight  mav  bear  on  the  foot  last  brought  to  the  ground, 
that  the  other  may  be  easily  raised,  and  the  step  not  shor- 
tened. 

To  march  with  the  ham  stretched;  for  otherwise  a  line 
of  men  cannot  march  without  jostling  each  other.  No  two 
men  walk  exactly  alike;  therefore  it  is  necessary  to  teach  re- 
cruits to  march  with  a  uniform  cadenced  step,  without  which, 
connexion  and  uniformity  cannot  be  preserved. 

To  carry  the  foot  forward  near  the  ground;  for  raising  the 
foot  higher  than  is  necessary,  loses  time,  and  produces  fa- 
tigue; and,  if  there  was  no  fixed  principle,  the  soldiers  would 
raise  the  foot  and  bend  the  knee,  some  more,  and  some  less; 
the  feet  would  not  come  to  the  ground  together;  and  there 
would  be  neither  uniformity  nor  cadence. 

To  place  the  foot  flat  on  the  ground,  without  stamping;  In 
order  to  avoid  shortening  the  step,  producing  unnecessary 
fatigue,  or  breaking  the  cadence  of  the  step. 

The  head  elevated,  and  direct  to  the  front;  this  position 
preserves  the  shoulders  in  a  direction  square  to  the  front, 
and  enables  the  soldier  to  march  directly  forward. 


LESSON  IV. 
Principles  of  the  Oblique  Step. 

This  step  will  be  performed  in  the  common  time  of  seven- 
ty five  to  a  minute;  the  length  will  be  explained. 

As  soon  as  the  recruit  has  accurately  acquired  the  habit 
of  marching  by  the  direct  step,  and  of  taking  steps  of  the 
same  length  in  the  same  time,  the  instructer  will  show  him 
the  oblique  step,  in  which  he  will  exercise  him  as  follows. 

The  soldier  standing  firm,  the  instructer  will  cause  him  to 
step  off  with  the  right  foot,  obliquely  forward  and  to  the 
right,  and  to  place  it  about  two  feet  from  the  left,  turning 
the  point  of  the  toe  a  little  inwards,  to  prevent  the  left  shoul- 
der being  advanced.  The  soldier  will  rest  in  this  position. 


When  the  instructer  gives  the  word  "  two,"  the  soldier 
shall  carry  his  left  foot  by  the  shortest  line,  and  place  it  about 
one  foot  and  a  half  from,  and  in  front  of  the  right  heel;  and 
rest  in  this  position. 

The  soldier  shall  continue  to  march  in  this  manner,  at  the 
words  "  one"  and  "  two,"  stopping  at  every  step,  paying  the 
greatest  attention  to  keeping  the  shoulders  square  to  the 
front,  and  the  head  direct. 

The  oblique  step  to  the  left  is  performed  in  the  same  man- 
ner; the  recruit  stepping  first  with  the  left  foot. 

After  a  few  lessons  of  this  kind,  the  recruit  shall  oblique 
to  the  right  and  left,  without  dwelling  on  the  step,  in  this 
manner: 

The  recruit  marching  to  the  front  by  the  ordinary  step 
and  time,  the  instructer  will  command, 

1  To  the  right  oblique. 

2  March. 

At  the  second  command,  which  shall  be  given  at  the  in- 
stant the  left  foot  is  coming  to  the  ground,  the  soldier  shall 
commence  the  oblique  step  to  the  right,  observing  to  con- 
form to  the  directions  given,  relating  to  the  formation  and 
length  of  the  steps,  and  keeping  the  shoulders  square  to  the 
front;  but  without  stopping  at  each  step,  he  will  take  seventy 
five  paces  in  a  minute. 

The  oblique  step  to  the  left  shall  be  performed  in  the 
same  manner,  the  instructer  giving  the  word  "  march"  at 
the  instant  the  right  foot  is  coming  to  the  ground. 

To  resume  the  march  to  the  front  direct,  the  instructer 
will  command, 

1  Forward. 

2  March. 

At  the  second  command,  which  will  be  given  at  the  in- 
stant when  either  foot  is  coming  to  the  ground,  the  soldier 
shall  resume  the  direct  march,  and  equal  step  of  two  feet. 

Observations  relating  to  the  Oblique  Step, 

The  instructer  will  notice,  and  see  that  the  soldier  marches 
with  the  ham  stretched;  that  the  weight  of  the  body  rests  on 
the  foot  last  brought  to  the  ground;  that  the  foot  passes  by 
the  shortest  line  to  the  place  where  it  is  brought  to  the 

B 


10 

ground;  that  the  head  is  elevated,  and  direct  to  the  front; 
and  that  the  shoulder  does  not  turn  forward. 

The  recruits  will  be  exercised  much  in  marching  with 
this  step,  which  is  difficult  at  first,  but  very  useful  in  move- 
ments of  the  line.  It  is  also  an  excellent  mode  of  giving  to 
the  soldier  an  erect  position,  and  the  habit  of  keeping  his 
shoulders  square  to  the  front.  For  these  purposes,  the  in- 
structer  will  cause  the  recruits  to  march  fifty  or  sixty  paces 
obliquely,  before  the  direct  step  is  resumed. 

When  the  recruit  is  perfected  in  marching  the  oblique 
step,  the  instructer  will  not  be  rigorously  precise  in  exacting 
the  observance  of  the  rule  laid  down  for  the  length  of  this 
step;  but  will  require  of  the  recruit  that  he  gain  as  much 
ground  as  possible,  both  sideways,  and  to  the  front,  without 
altering  the  direction  of  the  shoulders,  which  must  be  square 
to  the  front. 

General  Observations  on  the  Direct  and  Oblique  Steps. 

In  order  to  ascertain  whether  the  position  of  the  body  con- 
forms to  the  principles  laid  down;  whether  the  step  is  regu- 
larly taken;  and  whether  the  weight  of  the  body  rests  wholly 
upon  one  foot;  the  instructer  will  frequently  place  himself 
from  six  to  twelve  paces  in  front,  facing  the  recruit.  If  then 
he  cannot  see  the  soles  of  the  shoes  when  the  feet  are  lifted 
and  thrown  forward;  if  he  does  not  observe  any  motion  of 
the  shoulders,  or  undulating  movement  of  the  body;  he  may 
rest  assured  that  the  principles  of  marching  are  well  ob- 
served. 

When  the  principles  of  the  step  are  to  be  demonstrated  to 
two  or  three  men  at  a  time,  accurate  dressing  need  not  be 
required;  as  that  might  divide  their  attention.  When  they 
have  acquired  the  habit  of  taking  steps  of  equal  length  in 
equal  time,  they  have  acquired  the  true  method  of  preserv- 
ing the  alignment. 

The  instructer  should  also  observe,  where  two  or  three 
recruits  are  drilled  together,  to  place  them  at  one  pace  dis- 
tance from  each  other,  to  prevent  their  acquiring  the  bad 
habit  of  extending  the  elbows,  or  of  leaning  against  the  men 
on  either  side  of  them. 


11 


PART  II. 
Of  Shouldered  Arms. 

The  instructer  will  not  allow  the  recruits  to  commence 
the  second  part  of  the  drill  of  the  soldier,  until  they  have  be- 
come perfect  in  the  position  of  the  body,  and  in  the  perfor- 
mance of  the  direct  and  oblique  steps. 

The  instructer  will  then  place  three  men  in  a  rank,  el- 
bow to  elbow,  and  instruct  them  to  hold  their  arms  at  the 
shoulder. 

LESSON  I. 

Principles  of  Shouldered  Arms. 

The  recruit  being  placed  as  directed  in  the  first  lesson  of 
the  first  part  of  this  drill,  the  instructer  will  cause  him  to 
raise  up  the  left  hand  without  bending  the  wrist,  the  part  ot 
the  arm  from  the  elbow  downwards  only  moving.  The  in- 
structer shall  then  raise  the  firelock  perpendicularly,  and 
place  it  in  the  following  manner. 

The  firelock  in  the  left  hand;  the  arm  a  little  bent;  the  elbow 
back  and  touching  the  body,  without  pressing  it;  the  palm  ot 
the  hand  placed  firm  against  the  exterior  side  of  the  butt,  its 
exterior  edge  on  the  junction  of  the  fingers  with  the  palm;  the 
heel  resting  between  the  fore  and  middle  fingers;  the  thumb 
above,  in  front;  the  two  last  fingers  under  the  butt,  which 
will  be  brought  more  or  less  back,  according  to  the  form  of 
the  soldier;  so  that  the  firelock  seen  from  the  front  may  ap- 
pear always  perpendicular,  and  that  the  motion  of  the  thigh 
in  marching  may  not  derange  its  position;  the  rammer  be- 
fore the  point  of  the  shoulder;  the  right  arm  hanging  natu- 
rally, as  described  in  the  first  lesson  of  the  first  part  of  this 
drill. 

The  instructer  will  endeavour  to  correct  the  natural  de- 
fects in  the  position  of  recruits,  before  he  delivers  arms  into 
their  hands;  so  that  the  general  appearance  of  the  men  may 
be  uniform,  without  painful  constraint. 

Previous  to  proceeding  with  the  second  lesson,  the  in- 
structer will  make  the  recruits,  with  shouldered  arms,  practise 
the  motions  of  turning  the  head  to  the  right  and  left,  and 
also  the  facings,  to  the  right,  to  the  left,  and  to  the  right 
about. 


12 

LESSON  II. 
The  Manual  Exercise. 

It  should  be  taught  to  three  men,  placed  first  in  one  rank 
witli  their  elbows  touching,  and  then  placed  in  a  file  of  three 
ranks. 

On  pronouncing  the  last  syllable  of  the  command,  the  first 
motion  is  to  be  performed  with  life  and  spirit. 

The  instructer  will  pronounce  *'  two"  and  "  three"  for 
the  regulation  of  the  other  motions.  The  same  time  is  al- 
lowed for  performing  a  motion  as  for  making  a  common 
pace. 

When  the  soldier  becomes  well  acquainted  with  the  posi- 
tion of  the  different  motions,  he  will  be  required  to  perform 
them  without  stopping. 

Support,  ARMS. 

1.  Bring  the  right  hand  smartly  across  the  body,  seizing 
the  piece  at  the  small. 

2.  Quit  the  butt  with  the  left,  throwing  the  lower  part  of 
the  arm  horizontally  across  the  body,  the  hand  grasping  the 
right  arm  at  the  swell. 

Note.  The  above  will  be  the  position  on  parade.  On  a 
march  the  soldier  may  let  his  right  hand  fall  by  his  side. 

Carry,  arms. 

1.  Bring  down  the  left  hand  strong  upon  the  butt,  seizing 
it  with  the  usual  hold. 

2.  Bring  the  right  hand  down  by  the  side. 

Slope,  ARMS. 

1.  Throw  forward  the  butt  so  that  the  upper  part  of  the 
left  arm  will  be  perpendicular,  and  the  lower  extend  hori- 
zontally forward. 

Carry,  arms. 

1.  Bring  the  butt  and  left  hand  to  their  former  position, 
raising  the  right  hand  smartly  to  the  small,  stop  and  steady 
the  piece. 

Bring  the  right  hand  down  by  the  side. 


13 


Trail,  arms. 

1.  Sink  the  firelock  with  the  left  hand,  and  with  the  right 
seize  it  at  the  left,  shoulder. 

2.  Bring  down  the  piece  by  the  right  side,  the  muzzle 
pointing  forward,  the  butt  near  the  ground. 

Shoulder,  arms. 

1.  Shift  the  piece  in  the  right  hand,  seizing  it  near  the 
feather  spring;  bring  it  to  the  shouldered  position,  and  seize 
the  butt  with  the  left  hand. 

2.  Bring  the  right  hand  down  by  the  side. 

Order,  arms. 

1.  Sink  the  firelock  with  the  left  hand,  and  with  the  right 
seize  it  above  the  left  shoulder. 

2.  Quit  the  firelock  with  the  left  hand,  and  with  the  right 
bring  it  to  the  right  side,  the  butt  lightly  on  the  ground 
by  the  toe  of  the  right  foot,  or  on  it  if  the  ground  is  wet; 
the  thumb  and  fingers  of  the  right  hand  enrvbracing  the  piece^ 
and  extending  downwards. 

Shoulder,  arms. 

1.  Throw  up  the  firelock,  catching  it  again  below  the  tail 
pipe,  bring  it  to  the  left  shoulder,  and  seize  it  with  the  left 
hand  at  the  butt.  . 

2.  Bring  the  right  hand  down  by  the  side. 

Secure,  firelock. 

1.  Bring  up  the  right  hand  briskly,  and  place  it  against  the 
piece  at  the  small. 

2.  Quit  the  butt  with  the  left  hand,  and  seize  the  firelock 
at  the  swell,  bringing  the  arm  close  down  upon  the  lock,  the 
right  remaining  at  the  small,  and  the  piece  upright. 

3.  Bring  the  right  hand  down  by  the  side,  throwing  for- 
ward the  muzzle,  the  bayonet  point  about  a  foot  from  the 
ground,  the  left  arm  covering  the  lock. 


14 

Shoulder,  arms. 

1.  Bring  the  piece  smartly  up  to  the  shoulder  with  the  left 
hand,  stop  and  steady  the  piece  with  the  right  at  the  small. 

2.  Bring  the  left  hand  down  strong  upon  the  butt. 

3.  Bring  the  right  hand  down  by  the  side. 

Present,  arms. 

1.  With  the  left  hand  turn  the  piece,  the  lock  to  the  front, 
seizing  it  with  the  right  hand  at  the  small. 

2.  Bring  up  the  piece  with  the  right  hand,  quitting  the  butt 
with  the  left,  and  seizing  the  piece  above  the  lock  as  high  as 
the  eyes,  holding  it  perpendicular. 

3.  Draw  back  the  right  foot  six  inches,  sink  the  niece,  the 
butt  before  the  left  knee,  the  fingers  of  the  right  hand  ex- 
tended, the  ramrod  to  the  front. 

Shoulder,  arms. 

1 .  Throw  the  firelock  up  to  the  shoulder,  bring  up  the  right 
foot,  and  seize  the  butt  with  the  left  hand. 

2.  Bring  the  right  hand  down  by  the  side. 

Charge,  bayonet. 

1.  Make  a  half  face  to  the  right,  place  the  right  foot  square 
and  close  behind  the  left  heel,  turn  the  firelock  with  the  left 
hand,  the  lock  to  the  front,  seize  it  with  the  right  hand  at  the 
small,  take  the  left  hand  from  the  butt. 

2.  Bring  down  the  piece  into  the  left  hand,  which  seizes 
it  near  the  tail  pipe,  the  bayonet  pointing  to  the  front,  the 
point  as  high  as  the  eye. 

Shoulder,  arms. 

1.  Throw  the  firelock  up  to  the  shoulder,  seizing  it  with 
the  left  hand  at  the  butt. 

2.  Bring  the  right  hand  down  by  the  side. 

Advance,  arms. 

1.  2.  The  same  as  the  two  first  motions  of  "  present  arms." 

3.  Throw  the  piece  with  the  left  hand  to  the  right  side, 
the  barrel  to  the  rear,  the  guard  between  the  thumb  and  fore 
finger  of  the  right  hand,  the  other  fingers  of  that  hand  under 
the  cock,  the  peice  perpendicular  before  the  right  shoulder. 

4-.  Bring  the  left  hand  down  by  the  side. 


15 


Shoulder,  arms. 

1.  Throw  up  the  piece,  seize  it  with  the  left  hand  at  the 
swell,  o.;id  with  the  right  at  the  small. 

2.  Bring  up  the  piece  to  the  second  position  of  "  present 
arms." 

.T.  and  4.  Shoulder,  and  bring  down  the  right  hand. 

LESSON  III. 

On  Loading, 

The  instructer  will  command. 

Load  by  word. 
Open,  PAN. 

1.  Make  a  half  face  to  the  right,  place  the  right  foot  square 
and  close  behind  the  left  heel,  turn  the  firelock,  the  lock  to 
the  front,  seize  it  with  the  right  hand  at  the  small,  take  the 
left  hand  from  the  butt. 

2.  Let  fall  the  firelock  the  swell  in  the  left  hand,  the  butt 
under  the  right  arm,  the  muzzle  as  high  as  the  eye,  the  guard 
a  little  outwards,  the  left  elbow  resting  against  the  side,  the 
thumb  of  the  right  hand  against  the  steel,  the  fingers  clenched, 
the  elbow  pressing  the  butt  against  the  body. 

3.  Open  the  pan  by  forcibly  pushing  the  thumb  against  the 
steel,  the  left  hand  resisting,  and  keeping  the  piece  steady. 

Handle,  cartridge. 

1.  Bring  the  hand  quick  to  the  box,  open  it,  take  out  the 
first  cartridge  felt,  carry  it  quickly  to  the  mouth,  bite  the  paper 
to  the  powder,  bring  the  hand  down  as  low  as  the  shoulder, 
the  elbow  down. 

Prime. 

1.  Incline  the  head  that  the  eye  may  see  the  pan,  fill  it  with 
powder,  close  the  cartridge,  bring  the  three  last  fingers  be- 
hind the  steel. 

Shut,  pan. 

1.  Resist  with  the  left  hand,  shut  the  pan  strong  with  the 
three  last  fingers  of  the  right. 


16 

2.  Half  face  to  the  left,  bring  the  right  foot  to  the  front, 
the  heel  against  the  hollow  of  the  left,  turn  the  piece  to  the 
position  of  the  second  motion  of  the  secure,  nearly,  the  fire- 
lock four  inches  lower,  by  bearing  strong  on  the  butt  with  the 
right  hand,  and  bringing  the  left  hand  to  the  left  shoulder. 

3.  Quitting  the  firelock  with  the  right  hand,  let  it  slide 
through,  the  left,  the  butt  falling  lightly  on  the  ground  near  the 
left  toe,  and  bring  the  right  hand  up  to  the  muzzle,  which  is 
before  the  middle  of  the  breast,  the  piece  touching  the  left 
thigh. 

Charge,  cartridge. 

1.  Cast  the  eye  on  the  muzzle,  turn  up  the  right  hand  and 
elbow,  put  the  cartridge  into  the  barrel,  shake  in  the  powder 
and  force  in  the  ball. 

2.  Turn  the  stock  inwards,  bring  down  the  right  elbow, 
and  seize  the  butt  of  the  rammer  between  the  thumb  and 
fore  finger  of  the  right  hand,  the  fingers  closed. 

Draw,  RAMMER. 

1.  Draw  the  rammer  by  extending  briskly  the  arm,  the 
nails  upward,  quit  and  instantly  seize  it  again  at  the  muz- 
zle, the  nails  downward. 

2.  Draw  it  quite  out,  turn  it  between  the  face  and  the 
muzzle,  and  enter  it  into  the  muzzle  as  far  as  the  hand. 

Ram,  CARTRIDGE. 

1.  Extend  the  arm,  seize  again  the  rammer,  and  with  two 
strokes  force  down  the  cartridge,  draw  the  rammer  half 
out,  seize  it  backhanded,  draw  turn  and  enter  it  as  far  as  the 
tail  pipe,  placing  the  edge  of  the  hand,  the  palm  downwards, 
on  the  butt  of  the  rammer,  the  fingers  extended. 

Return,  rammer. 

1.  Force  the  rammer  home,  raising  the  piece  with  the  left 
hand  to  the  shouldering  position,  placing  the  right  hand 
against  the  piece  at  the  small,  and  bringing  the  right  heel 
back  beside  the  left. 

Shoulder,  arms. 

1.  Bring  the  left  hand  strong  on  the  butt. 

2.  Bring  the  right  hand  down  by  the  side. 


17 


LESSON  IV. 

On  Firing. 
The  instructer  will  command, 

Make,  ready. 

Position  of  the  First  Rank, 

1.  With  the  left  hand  turn  the  firelock,  the  lock  to  the 
front,  with  the  right  hand  seize  it  at  the  small,  as  in  the  first 
motion  of  loading,  turning  the  point  of  the  left  foot  to  the 
front. 

2.  Draw  the  right  foot  quickly  back,  kneel  on  the  right 
knee,  placed  one  foot  to  the  rear  and  six  inches  to  the  right 
of  the  left  heel,  being  careful  not  to  come  down  too  suddenly; 
at  the  same  time  bring  down  the  firelock  with  the  right  hand, 
seize  it  with  the  left  at  the  lower  pipe,  place  the  butt  on  the 
ground  lightly,  even  with  the  left  heel,  and  in  front  of  the 
right  thigh,  seize  the  cock  between  the  thumb  and  fore  finger 
of  the  right  hand. 

3.  Cock  the  firelock. 

Position  of  the  Second  Rank. 

1.  The  same  as  the  first  motion  of  loading. 

2.  With  the  right  hand  bring  the  firelock  before  the  middle 
of  the  body,  place  the  left  hand  with  its  littl-e  finger  touching 
the  feather  spring,  the  thumb  as  high  as  the  chia,  and  point- 
ing upwards  along  the  stock,  the  brass  counterplate  turned 
towards  the  body,  and  the  rammer  to  the  front;  place  the 
thumb  of  the  right  hand  on  the  head  of  the  cock,  the  fingers 
on  the  guard. 

3.  Bring  down  briskly  the  right  elbow,  cocking  the  fire- 
lock, and  seize  it  by  the  small  of  the  stock. 

Position  of  the  Third  Rank. 

1.  2.  3.  The  same  motions  as  those  described  for  the  se- 
cond rank. 

Take,  aim. 

Bring  down  quickly  the  muzzle  of  the  firelock,  sliding  the 
left  hand  to  the  lower  pipe;  place  the  butt  against  the  right 
shoulder,  the  muzzle  lower  than  the  eye,  the  right  elbow  kept 

C 


18 

lowered,  without  pressing  the  body;  shut  the  left  eye,  and 
look  along  the  barrel  with  the  right,  inclining  the  head  for- 
wards, and  placing  the  fore  finger  of  the  right  hand  on  the 
trigger. 

The  men  of  the  third  rank,  and  they  only,  will  step  nine 
inches  to  the  right,  in  taking  aim. 

Recover,  arms. 

Come  to  the  position  effected  by  the  command  "  maie 
ready j^^  and  remain.  The  instructer  will  again  order. 

Take,  aim. 
Fire. 

Press  the  forefinger  strongly  on  the  trigger,  without  low- 
ering the  head,  turning  it,  or  moving  the  piece. 

Load. 

Draw  back  the  firelock  quickly,  and  take  the  position  ef- 
fected by  the  command  "  load  anns^^  except  that  the  thumb 
of  the  right  hand,  instead  of  being  placed  against  the  steel, 
seizes  with  the  fore  finger  bent  the  top  of  the  cock,  the  other 
fingers  remaining  shut.  The  men  of  the  front  rank,  without 
bending  forward,  will  spring  up,  keeping  back  the  right 
shoulder,  in  order  to  avoid  the  firelocks  of  the  second  rank; 
and  the  men  of  the  rear  rank  will  bring  back  the  right  foot, 
placing  the  hollow  behind  the  left  heel. 

Should  the  instructer  desire  to  load,  he  will  command. 

Half-cock,  FIRELOCK. 

If  the  instructer  does  not  wish  to  load,  he  will  command, 

Shoulder,  arms. 

1.  Draw  back  the  cock  to  halfcock;  taking  care  not  to  cock 
the  piece.  Shut  the  pan  with  the  three  last  fingers  of  the 
right  hand. 

2.  Seize  the  piece  at  the  small,  bring  it  to  the  shoulder, 
the  left  hand  on  the  butt,  bringing  up  the  right  foot. 

3.  Bring  the  right  hand  down  by  the  side. 

Every  lesson  in  the  drill  of  the  soldier  will  conclude  with 
:*n  exercise  in  marching. 


19 

Mark  time. 

March. 

At  the  second  command  which  will  be  given  as  either  foot 
comes  to  the  ground,  the  recruit  will  keep  the  step,  observ- 
ing cadence,  without  advancing. 

Forward. 
March. 

TTie  soldier  will  advance  with  the  ordinary  step. 


PART  III. 
LESSON  I. 
Of  Marching  in  Line,  different  Steps  and  Time* 

The  instructer  will  place  from  five  to  ten  men  in  a  rank  to 
teach  them  to  march  to  the  front  to  a  flank  j  quick  step;  step 
back;  changing  direction;  wheeling  on  the  march,  or  on  a 
fixed  pivot,  and  dressing  in  line. 

Having  placed  them  in  line,  the  instructer  will  command, 

Platoon,  forward. 
Guide  to  the  right. 
March. 

At  the  word  "  march,"  the  rank  step  off  with  the  left  feet. 
The  instructer  will  have  placed  a  well  drilled  man  two  paces 
before  the  soldier  on  the  right  flank,  to  give  the  step  and  di- 
rection. The  soldier  on  the  right  flank  will  follow  his  steps, 
and  keep  two  paces  behind  him. 

The  soldier  will  be  directed  to  touch  lightly  the  elbow  of 
the  next  man  on  the  side  of  the  guide;  to  resist  pressure  on 
the  contrary  side,  and  yield  to  that  which  comes  from  the 
side  of  the  guide;  to  join  the  elbow  by  degrees,  if  separated; 
to  carrj^  the  head  upright,  the  e}es  directed  to  the  ground, 
fifteen  paces  in  front;  and  to  correct  any  error  in  his  position 
by  degrees. 

The  instructer  will  explain,  that  the  line  cannot  be  pre- 
served but  by  regularity  of  step,  touching  the  elbows,  and 
keeping  the  shoulders  square  to  the  front. 

The  instructer  will  exercise  them  in  marching  with  the 
guide  on  the  left,  also  in  the  oblique  march  to  right  and  left. 


20 

When  the  instructer  judges  the  recruits  sufficiently  taught 
to  march  in  common  time,  he  will  teach  them  to  march  in 
quick  time,  and  step  back.  He  will  command, 

Quick  step. 

March. 

At  the  word  "  march,"  which  should  be  given  when  either 
foot  comes  to  the  ground,  the  rank  will  take  the  quick  step; 
the  length  is  the  same  as  the  common  step,  and  one  hundred 
are  taken  in  a  minute.  The  oblique  step  is  not  taken  in  quick 
time.  ^ 

Common  time. 
March. 

At  the  word  "  march,"  which  will  be  given  when  either 
foot  comes  to  the  ground,  the  rank  will  take  the  ordinary- 
step. 

Platoon. 
Halt. 

The  foot  up  is  brought  to  the  ground,  and  that  behind  is 
brought  up,  without  stamping. 

Step  back. 
March. 

The  rank  will  step  back  twelve  inches  at  a  step,  beginning 
with  the  left  feet. 

Platoon. 
Halt. 

The  foot  in  front  is  brought  back  even  with  the  other. 
The  instructer  will  require  that  the  soldiers  move  straight 
back,  and  preserve  the  due  position  of  the  body  and  piece. 


LESSON  IL 

Marching  by  a  Flank. 

The  soldiers  being  in  a  line,  elbows  touching,  the  instruc- 
ter will  command, 


21 

Platoon,  by  the  right  flank. 
To  the  right,  face. 
March. 

At  the  second  command,  they  face;  and  at  the  word 
"  march,"  step  off  with  the  left  feet,  common  time. 

The  instructer  will  place  a  well  drilled  man  beside  him 
who  is  on  the  leading  flank,  touching  his  elbow,  to  regulate 
his  step,  and  for  him  to  dress  on. 

At  every  step  the  foremost  foot  of  each  soldier  will  be 
placed  even  with  the  hindmost  foot  of  the  soldier  who 
marches  before  him. 

By  file  to  the  fight. 
March. 

At  the  second  command,  the  leading  man  will  turn  to  the 
right,  and  march  straight  on.  Each  other  man  when  he  comes 
to  the  same  place  will  turn  to  the  right,  and  march  straight 
on  in  the  same  direction. 

Platoon. 
Halt. 

Front. 

At  the  second  command,  every  foot  is  brought  to  the 
ground,  and  no  one  stirs,  although  he  has  lost  his  distance. 

At  the  third  command,  they  face  to  the  front;  to  the  left, 
if  marching  by  the  right;  to  the  right,  if  marching  by  the 
left. 

When  the  men  are  instructed  to  march  in  common  time 
to  the  flank,  they  will  be  so  marched  in  quick  time. 


LESSON  III. 
The  Principles  of  Dressing  into  Line. 

The  instructer  will  first  exercise  the  men  in  forming  the 
line  one  at  a  time. 

He  will  command  the  two  first  men  on  the  right  to  march 
two  paces  in  front.  He  will  then  dress  them,  and  desire  each 
man  successively  to  form  line  on  the  two  first.  Each  soldier 
commanded  will  turn  his  head,  look  to  the  right,  march  two 
paces  ordinary  time,  so  as  to  be  six  inches  behind  the  line, 
and  dress  forward  by  degrees,  keeping  the  hams  stretched, 
moving  forward  gently,  without  jerking,  so  that  his  shoul- 


22, 

dcrs  are  exactly  in  line  with  those  of  the  man  on  his  right, 
and  so  as  just  to  feel  his  elbow  without  moving  his  own  from 
his  body. 

The  dressing  on  the  left  is  done  in  the  same  manner. 

When  the  recruits  have  learnt  to  form  the  line  one  at  a 
time,  without  shuffling,  the  instructer  will  form  the  line  at 
once. 

To  the  right,  dress. 

The  whole  will  advance  in  ordinary  time,  upon  the  new 
line  marked  by  the  two  men  on  the  right,  and  dress. 

Steady. 

The  soldier  looks  to  the  front,  and  remains  motionless. 
If  the  line  is  not  perfect,  the  instructer  having  beforehand 
numbered  the  men  from  right  to  left,  will  command. 

Number  four,  move  up. 

or 
Number  three,  step  back. 

and  so  correct  the  line. 

By  the  right,  backward  dress. 

The  soldiers  will  step  back  a  little  in  rear  of  the  line  mark- 
ed by  the  two  men  placed  on  the  right,  and  then  move  up 
into  it  by  degrees. 

LESSON  IV. 
Of  Wheeling,  and  Changing  the  Direction^ 

Wheelings  are  of  two  kinds.  First,  on  a  fixed  pivot.  Se- 
cond, on  a  march. 

The  first  kind  are  used  to  form  the  open  column  from  the 
line,  or  the  contrary. 

The  second  kind  are  used  to  change  the  direction  of  the 
open  column  on  the  march. 

In  wheeling  on  a  fixed  pivot,  the  pivot  man  turns  on  his 
heels  without  advancing. 

In  wheeling  on  a  march,  the  pivot  man  takes  steps  of  six 
inches,  to  keep  that  flank  in  motion,  which  is  necessary  to 
avoid  obstructing  the  next  platoon. 


23 

The  man  on  the  marching  flank  will  take  steps  of  the  usual 
length. 

1.  On  a  fixed  pivot. 

The  instructer  will  place  a  man  well  drilled  on  the  march- 
ing flank,  to  conduct  it. 

Platoon. 

To  the  right,  wheel. 
March. 
At  the  word  "  march,"  the  soldiers  step  off  with  the  left 
feet,  turning  their  eyes  to  the  left,  in  a  line  with  the  eyes  of 
the  men  on  their  left,  conforming  to  the  movement  of  the 
marching  flank.  Each  soldier  should  feel  the  elbow  of  the 
man  next  him  on  the  pivot  side,  and  resist  pressure  from  the 
marching  flank. 

The  instructer  will  sometimes  cause  them  to  wheel  a  com- 
plete circle  without  stopping;  and  take  care  to  prevent  the 
centre  from  breaking  off. 

Wheeling  to  the  left,  is  performed  in  the  like  manner. 

Platoon. 
Halt. 

At  the  word  "  halt,"  no  man  will  stir,  until  the  next  word 
of  command  is  given. 

The  instructer  will  step  to  the  reverse  flank,  and  place 
the  two  outside  men  in  the  direction  he  would  give  the  line, 
at  such  distance  from  the  pivot  as  will  admit  all  the  files. 

To  the  left,  dress. 

At  this  command  the  men  will  advance,  form  the  line,  and 
the  instructer  will  command. 

Steady. 
The  whole  will  look  to  the  front,  and  stand  firm. 

2.  Wheeling  on  a  march. 

As  soon  as  the  men  can  perform  the  wheel  on  a  fixed  pivot 
they  are  to  be  exercised  in  wheeling  on  a  march. 

The  rank  being  on  the  march,  the  instructer  will  command, 
if  he  wishes  to  wheel  from  the  side  of  the  guide; 


To  the  left,  wheel. 
March. 

The  first  command  is  to  be  given  when  the  rank  is  two 
paces  from  where  the  wheel  is  to  be  made.  At  the  word 
"  march,"  the  pivot  man  will  conform  to  the  movement  of 
the  marching  flank,  will  feel  the  man  on  his  right,  and  take 
steps  of  six  inches.  The  touch  of  the  elbow  will  be  on  the 
side  of  the  guide;  that  is,  here,  the  right. 

Forward. 

March. 

At  the  word  '*  march,"  the  man  who  conducts  the  marching 
flank  will  take  a  direction  straight  forward,  and  all  will  take 
the  step  of  two  feet. 

Change  of  Direction  to  the  Side  of  the  Guide. 
The  instructer  will  command. 

To  the  right,  turn.* 
March. 

At  the  word  march,  the  guidef  will  take  the  new  direction 
without  altering  the  length  or  cadence  of  the  step.  All  the 
rest  will  conform  to  the  new  direction,  by  advancing  the 
shoulders  opposite  the  guide,  and  taking  the  quick  step  until 
they  respectively  attain  the  new  direction;  when  they  will 
take  the  step  from  the  guide,  and  face  to  the  front. 

End  of  the  Soldier's  Drill. 

*  The  word  "  turn"  is  appropriated  to  wheeling  by  independent  files, 
©r,  as  it  is  sometimes  called,  "  shoulders  forward." 

f  Tlie  guide  here  is  only  supposed  The  disciplined  man,  who  marches 
two  puces  before  the  right  flank  is  not  in  the  position  of  the  guide.  The 
guide  of  a  platoon  marches  even  with  and  six  niches  from  the  front  rank. 


25 

SECTION  III. 

Drill  of  the  Company. 

When  the  recruits  have  been  sufficiently  instructed  in  the 
soldier's  drill,  they  will  be  formed  as  a  company  in  three 
ranks,  with  a  captain,  covering  sergeant,  and  file  closers,  as 
has  been  directed. 

The  officer  who  exercises  the  company  will  be  called  the 
instructer.  He  will  number  the  files  from  right  to  left.  He 
will  be  clear  and  concise  in  his  explanations,  and  calm  in  his 
manner. 

LESSON  1. 

Article  I. 

Opening  Ranks. 

The  company  being  at  ordered  arms,  the  instructer  will 
place  the  second  sergeant  on  the  left  of  the  first  rank,  cover- 
ed by  a  corporal  on  the  third  rank,  and  will  command, 

1  Attention. 

2  Shoulder,  arms. 

3  Rear  ranks,  take  distance. 

4  March. 

At  the  word  "  distance,"  the  captain  and  the  sergeant  on 
the  left  of  the  first  rank,  step  back  to  the  line  of  file  closers, 
and  dress  by  them. 

The  covering  sergeant  and  the  corporal  placed  on  the  left 
of  the  rear  rank,  step  back  to  the  distance  of  four  paces  in 
rear  of  the  line  of  file  closers,  judging  the  distance  by  the  eye. 

At  the  word  march,  the  first  rank  stands  fast.  The  two 
rear  ranks  step  back  in  common  time,  without  counting  the 
steps,  and  place  themselves  in  the  line  taken  for  each  rank. 

The  captain  will  dress  the  second  rank,  and  the  covering 
sergeant  will  dress  the  third  rank,  on  the  corporal  on  the  left. 

The  file  closers  step  back  at  the  same  time,  and  take  their 
distance  of  two  paces,  when  the  third  rank  is  formed. 

D 


26 


Steady. 

At  this  command  by  the  instructer,  the  captain,  and  the 
sergeant  u  ho  is  on  the  left  of  the  second  rank,  regain  their 
posts  on  the  front  rank. 

Article  II. 

Dressing-  at  Open  Order, 

The  instructer  will  cause  three  men  on  the  right  of  each 
rank  to  march  three  paces  to  the  front,  and  havmg  dressed 
them  will  command, 

By  file,  to  the  right  dress. 

At  this  command  the  soldiers  of  each  rank  will  form  suc- 
cessively upon  the  line,  each  being  preceded  two  paces  by 
the  man  next  him  on  the  right. 

The  line  will  be  formed  to  the  left  in  the  like  manner. 

The  instructer  will  then  cause  the  line  to  be  formed  at  once 
by  each  rank,  to  the  front,  and  to  the  rear,  and  in  parallel 
and  oblique  directions. 

To  the  right,  dress. 

The  instructer  will  attend  to  the  execution  of  the  first 
rank,  the  captain  to  the  second,  and  the  covering  sergeant 
to  the  third.  And  after  every  alignment  will  pass  along  the 
ranks,  and  inspect  the  position  of  the  men  and  arms. 

To  the  right,  backward  dress. 

The  soldiers  will  step  back  behind  the  line,  and  take  the 
true  direction  by  degrees,  moving  up  gently,  preserving  a 
proper  position,  and  taking  care  never  to  get  before  the  line. 

There  are  always  to  be  three  men  of  each  rank  placed  as 
a  basis  whereon  the  line  is  to  be  formed. 

Article  III. 

Manual  Exercise. 

The  ranks  being  at  open  order,  the  instructer  will  place 
himself  before  the  right  flank,  and  command  the  manual  ex- 
ercise and  motions  of  loading,  in  this  order: 


27 

1  Support  Arms.  14  Shoulder  Arms, 

2  Carry  Arms.  15  Advance  Arms. 

3  Slope  Arms.  16  Shoulder  Arms. 

4  Carry  Arms.  17  Load  bv  the  word. 

5  Trail  Arms.  18  Open  Pan, 

6  Shoulder  Arms,  19  Handle  Cartridge. 

7  Order  Arms.  20  Prime, 

8  Shoulder  Arms.  21   Shut  Pan. 

9  Secure  Firelock,  22  Charge  Cartridge, 

10  Shoulder  Arms.  23   Draw  Rammer. 

11  Present  Arms.  24  Ram  Cartridge. 

12  Shoulder  Arms.  25   Return  Rammer. 

13  Charge  Bayonet.  26  Shoulder  Arms. 

The  instructer  will  observe  that  the  position  of  the  body, 
firelock,  and  feet,  are  exact;  and  the  motions  smartly  exe- 
cuted.* 


Article  IV. 

Closing  Ranks. 
The  manual  being  finished,  the  instructer  will  command, 

1  Close  ranks. 

2  March. 

At  the  word  "  march,"  the  two  rear  ranks  will  close  by 
the  common  step,  each  man  covering  his  file  leader.  The 
captain  and  covering  sergeant  take  their  posts  in  the  line. 

Article  V. 
Dressing  at  Close  Order. 

The  instructer,  placing  three  files  to  serve  as  a  basis,  will 
cause  new  parallel  and  oblique  directions  to  be  taken,  to  the 
front  and  rear. 

As  soon  as  the  captain  sees  the  greatest  part  of  the  front 
rank  dressed,  he  will  command, 

•  The  repealed  */ioMWen«^j!  in  the  manual  exercise  have  been  objected 
to;  but  they  are  all  necessary  to  be  taught,  as  the  firelock  is  brought  to  the 
shoulder  from  each  of  tiie  other  positions;  and  these  shoulderings  are  va- 
riously performed  by  two,  three,  or  four  motions. 


28 

Steady. 

And  afterwards  rectify,  if  necessary,  the  dressing  of  the 
rest. 

The  file  closers  will  always  place  themselves  two  paces  in 
rear  of  the  third  rank. 

1  Order,  arms. 

2  Rest. 

This  should  be  observed  at  the  end  of  every  lesson. 


LESSON  II. 

Article  I. 
Loading  in  ^ick  Time. 
The  instructer  will  command, 

1  Attention. 

2  Shoulder,  arms. 

3  Load  in  quick  time. 

4  Load,  ARMS. 

At  this  last  word  each  soldier  will  commence  loading;  he 
will  open  pan,  take  out  cartridge,  break  cartridge,  prime. 

Two. 

At  this  word  the  soldier  proceeds  to  shut  pan,  charge  car- 
tridge. 

Three. 

He  draws  rammer,  rams  cartridge,  striking  twice. 

Four. 
He  returns  rammer,  and  shoulders  arms. 


29 


Article  II. 
Loading  in  Quickest  Time. 
The  instructer  will  command. 

1  Load  at  will. 

2  Prime  and  Load. 

At  this  word  the  soldiers  will  load  and  shoulder  without 
stopping.  This  being  the  mode  of  loading  in  battle,  the  sol- 
diers must  be  practised  in  it  until  they  can  charge  three  rounds 
in  a  minute. 

The  instructer  will  require  regularity,  without  which  the 
soldiers  embarras  each  other. 

Article  III. 
Fire  by  the  Company, 
The  instructer  will  command, 

1  Fire  by  company. 

2  Commence  firing. 

At  the  word  "  company,"  the  captain  will  step  briskly  to 
the  rear  of  the  centre  of  his  company,  two  paces  behind  the 
file  closers. 

The  covering  serjeant  will  fall  back  into  the  line  of  file 
closers,  opposite  his  post. 

At  the  second  command,  the  captain  will  order, 

1  Company. 

2  Ready. 

3  Aim. 

4  Fire. 

5  Prime  and  Load. 

At  the  word  "  load,"  the  soldiers  draw  back  their  pieces 
from  the  aiming  position,  load  them,  and  carry  arms.  The 
men  of  the  third  rank  step  nine  inches  to  the  right,  to  be  op- 
posite the  interval  of  the  other  ranks. 

The  captain  will  continue  the  fire  by  the  same  commands, 
until  the  drum  beats  the  signal  for  the  firing  to  cease. 

1  be  ci'.ptain  will  sometimes  command  "  to  the  right  (or 
left)  oblique,"  after  "  ready,"  and  before  "  aim."  He  will 


30 

also  sometimes  command  "  recover  arms,"  to  accustom  the 
men  to  coolness  and  attention  to  the  word  of  command. 

Article  IV. 
Firing  by  File. 
The  instructer  will  command, 

1  Fire  by  file. 

2  Company. 

3  Ready. 

4  Commence  firing. 

At  the  first  command,  the  captain  will  step  one  pace  in  the 
rear  of  the  third  rank,  opposite  his  interval;  and  the  covering 
Serjeant  will  step  into  the  line  of  file  closers,  behind  the  cap- 
tain. 

The  fire  will  commence  by  file  on  the  right.  Each  file 
will  fire  when  the  next  file  on  the  right  has  primed.  This  suc- 
cession is  only  necessary  during  the  first  round.  The  third 
rank  is  not  to  fire. 

The  instructer  will  cause  the  firing  to  cease  by  a  short  roll 
of  the  drum.  It  will  end  with  a  tap,  as  the  signal  to  the 
captain  and  covering  serjeant  to  resume  their  places  in 
the  order  of  battle;  and  both  "  the  roll,"  and  "■  the  tap,"  will 
be  commanded  by  the  instructer;  the  last  when  the  arms  are 
shouldered. 

Article  V. 

Firing  to  the  Rear. 

The  instructer  will  command, 

1  Fire  to  the  rear. 

2  Company. 

3  Right  about,  face. 

At  the  word  "  right  about,"  the  captain  will  step  behind 
the  right  hand  man  of  the  front  rank.  The  covering  serjeant 
and  file  closers  pass  through  the  interval  of  the  captain,  and 
take  post  in  front,  now  becoming  the  rear. 

At  the  word  "  face,"  the  chief  of  platoon  will  place  him- 
self in  the  interval  on  the  third  rank,  now  in  front,  the  co- 
vering serjeant  takes  post  on  the  first  rank,  now  in  the  rear. 

The  instructer  will  command  the  fire  direct,  oblique,  and 
by  files,  as  before. 


u 


1  Company. 

2  Right  about,  face. 

The  captain,  file  closers,  and  covering  serjeant  proceed  as 
before,  and  regain  their  posts  in  the  line. 

The  captain  shall  allow  sufficient  time  between  the  words 
"  aim,"  and  "  fire,"  for  the  soldiers  to  aim  correctly. 

The  instructer  will  place  himself  on  the  right  flank,  so  as 
to  see  the  three  ranks.  The  captain  and  the  file  closers,  who 
are  at  ordered  arms,  will  observe  those  who  load  badly,  or 
are  last  in  firing;  such  must  be  sent  to  the  soldier's  drill. 

Calmness  and  coolness  are  to  be  recommended,  but  life 
and  spirit  are  to  be  preserved  in  the  execution. 

The  instructer  will  direct  them  to  keep  the  left  heel  in  its 
place,  to  preserve  the  line. 

He  will  see  that  the  soldiers  ram  down  well;  charge  them 
to  notice  the  smoke  coming  out  of  the  touchhole  after  firing; 
not  to  cock  instead  of  halfcocking  the  piece;  and  to  be  very 
careful  not  to  load  thrice  without  discharging.  He  will  some- 
times cause  them  to  come  to  ordered  arms,  and  put  the  ram- 
mer in  the  piece  to  ascertain  whether  there  be  more  charges 
in  it  than  one.  If  so,  they  must  be  drawn. 


LESSON  ill. 

Article  I. 

Marching'  in  Line. 

The  company  being  in  line,  and  correctly  dressed,  the 
instructer  will  step  fifteen  paces  to  the  front,  and  place  him- 
self in  aline  with  the  captain  and  covering  serjeant,  who 
is  behind  him  on  the  third  rank.  Being  satisfied  that  they 
have  their  shoulders  in  the  direction  of  the  line,  and  are  cor- 
rectly dressed  one  behind  the  other,  and  being  himself  in 
line  with  the  file  of  direction,  he  will  command, 

1.  Company,  forward. 

At  this  command,  one  of  the  file  closers  previously  ap- 
pointed, will  advance  six  paces  in  front  of  the  captain,  and 
will  be  dressed  on  the  line  with  the  directing  file.  This  file 
closer  will  take  two  points  on  the  ground,  in  a  right  line  pass- 
ing from  him  between  the  heels  of  the  instructer. 


32 


2  March. 

The  company  will  step  off  with  life.  The  file  closer  charged 
with  the  direction  will  observe  the  length  and  cadence  of  the 
step,  and  will  take  as  he  advances  new  points  on  the  same 
line,  at  fifteen  or  twenty  paces  from  each  other.  The  cap- 
tain will  march  exactly  on  his  steps,  six  paces  behind  him. 

The  man  next  to  the  captain  will  be  careful  never  to  get 
before  him.  He  will  therefore  keep  the  line  of  his  shoulders 
rather  in  the  rear,  but  in  the  same  direction  as  those  of  the 
captain. 

The  file  closers  march  two  paces  in  the  rear  of  the  third 
rank. 

If  the  soldiers  lose  the  step,  the  instructer  will  com- 
mand, 

The  step. 

At  this  command  the  soldiers  will  cast  their  eyes  on  the 
directing  Serjeant,  take  the  step  from  him,  and  bring  the  head 
to  its  direct  position. 

The  directing  sergeant  ought  to  be  well  disciplined,  and 
remarkable  for  precision  of  step,  and  correctness  in  keeping 
the  direction. 

The  instructer  will  march  the  company  some  hundred 
paces,  if  the  ground  will  admit,  in  order  to  fix  the  soldiers  in 
the  length  and  cadence  of  the  step.  In  the  first  exercise,  he 
may  march  them  in  open  ranks,  the  covering  sergeant  being 
placed  on  the  second  rank,  behind  the  captain. 

The  instructer  will  sometimes  come  to  the  flank,  to  see  all 
the  faults;  and  sometimes  he  will  place  himself  behind  the 
dire  cting  file,  to  see  if  the  sergeant  advances  on  the  perpen- 
dicular line. 

Article  II. 

To  Halt  and  Dress  the  Company. 

The  instructer  will  command, 

1  Company. 

2  Halt. 

At  the  word  "  halt,"  the  whole  will  stand  fast.  The  di- 
recting Serjeant  will  remain  in  front  until  the  instructer  shall 
desire  him  to  take  his  place  in  the  line. 

The  instructer  will  advance  the  three  right  hand  files  two 
paces,  and  on  the  basis  thereby  formed  dress  the  line.  Or  he 
may  command, 


33 


3  Right,  DRESS. 

The  soldiers  will  turn  the  head  to  the  right,  and  dress  bv 
degrees. 

4  Steady. 

The  whole  look  to  the  front  and  remain  motionless. 

Article  III. 

The  March  Oblique. 

The  company  being  on  the  direct  march,  the  instructer 
will  command, 

1  Oblique  to  the  right. 

2  March. 

At  the  word  "  march,"  which  will  be  pronounced  as  the 
left  foot  comes  to  the  ground,  the  company  will  commence 
the  oblique  step  with  the  right  foot.  The  directing  sergeant 
will  be  careful  to  keep  his  shoulders  square  to  the  front,  and 
to  oblique  with  an  equal  movement.  The  captain  will  con- 
form ghis  march  to  that  of  the  directing  sergeant.  The  sol- 
diers will  preserve  the  touch  of  the  elbow  on  the  side  of  di- 
rection, keeping  the  shoulders  square  to  the  front,  the  head 
erect,  and  eyes  directed  straight  forward.  i 

1  Forward. 

2  March. 

At  the  command  "  march,"  which  may  be  pronounced  as 
either  foot  comes  to  the  ground,  the  company  will  take  the 
direct  march. 

The  instructer  will  quickly  place  himself  twenty  paces  be- 
fore the  directing  file,  and  correct  by  signs  the  directing  ser- 
geant, who  will  take  two  points  of  direction  as  before. 

The  instructer  will  at  length  continue  the  oblique  march 
a  long  distance,  to  fix  the  soldiers  in  its  principles,  as  it  is 
sometimes  important  in  movements  of  the  line. 

E 


34 


Article  IV. 

To  Mark  Time,  March  in  ^dck  Time^  and  Step  Back, 

The  instructer  as  the  company  advances  in  common  time, 
will  command, 

1  Mark,  time. 

2  March. 

To  take  the  ordinary  step  again,  he  will  command, 

1  Forward. 

2  March. 

To  march  the  quick  step,  the  instructer  will  command, 

1  Quick,  TIME. 

2  March. 

The  word  "  march"  to  be  pronounced  as  either  foot  comes 
to  the  ground.  To  take  again  the  ordinary  step, 

1  Common  time. 

2  March. 

The  company  being  halted,  the  instructer  will  command, 

1  Step  back. 

2  March. 

The  soldiers  will  step  back,  twelve  inches  each  step,  com- 
mencing with  the  left  foot. 

Article  V. 

March  to  the  Rear. 

The  companv  being  halted,  and  correctly  dressed,  the  in- 
structer will  command, 

1  Company. 

2  Right  about,  face. 

The  company  having  gone  to  the  right  about,  the  instruc- 
ter will  step  quickly  twenty  paces  before  the  new  front, 
place  himself  in  line  with  the  directing  file,  and  then  com- 
mand. 


35 

3  Company. 

4  Forward. 

The  directing  sergeant  will  come  six  paces  before  the  di- 
recting file,  and  take  two  objects  as  before  directed.  The 
covering  sergeant  will  place  himself  on  the  line  of  file  closers, 
opposite  his  place,  and  the  captain  will  take  that  place  in  the 
third  rank,  now  become  the  first. 

5  March. 
The  whole  will  advance  as  in  the  march  to  the  front. 

1  Company. 

2  Halt. 

3  Right  about,  face. 

The  captain  and  covering  sergeant  regain  their  places,  and 
the  instructer  forms  or  corrects  the  line  as  before  directed. 


LESSON  IV. 

Article  I. 

Marching  by  a  Flank, 

The  company  being  in  line  and  halted,  the  instructer  will 
command, 

1  Company,  by  the  right  flank. 

2  To  the  right,  face. 

3  March. 

At  the  first  command,  the  captain  faces  to  the  right,  and 
steps  to  the  left,  a  pace  out  of  the  first  rank,  in  which  the  co- 
vering sergeant  places  himself,  facing  to  the  right. 

At  the  second  the  company  faces.  At  the  word  "  march," 
the  company  steps  off  briskly.  The  men  of  the  second  and 
third  rank  will  march,  dressing  exactly  in  line  with  their  file 
leaders;  the  whole  will  keep  their  heads  erect;  each  man 
placing  his  left  foot  even  with  the  right  foot  of  the  man  he 
follows.  The  file  closers  will  march  in  their  places  in  line. 

The  march  to  the  left  will  be  on  the  same  principles.  The 
sergeant  on  the  left  will  lead  the  front  rank,  the  captain 
marching  on  his  right. 


36 


Article  II. 
To  change  Direction  by  File. 
The  instructer  will  command, 

1  By  file  to  the  right. 

2  March. 

At  the  word  "  march,"  the  first  file  will  wheel  to  the  right, 
the  man  in  the  third  rank  taking  care  not  to  turn  all  at  once, 
but  to  describe  a  small  circle,  shortening  three  or  four  paces 
to  give  time  to  the  man  of  the  first  rank  to  conform  to  the 
movement.  Each  file  will  wheel  on  the  same  ground  as  the 
preceding  file.  There  must  be  no  stopping,  or  hastening  of 
the  step. 

Article  III. 
To  Halt  and  Front  the  Company,  marching  by  a  Flank. 

1  Company. 

2  Halt. 

3  Front. 

At  the  word  "  halt,"  no  one  stirs.  At  the  word  "  front," 
they  face  to  the  left.  The  captain  and  covering  sergeant  will 
take  their  places  in  line,  as  soon  as  the  company  fronts. 

The  instructer  may  then  place  three  files  as  a  basis,  and 
form  the  line,  or  he  may  correct  it  only. 

Article  IV. 

The  Company  tnarching  by  Flank^  to  form  Line  by  File  to 
Right  or  Left. 

The  company  marching  by  the  right  flank,  the  instructer 
will  command, 

1  By  files,  to  the  right,  form  in  line. 

2  March. 

At  the  word  "  march,"  the  second  and  third  rank  mark 
time.  The  captain  will  turn  to  the  right,  and  march  forward, 
followed  by  the  covering  sergeant,  and  halt  when  he  has 
passed  four  paces  the  line  of  file  closers.  The  soldier  on  the 


S7 

right  of  the  first  rank  will  march  on,  pass  in  rear  of  the  cover- 
ing sergeant,  turn  to  the  right,  and  form  on  his  left;  the  se- 
cond will  do  the  same,  and  form  on  the  left  of  the  first;  and 
so  on  to  the  last.  When  three  men  of  the  first  rank  are  form- 
ed, the  second  rank  will  begin  to  form;  the  men  will  take 
their  places  in  like  manner;  the  third  rank  will  do  the  same 
when  three  of  the  second  rank  are  formed;  and  each  man 
will  be  careful  to  cover  his  file  leader.  The  captain  will 
place  himself  to  the  right  of  the  covering  sergeant,  and  dress 
the  line. 

If  the  company  marched  by  the  left  flank,  it  might  be 
formed  to  the  left  by  inverse  means.  The  captain,  who 
would  then  be  on  the  left,  would  take  his  place  in  line  as 
soon  as  it  should  be  formed  and  dressed,  by  the  instructer's 
order. 

Article  V. 

The  Company  marching  by  Flank  to  form  in  Line,  or  Platoons, 
on  the  March. 

The  instructer  will  order  the  captain  to  form  the  company. 
He  will  command, 

1  Form  company. 

2  March. 

At  the  command  "  march,"  the  covering  sergeant  will 
march  straight  forward;  the  soldiers  will  advance  the  right 
shoulder,  take  the  quick  step,  and  come  directly  into  line, 
one  at  a  time,  without  running. 

When  the  soldiers  arrive  in  line,  they  will  take  the  step 
from  the  directing  sergeant.  The  men  of  the  second  and 
third  rank  will  conform  to  the  movement  of  their  file  leaders. 

As  soon  as  the  movement  begins,  the  captain  will  face  to 
the  company,  and  when  it  is  formed,  command: 

3  Guide  to  the  left. 

He  will  step  to  the  centre,  place  himself  two  paces  before 
the  front  rank,  and  take  the  step.  The  sergeant  nearest  the 
left  will  come  to  the  left  flank  on  the  front  rank,  to  his  post 
as  guide.* 

•  In  coliiinn  by  companies  the  two  guides  are  always  on  the  flanks  ofthe 
front  rank;  and  one  of  them  is  charj^cd  with  the  direction.  The  left,  if  the 
riglitis  in  front;  the  n>Af,  if  the  left  is  in  front 


38 

If  the  company  marches  by  the  left  flank,  it  will  be  formed 
by  similar  means. 

The  company  marching  by  a  flank,  the  instructer  wishing 
to  form  platoons,  will  command, 

1  Form  platoons. 

2  March. 

This  movement  is  performed  on  the  same  principles  as 
the  preceding.  The  captain  steps  in  front  of  the  first  platoon. 
The  next  officer  steps  in  front  of  the  second  platoon.  They 
will  each  command,  "  Guide  to  the  left;"  and  the  guide 
will  step  to  the  left,  if  not  already  there. 

The  right  guide  of  the  company  will  serve  as  guide  of  the 
first  platoon,  and  the  left  guide  of  the  company  as  guide  of 
the  second  platoon,  either  on  the  right  or  left. 

The  file  closers  follow  their  respective  platoons. 


LESSON  V. 

Article  I. 

To  form  Column  of  Platoons  from  the  Line* 

The  company  being  formed  and  halted,  the  instructer 
will  command, 

1  Form  column  of  platoons  by  wheeling  to  the  right. 

2  By  platoons,  right  wheel. 

3  March. 

At  the  first  command,  the  officers  commanding  platoons 
will  place  themselves  two  paces  before  the  front  rank  at  the 
centres  of  their  platoons.  At  the  second,  the  right  hand  man 
of  the  front  rank  of  each  platoon  faces  to  the  right. 

At  the  word  "  march,"  the  commander  of  each  platoon 
will  step  quickly  to  a  point  on  the  outside  of  that  where  the 
left  will  rest  when  the  wheel  is  effected,  face  to  the  rear,  and 
place  himself  so  that  a  line  drawn  from' him  to  the  right  hand 
man  of  the  front  rank  will  be  perpendicular  to  that  which  the 
company  whs  formed  on.  The  platoons  will  wheel  on  a  fixed 
pivot.  When  the  marching  flank  is  within  two  paces  of  the 
perpendicular,  the  commander  of  each  platoon  will  order. 


39 

1  Platoon. 

2  Halt. 

The  platoon  will  stand  fast.  The  guide  of  each  will  step 
to  the  place  to  which  the  left  of  the  platoon  is  to  come.  The 
commander  of  each  platoon  will  command, 

3    Left  DRESS. 

Which  being  observed,  he  will  order, 

4  Steady. 

And  step  before  the  centre  of  his  platoon.  The  right  guide 
of  the  company  will  act  as  guide  on  the  left  of  the  first 
platoon. 

Article  II. 
To  March  in  Column, 

The  company  having  broken  into  platoons,  right  in  front, 
the  instructer  will  step  fifteen  paces  to  the  front,  face  towards 
the  guides,  place  himself  correctly  in  their  direction,  and 
caution  the  leading  guide  to  take  points  of  direction  on  the 
ground,  passing  between  the  instructer's  heels. 

The  instructer  will  then  command, 

1  Column,  forward. 

2  Guide  to  the  left. 

3  March. 

The  word  "  march,"  being  quickly  repeated  by  the  com- 
manders of  platoons,  the  whole  step  off  with  life  together. 

The  soldier  will  feel  the  elbow  of  his  neighbour  on  the 
side  of  the  guide.  The  man  next  the  guide  shall  keep  six 
inches  from  him,  and  never  get  before  him. 

The  leading  guide  will  be  careful  to  observe  the  length  and 
cadence  of  the  step,  and  to  preserve,  by  selecting  new  poiiits 
as  he  advances,  the  direction  of  the  march. 

The  following  guide  will  march  exactly  in  his  steps.  If 
he  loses  the  direction,  he  will  regain  it  by  degrees.  He  will 
preserve  a  distance  equal  to  the  front  of  his  platoon. 

The  commander  of  each  platoon  will  frequently  turn  and 
watch  the  men  that  they  observe  order  and  regularity. 

The  instructer,  on  the  side  of  the  guides,  will  observe  the 
whole. 


40 

Article  III. 

To  Change  Direction  in  Column* 

The  instructer  will  inform  the  officer  of  the  first  platoon 
of  the  change,  and  place  himself  at  the  point  where  it  is  to 
be  made,  his  right  side  next  to  the  head  of  the  column,  in 
line  with  the  guides.  The  leading  guide  will  march  up  so 
that  his  left  arm  grazes  the  breast  of  the  instructer,  when 
the  officer  of  the  platoon  will  command, 

1  To  the  left  turn. 

2  March. 

The  word  "  turn,"  to  be  pronounced  when  the  guide  is 
within  two  paces  of  the  wheeling  point. 

At  the  word  "  march,"  the  guide  turns  without  altering 
the  step,*  and  the  platoon  wheels  by  echellon  of  files,  or 
"  right  shoulders  forward,"  taking  the  quick  step. 

The  guide  will  take  new  objects  for  his  direction. 

To  change  the  direction  to  the  side  opposite  the  guide, 
the  wheel  is  on  a  moving  pivot,  taking  steps  of  six  inches; 
and  the  touch  of  the  elbow  is  preserved.  The  wheel  being 
completed,  the  officer  of  the  platoon  will  command, 

1  Forward. 

2  March. 

If  the  left  is  in  front,  the  change  of  direction  is  on  the  like 
principles. 

Article  IV. 
To  Halt  the  Column. 
The  instructer  will  command, 

1  Column. 

2  Halt. 

At  the  word  "  halt,"  quickly  repeated  by  the  officers  of 
platoons,  they  will  halt  instantly,  and  no  guide  will  stir. 

*  The  guides  never  alter  the  length  or  cadence  of  their  step  in  wheeling. 


41 

Article  V. 

To  form  in  Line  to  the  Right  or  Left. 

The  instructer  having  halted  the  column  will  step  to  the 
distance  of  platoon  before  the  leading  guide,  to  rectify,  if 
necessary,  his  position.  He  will  then  command, 

1  To  the  left  in  line,  wheel. 

2  March. 

At  the  word  "  wheel,"  the  man  on  the  left  of  the  front 
rank  will  face  to  the  left,  and  touch  with  his  breast  the  arm 
of  the  guide  who  stands  fast. 

At  the  word  "  march,"  quickly  repeated  by  the  officers  of 
platoons,  the  platoons  wheel  on  a  standing  pivot.  The  offi- 
cers turn  to  their  platoons,  and  watch  the  movement.  When 
the  marching  flank  is  within  two  paces  of  the  line,  the  officer 
will  command, 

1  Platoon. 

2  Halt. 

The  officer  of  the  second  platoon  passes  to  the  line  of  file 
closers.  The  captain  takes  his  place  on  the  right,  where  the 
right  of  the  company  should  rest,  and  commands, 

3    Right  DRESS. 

He  will  dress  the  company  on  the  left  man  of  the  front 
rank,  and  command, 

4  Steady. 

The  instructer,  seeing  the  line  formed,  will  order. 

Guides,  to  your  posts. 

The  covering  sergeant  will  pass  behind  the  captain.  The 
guide  on  the  left  will  go  to  the  rank  of  file  closers. 

If  the  column  has  the  left  in  front,  it  will  wheel  to  the 
right  in  line,  by  inverse  means. 

F 


42 

LESSON  vr. 

Article  I. 

To  break  off  Files  to  the  Rear^  and  bring  them  again  int9 

Line* 

The  instructer  will  give  orders  to  the  captain,  who  will 
command, 

1  One  file  from  the  right  to  the  rear. 

2  March. 

At  the  word  "  march,"  the  first  file  on  the  right  will  mark 
time,  and  so  soon  as  the  company  passes,  advancing  the 
right  shoulder,  will  form  behind  the  three  outward  files,  the 
front  rank  man  outward. 

Other  files  are  broken  off  in  like  manner;  they  will  pre- 
cede the  first,  who  advance  the  right  shoulder,  so  as  to  fol- 
low, and  shorten  the  step  to  make  room  for  the  additional 
files. 

The  file  closers  will  march  behind  the  remainder  of  the 
company. 

When  the  instructer  wishes  some  files  to  enter  the  line 
again,  he  will  order, 

1  One  file  on  the  right  in  line. 

2  March. 

At  the  word  "  march,"  the  foremost  of  the  files  in  rear 
will  advance  the  left  shoulder,  take  the  quick  step,  and  form 
in  line. 

The  instructer  will  break  off  several  files  at  once.  They 
will  mark  time,  advance  the  right  shoulder,  and  place  them- 
belves  behind  the  outside  files  who  remain  in  line. 

1  Three  first  files  in  line. 

2  March. 

The  files  directed  advance  the  left  shoulder,  and  step 
quick  into  line. 

If  the  files  break  off  to  the  rear  on  the  side  of  the  guide, 
he  will  approach  the  platoon  so  as  to  be  on  the  side  of  the 
first  man  marching  to  the  front.  He  will  separate  from  him 
to  give  room  for  the  files  who  again  join  the  platoon. 

The  files  on  the  left  will  be  broken  off  and  reunited  by 
inverse  means. 


43 


Article  II. 
To  march  in  Column  by  the  Route  Step, 

The  company  being  halted,  supposed  part  of  a  column, 
and  the  instructer  desiring  to  march  by  the  route  step,  will 
command, 

1  Column,  forward. 

2  Guide  to  the  left. 

3  Route  step. 

4  March. 

The  captain  will  repeat  the  command  "  march,"  and  the 
three  ranks  step  off  together,  opening  to  the  distance  of  three 
feet. 

Arms  at  ease. 

On  giving  this  command  by  the  instructer,  the  soldiers 
will  carry  their  firelocks  on  either  shoulder,  keeping  the 
muzzles  elevated;  and  are  not  required  to  step  together,  or 
keep  silence.  They  will  march  at  ease,  but  not  confound  the 
ranks. 

1  Rear  ranks,  close  order. 

2  March. 

At  this  command  the  first  rank  will  take  the  ordinary 
time,  the  ranks  close,  and  the  whole  carry  arms. 

Article  III. 

To  break  into  Platoons^  and  form  Company. 

The  company  marching  in  ordinary  time,  and  supposed 
to  be  part  of  a  column,  the  right  in  front,  the  instructer  hav- 
ing directed  the  captain,  he  will  command, 

1  Form  platoons. 

and  step  before  the  first  platoon.    The  officer  of  the  s"e- 
cond  will  step  before  it,  and  command, 

Mark  time. 

The  captain  commands. 


44. 


2  March. 

The  first  platoon  marches  straight  on,  and  the  covering 
sergeant  steps  to  its  left  to  act  as  guide,  as  soon  as  it  clears 
the  other  platoon,  passing  before  the  front  rank. 

The  second  platoon  will  oblique  to  the  right. 

The  guide  of  the  second  platoon  being  arrived  in  the  di- 
rection with  the  guide  of  the  first,  the  officer  of  the  second 
will  command, 

Forward,  March. 

The  left  being  in  front,  they  will  form  platoons  by  inverse 
means. 

The  instructer,  wishing  to  form  company,  will  inform  the 
captain,  who  will  command, 

1  Form  company. 

2  First  platoon,  oblique  to  the  right. 

3  March. 

The  first  platoon  obliques  to  the  right,  and  when  it  has 
uncovered  the  second  platoon,  the  captain  will  command, 

4  Mark  time. 

5  March. 

and  when  the  second  arrives  even  with  the  first,  he   will 
order, 

6  Forward,  March. 

The  officer  of  the  second  platoon  retires  by  the  left  flank. 

The  covering  sergeant  will  retire,  passing  the  front,  to  his 
post  on  the  right  of  the  third  rank. 

In  obliquing,  when  on  a  march,  by  the  route  step,  the  men 
turn  their  shoulders,  and  oblique  by  echellon  of  files. 

In  breaking  a  company,  part  of  a  column,  into  platoons, 
it  must  be  so  expeditiously  done  as  not  to  obstruct  the  fol- 
lowing company. 

Article  IV. 
The  Countermarch. 

The  company  being  halted,  and  supposed  part  of  an  open 
column,  the  instructer  will  command, 


45 

1  Counter  march. 

2  Company,  by  the  right  flank. 

3  To  the  right  Face. 

4  By  file  to  the  left,  counter  march. 

5  March. 

At  the  word  "  face,"  the  platoon  faces  as  ordered;  the 
guide  on  the  left  faces  to  the  right  about,  and  stands  fast. 

The  first  file  on  the  right,  conducted  by  the  captain,  will 
wheel  half  a  circle  to  the  left,  and  pass  before  the  company 
so  as  to  arrive  two  paces  in  rear  of  the  guide  on  the  left,  who 
after  facing  about  stood  fast.  Each  file  will  wheel  on  the  same 
ground.  The  first  file  having  arrived  at  the  left,  the  captain 
commands, 

1  Company. 

2  Halt. 

3  Front. 

4  Right  Dress. 

He  places  himself  two  paces  outside  of  the  guide,  dresses 
the  company,  and  then  commands, 

5  Steady. 

and  comes  before  the  centre  of  the  company.  The  cover- 
ing sergeant  takes  his  place  as  guide  on  the  right  of  the  front 
rank,  and  the  guide  on  the  left  passes  to  the  left  of  the  same 
rank. 

If  the  left  of  the  column  be  supposed  in  front,  the  counter- 
iparch  is  performed  by  inverse  means,  on  the  same  prin- 
ciples. 

The  files  always  pass  before  the  front  rank. 

Article  V. 

Being-  in  Column  by  Platoons^  to  form  Line  on  the  Rig-ht 
or  Left. 

The  column  of  Platoons  being  on  the  march,  right  in  front* 
the  instructer  will  command, 

1  To  the  right  form  the  line. 

2  Guide  to  the  right. 

The  guide  of  each  platoon  will  repair  quickly  to  the  right 
flank;  the  soldiers  will  feel  with  the  elbow  the  right  hand 
man,  and  continue  the  march.  The  instructer  will  pass  to 


46 

the  point  where  he  wishes  the  right  of  the  company  in  line 
to  rest.  Each  platoon  ought  to  have  four  paces  to  make 
after  wheeling,  to  arrive  in  line. 

The  heads  of  the  column  being  nearly  up  with  the  in- 
structer,  the  officer  of  the  first  platoon  will  command, 

1  Turn  to  the  right. 

And  when  opposite  to  the  instructer, 

2  March. 

The  files  turn  to  the  right,  and  advance  by  echellon  of 
files.  The  captain  marching  two  paces  before  the  centre  of 
the  first  platoon,  when  he  shall  come  in  line  with  the  in- 
structer, will  command, 

1  Platoon. 

2  Halt. 

The  platoon  stands  fast,  the  guide  steps  to  the  left,  and 
places  himself  opposite  one  of  the  three  left  files,  facing  the 
instructer,  who  will  dress  him  on  the  point  of  direction  to 
the  left.  The  captain  will  come  to  the  point  where  the  right 
is  to  rest,  and  command, 

3  Right  Dress. 
The  platoon  dresses,  and  he  commands, 

4  Steady. 

The  second  platoon  moves  straight  on,  until  it  is  even  with 
the  left  flank  of  the  first,  turns  by  command  of  its  officer, 
and  moves  into  the  line,  the  guide  directing  himself  by  the 
left  file  of  the  first  platoon.  The  guide  quickly  passes  along 
the  direction  to  the  left,  and  places  himself  opposite  one  of 
the  three  left  files  of  his  platoon,  in  line  with,  and  facing  to 
the  guide  of  the  first  platoon  and  the  instructer.  The  officer 
of  the  second  platoon  will  command, 

1  Right,  Dress. 

2  Steady. 

and  will  take  his  post  among  the  file  closers. 

The  man  in  the  front  rank  opposite  the  guide,  will  touch 
with  his  breast  the  arm  of  the  guide,  the  instant  the  platoon 
comes  into  line. 


47 

The  instructer  will  order, 

Guides  to  your  posts. 

At  this  command  the  covering  sergeant  passes  behind  the 
captain;  the  guide  of  the  second  platoon  passes  to  the  file 
closers. 

A  column  of  platoons,  left  in  front,  forms  the  line  to  the 
left,  upon  the  same  principles,  by  inverse  commands  and 
movements. 

END  OF  THE  COMPANY  DRILL. 


SECTION  IV. 

Drill  of  the  Battalion. 

The  manner  in  which  the  regiment  of  ten  companies  will 
be  drawn  up,  as  a  single  field  battalion,  has  already  been 
explained. 

If  the  regiment  consists  of  eighteen  companies,  divided 
into  two  battalions,  each  composed  of  eight  infantry  compa- 
nies and  a  flank  company,  it  will  be  drawn  up  in  two  bat- 
talions, with  an  interval  between  them  of  twenty-four  paces. 

The  flank  companies  being  numbered  first  and  second, 
and  the  battalion  companies  designated  by  numbers  from 
one  to  sixteen,  according  to  the  rank  of  the  officers  com- 
manding them,  the  first  flank  company,  and  the  infantry 
companies  designated  by  odd  numbers,  will  form  the  first 
battalion.  The  second  flank  company,  and  the  infantry  com- 
panies, designated  by  even  numbers,  will  form  the  second 
battalion. 

The  flank  company  of  the  first  battalion  will  be  placed  on 
its  right;  that  of  the  second  battalion  will  be  placed  on  its 
left. 

In  the  first  battalion,  the  companies  of  infantry  are  to  be 
placed  in  the  following  order,  from  right  to  left;  the  first, 
ninth,  third,  eleventh,  fifth,  thirteenth,  seventh,  fifteenth. 

In  the  second  battalion,  the  companies  of  infantry,  are  al- 
so placed  from  right  to  left,  in  the  following  order;  the  se- 
cond, tenth,  fourth,  twelfth,  sixth,  fourteenth,  eighth  and  six- 
teenth. 

By  this  arrangement,  senior  and  junior  officers  are  inter- 
spersed; the  two  senior  officers  are  on  the  right  of  the  two 


48 

wings  of  the  battalion;  and  the  four  senior  officers  are  on  the 
right  of  the  four  divisions. 

The  infantry  companies  of  each  battalion  will  be  num- 
bered from  right  to  left.  They  will  form  four  divisions,  which 
will  also  be  numbered  from  right  to  left. 

The  formation  by  three  ranks  is  deemed  the  most  per- 
fect, and  effective,  to  oppose  disciplined  troops. 

Nevertheless,  as  two  ranks  will  be  a  sufficient  depth  to 
oppose  to  undisciplined  enemies,  who  deal  chiefly  in  fire, 
the  commanding  officer  will  always  determine  whether  the 
formation  shall  be  in  two  or  in  three  ranks. 

The  colonel  will  be  posted  thirty  paces  in  the  rear  of  the 
interval  between  the  battalions;  the  lieutenant  colonel  of  each 
battalion  will  be  posted  twenty  paces  in  the  rear  of  the  centre 
of  his  battalion;  the  major  eight  paces  in  the  rear  of  the 
centre  of  the  right  wing;  and  the  adjutant  eight  paces  in  the 
rear  of  the  centre  of  the  left  wing. 

The  term  "subdivision"  will  be  used  to  signify  either  a 
company  or  platoon,  indifferently. 

If  the  regiment  forms  but  a  single  field  battalion,  the  words 
of  command  prescribed  to  be  given  by  the  lieutenant  colonel, 
will  be  given  by  the  colonel. 


PART  I. 

Article  I. 

To  open  the  Ranks, 

The  lieutenant  colonel  desiring  to  open  the  ranks,  will 
command, 

1  Rear  ranks,  take  distance. 

At  this  command  the  captains  and  covering  sergeants,  as 
also  the  sergeant  and  corporal  who  are  placed  on  the  left 
flank  of  the  battalion  in  the  first  and  third  rank,  step  briskly 
to  the  rear,  to  mark  the  line  whereon  the  two  rear  ranks  are 
to  form.  The  captain  and  the  sergeant  who  was  on  the  left 
of  the  first  rank,  dress  by  the  line  of  file  closers.  The  cover- 
ing sergeants,  and  the  corporal  who  was  on  the  left  of  the 
third  rank,  will  step  four  paces  in  rear  of  the  rank  of  file 
closers,  and  dress  by  the  right.  They  willjudge  the  distance 
by  the  eye. 

The  lieutenant  colonel  coming  to  the  right  of  the  line  of 
file  closers,  will  see  that  the  line  is  correctly  taken  by  the 


49 

captains;  and  the  adjutant  will  dress  the  line  of  covering 
sergeants  on  the  corporal  on  the  left,  who  will  raise  his  fire- 
lock perpendicularly  before  his  eyes  as  an  object  for  the  adju- 
tant to  see. 
This  being  done,  the  lieutenant  colonel  will  command, 

2  March. 

The  two  rear  ranks  will  step  back  in  common  time,  pass- 
ing a  little  the  lines  taken  for  them,  and  dress  forward  by 
the  captains  and  covering  sergeants.  The  file  closers  step  back 
at  the  same  time,  and  form  a  line  two  paces  in  rear  of  the 
third  rank,  and  are  dressed  by  the  major  on  the  corporal  on 
the  left,  who  Avill  raise  his  firelock  perpendicularly  before 
his  eyes. 

The  ranks  being  dressed,  the  lieutenant  colonel  will  com- 
mand, 

3  Steady. 

The  captains,  and  the  sergeant  who  was  placed  on  the  left 
of  the  first  rank,  regain  their  posts  in  the  front  rank. 


Article  II. 
Manual  Exercise.    .  • 

The  colonel,  lieutenant  colonel,  or  other  officer  command- 
ing the  battalion,  will  command  so  much  of  the  manual  ex- 
ercise as  he  pleases,  and  the  loading  motions. 

He  will  attend  to  the  execution  of  the  front  rank;  the 
major  to  the  second;  and  the  adjutant  to  the  third. 

Each  captain  will  make  a  half  face  to  the  right,  when  the 
soldiers  of  his  company  in  the  loading  motions  do  the  same, 
and  face  to  the  front  when  the  soldier  next  to  him  of  his  own 
company  passes  the  firelock  to  the  left. 

The  lieutenant  colonel  desiring  to  close  the  ranks,  will 
command, 

1  Close  ranks. 

2  March. 

The  two  rear  ranks  close  by  the  common  step,  each  man 
covering  his  file  leader.  The  captains  and  covering  sergeants 
take  their  places  in  the  line. 

G 


50 


Article  III. 

Loading  in  the  Richest  Time,  and  the  Firings. 

When  the  ranks  are  closed,  the  lieutenant  colonel  will 
command, 

1  Load  at  will. 

2  Prime  and  Load. 

and  place  himself  twenty  paces  behind  the  centre.  The 
major  and  adjutant  will  place  themselves  each  eight  paces 
behind  the  centre  of  his  wing. 

To  execute  the  fire  by  company,  the  colonel  will  command, 

1  Fire  by  company. 

2  Commence  firing. 

At  the  last  command,  the  captains  of  the  first  and  fifth 
companies  will  commence  the  fire,  in  this  manner. 

1  First  company. 

2  Ready. 

3  Aim. 

4  Fire. 

5  Prime  and  Load. 

As  soon  as  the  captains  of  the  third  and  seventh  companies 
hear  the  captains  of  the  first  and  fifth  pronounce  the  word 
"ready,"  they  will  commence  giving  the  words  of  command. 
The  two  companies  of  each  division  will  fire  alternately. 

When  the  captain  of  the  even  company  has  observed  some 
muskets  of  the  odd  companj^  shouldered,  he  will  commence 
giving  the  commands  for  the  fire. 

The  lieutenant  colonel,  to  execute  the  fire  by  wings,  will 
command, 

1  Fire  by  wings. 

2  Right  wing. 

3  Ready. 

4  Aim. 

5  Fire. 

6  Prime  and  Load. 

He  will  give  the  word  to  each  wing  alternately;  giving 
his  first  command  to  one,  when  some  firelocks  of  the  other 
are  shouldered. 


51 

If  the  lieutenant  colonel  chooses  to  execute  the  fire  by 
battalion,  the  words  of  command  are  the  same,  only  substi- 
tuting "  battalion"  for  "  wing." 

If  the  lieutenant  colonel  wishes  to  fire  by  file,  he  will  com- 
mand, 

1  Fire  by  files. 

2  Battalion. 

3  Ready. 

4  Commence  firing. 

The  fire  commences  by  the  right  file  of  each  company, 
and  proceeds  in  succession  to  the  left,  but  only  during  the 
first  round.  Each  file  will  fire  when  the  file  next  to  the  right 
have  primed.  The  first  rank  loads,  and  keeps  up  the  fire;  the 
second  hand  their  empty  pieces  with  the  right  hand  to  the 
rear  rank,  receive  theirs  loaded,  fire  them,  load  and  discharge 
them  a  second  time,  then  exchange  them  for  their  own 
pieces  loaded  by  the  third  rank,  and  so  keep  up  the  fire. 

The  third  rank  are  not  to  fire. 

In  all  the  firings,  the  colour  guard  draws  back,  so  that  its 
first  rank  is  even  with  the  third  rank  of  the  battalion,  and 
remains  at  carried  arms. 

In  the  firings,  except  that  by  companies,  the  captains  of 
companies  step  one  pace  in  rear  of  the  third  rank,  opposite 
their  intervals,  at  the  first  command  of  the  lieutenant  colonel; 
the  covering  sergeant  will  step  behind  the  captain  into  the 
line  of  file  closers. 

If  the  lieutenant  colonel  chooses  to  execute  the  fire  to  the 
rear,  he  will  command, 

1  Fire  to  the  rear. 

2  Battalion. 

3  To  the  right  about.  Face. 

The  captains,  covering  sergeants,  and  file  closers,  quickly 
place  themselves  in  the  positions  they  ought  to  occupy,  as 
described  in  the  drill  of  the  company.  The  firings  will  be 
executed  in  the  same  manner  as  to  the  front,  and  b)'  the  same 
commands. 

The  wings  and  companies  will  preserve  their  former  de- 
nominations. 

The  firing  by  file  will  begin  at  the  proper  right  of  com- 
panies, now  become  the  left. 

The  firings  to  front  or  rear  will  cease  at  a  short  roll,  fol- 


52 

lowed  by  a  tap  oi  the  drumstick,  at  which  the  captains, 
the  covering  sergeants,  and  guard  for  the  colours,  will  take 
their  places  in  the  line. 

In  order  to  front  the  battalion,  the  lieutenant  colonel  will 
command, 

1  The  battalion  will  face  to  the  front. 

2  Battalion. 

3  To  the  right  about,  Face. 

The  captains  and  covering  sergeants  will  open  the  interval 
at  the  word  "about,"  and  the  file  closers  will  pass;  and  at 
the  word  "face,"  the  captains,  covering  sergeants,  and  file 
closers,  take  their  respective  posts  in  the  line. 


PART  II. 

Various  Modes  of  forming  Column  from  the  Line. 

Article  I. 
Wheeling  by  Companies  to  the  Right  or  Left  into  Columti. 
The  lieutenant  colonel  will  command, 

1  Form  column  of  companies  by  wheeling  to  the  right. 

2  By  companies,  right  wheel. 

The  captain  of  each  company  steps  before  its  centre,  at 
two  paces  distance. 

The  right  hand  man  of  the  front  rank  faces  to  the  right. 

3  March. 

The  captain  of  each  company  will  move  quickly  and  direct 
to  a  point  outside  of  that  where  the  left  will  rest  when  the  wheel 
is  effected,  face  to  the  rear,  and  place  himself  so  that  a  line 
passing  him  and  the  pivot  man,  will  be  perpendicular  to  that 
on  which  the  compan}-  stoodj  the  company  wheels  as  direct- 
ed, at  the  halt;  and  when  the  wheeling  flank  has  arrived 
within  two  paces  of  the  perpendicular,  he  will  command, 

1  Company. 

2  Halt. 

The  company  halts.  The  left  guide  steps  to  where  the 
kit  flank  of  the  company  will  rest,  and    the   right   guide 


55 

places  himself  on  the  right  of  the  front  rank.  The  captain  ol 
each  company  will  then  command, 

3  Left  Dress. 

4  Steady. 

and  place  himself  before  the  centre  of  his  company,  at  two 
paces  distance,  facing  to  the  front. 

When  the  battalion  breaks  into  column  to  the  right,  in 
order  to  march  towards  the  left,  the  right  company  shall 
march  to  the  front  twice  the  distance  of  its  front,  while  the 
other  companies  wheel  into  open  column.  For  this  purpose 
the  lieutenant  colonel  will  command, 

1  The  line  will  break  into  column  by  the  right,  to  march 

towards  the  left. 

2  By  companies,  to  the  right  wheel. 

3  March. 

Article  II. 

To  form  the  Open  Column  hy  jHhig  by  Platoons  to  the  Rear, 

The  lieutenant  colonel  will  command, 

1   Form  column  of  companies  by  filing  to  the  rear. 

At  this  command  each  captain  of  a  company  steps  before 
the  company  and  faces  it.  The  lieutenant  colonel  then  com- 
mands, 

2  Battalion,  by  the  right  flank. 

3  To  the  right  Face. 

4  Companies,  by  files  to  the  right. 

5  March. 

At  the  second  command,  the  captain  will  inform  the  sol- 
diers that  they  are  to  face  and  disengage  to  the  right. 

At  the  third,  the  company  faces  to  the  right,  and  the  cap- 
tain quickly  disengages  the  three  first  files  to  the  rear,  the 
first  its  whole  depth,  the  other  two  just  turning  the  shoulder. 
The  captain  then  places  himself  with  his  breast  touching  the 
left  arm  of  the  left  front  rank  man  of  the  company  on  the 
right  of  that  he  conimands;  and  the  captain  who  is  on  the 
right  wing  of  the  battalion  will  place  himself  as  if  there  was 
a  company  on  his  right,  dressing  by  the  other  captains.  The 
covering  sergeant  places  himself  before  the  first  man  of  the 


64, 

first  rank,  to  conduct  him.  At  the  word  "march,"each  leading 
file  wheels  to  the  right,  and  is  conducted  by  the  sergeant  per- 
pen  iicularly  to  the  rear.  The  captain  stands  fast,  and  sees 
his  company  file  by  him.  At  the  instant  the  last  file  wheels, 
he  commands, 

1  Company, 

2  Halt. 

3  Front. 

4  Left  Dress.  . 

When  the  company  fronts,  the  left  guide  comes  to  the  cap- 
tain of  the  company,  and  places  himself  with  his  left  arm 
touching  the  breast  of  the  captain.  At  the  word  "  dress,"  the 
first  company  dresses  by  its  left  guide,  perpendicular  to  the 
direction  of  the  line.  The  captain  will  step  two  paces  outside 
of  the  left  guide,  to  observe  the  direction.  Seeing  it  right,  he 
will  command, 

5  Steady. 

and  come  before  the  centre  of  his  company.  The  battalion 
breaks  to  the  rear  by  the  left,  on  the  same  principles. 


Article  III. 
To  form  Close  Columyi  from  the  Line. 

This  may  be  done  by  companies,  or  divisions,  upon  the 
right  or  left  company,  of  division,  or  any  other,  with  either 
the  right  or  the  left  in  front. 

Suppose  it  is  intended  to  form  a  close  column,  by  division 
on  the  second  division,  the  right  in  front.  The  lieutenant 
colonel  will  command, 

1  Close  column  by  division. 

2  On  the  second  division,  right  in  front. 

3  Battalion,  by  the  right  and  left  flank. 

4  To  the  right  and  left  Face. 

5  March. 

At  the  second  command,  each  captain  commanding  a  di- 
vision will  place  himself  before  its  centre.  At  the  third  the 
captain  commanding  the  second  division  will  caution  it  to 
stand  fast,  and  the  captains  commanding  the  other  divisions 
will  instruct  them  how  they  are  to  face. 

At  the  fourth  command,  the  captain  commanding  each  di- 


55 

vision  that  has  laced  to  the  centre,  will  cause  the  three  files 
nearest  the  centre  to  disengage  to  the  front  or  rear,  as  the  di- 
vision is  to  march.  The  guides  nearest  the  centre  will  place 
themselves  each  before  the  front  rank  man,  to  conduct  him. 
The  captains  commanding  divisions  will  place  themselves 
each  on  the  side  of  the  guide  who  leads  his  division. 

At  the  word  "  march,"  the  captain  commanding  the  second 
division  orders  "guide  to  the  left."  The  guide  will  go 
quickly,  and  the  file  closers  close  to  within  one  pace  of  the 
third  rank.  The  first  division  will  file  three  paces  to  the  front; 
and  enter  squarely  into  the  column.  The  third  will  gain  three 
paces  to  the  rear.  The  fourth  will  regulate  its  movement  by 
the  third.  The  first  division  will  be  halted  the  instant  before 
its  guide  is  up  with  the  guide  of  the  second.  The  guide  of  the 
first  places  himself  five  paces  from  the  guide  of  the  second, 
exactly  in  front  of,  and  facing  him.  The  captain;commanding 
this  division  fronts  and  dresses  it;  but  the  guide  remains 
faced  to  the  rear. 

The  captains  commanding  the  third  and  fourth  divisions, 
which  are  to  form  in  the  rear,  halt  when  opposite  the  left 
guide  of  the  second,  see  their  divisions  file  by  them,  and  as 
the  last  file  passes,  command, 

1  Division. 

2  Halt. 

The  guides  on  the  left  place  themselves  in  the  direction  of 
the  guides  of  the  first  and  second,  each  three  paces  from 
the  rear  rank  of  the  division  before  him. 

The  captains  commanding  these  divisions  then  order, 

3  Front. 

4  Left  Dress. 

5  Steady. 

And  then  the  lieutenant  colonel  commands, 

Guides  to  the  front. 

when  the  guides  who  are  facing  to  the  rear  will  face  to 
the  front. 

The  major  will  observe  the  guides  in  front  of  the  divi- 
sion of  direction,  and  the  adjutant  those  to  the  rear. 

The  column  with  the  left  in  front  will  be  formed  in  the 
like  manner. 


56 

When  it  is  desired  to  form  the  battalion  into  close  column 
to  the  rear  upon  the  right  division,  the  lieutenant  colonel 
will  command, 

1  Close  column  by  division. 

2  In  rear  of  the  right  division. 

3  Battalion,  by  the  right  flank. 

4  To  the  right  Face. 

5  March. 

The  right  division  stands  fast.  The  captain  commanding 
this  division  will  order, 

Guide  to  the  left. 

when  the  word  "march"'is  given. 

If  it  is  desired  to  form  the  close  column  of  divisions  on 
the  left,  and  in  front,  the  lieutenant  colonel  will  command, 

1  Close  column  by  division. 

2  In  front  of  the  fourth  division. 

3  Battalion,  by  the  left  flank. 

4  To  the  left  Face. 

5  March. 

The  fourth  division  stands  fast,  and  its  captain  commands 
"guide  to  the  left,"  as  soon  as  the  movement  commences. 
These  instances  are  deemed  sufficient. 


PART  III. 
Article  I. 
To  march  in  Column  at  full  Distance  of  Companies. 

The  lieutenant  colonel  will  point  out  to  the  first  guide  two 
objects  in  line  with  him,  at  some  distance  from  each  other; 
the  guide  will  face  thereto,  and  take  them  as  points  of  di- 
rection. 

The  lieutenant  colonel  will  then  command, 

1  Column,  forward. 

2  Guide  to  the  left. 

3  March. 

The  left  guide  of  the  leading  company  advances  towards 
the  objects  chosen.  The  following  guides  march  in  his  steps. 
The  companies  march  even  with  the  guides.  The  major 


57 

watches  that  the  leading  guide  preserves  the  direction,  and 
that  the  next  follows  his  steps.  The  adjutant  will  correct  any 
errors  committed  by  the  guides  toward  the  rear  of  the  co- 
lumn. The  lieutenant  colonel  rides  on  the  directing  flank, 
and  attends  to  the  distances,  the  step,  the  touch  of  the  elbow, 
and  the  positions  of  men  and  arms. 

These  means  will  enable  a  column  to  march  with  a  sufficient 
degree  of  correctness,  where  it  is  to  form  a  line  by  the  suc- 
cessive movement  of  subdivisions,  or  to  form  a  close  column. 

But  when  the  column  is  to  march  along  a  direction  on 
which  it  is  to  form  the  line  at  once^  by  wheeling  to  the  left  or 
right,  it  is  material  that  the  column  should  pursue  the  direc- 
tion, without  deviation.  To  effect  this  the  following  means 
will  be  pursued. 

The  column,  with  the  right  in  front,  arriving  in  front  of 
the  line,  the  guide  of  the  leading  company  will  direct  his 
march  on  the  intermediate  point,  which  shall  have  been  placed 
previously  on  that  line,  in  order  to  indicate  the  spot  where 
the  column  is  to  wheel  to  the  left,  and  pursue  the  new  direc- 
tion; the  captain  of  the  leading  company  is  not  to  wheel  until 
liis  company  has  passed  four  paces  beyond  the  line  on  which 
the  battalion  is  to  form.  At  the  instant  when  this  company 
has  wheeled,  Xh.G.  general  guide  of  the  right  shall  place  him- 
self on  the  true  direction,  opposite  to  the  leading  company, 
facing  to  the  two  points  of  direction  to  the  front,  which  the 
major  will  point  out  to  him,  and  he  will  march  exactly  to- 
ward those  points. 

At  the  instant  when  the  company  of  the  colours  has  wheel- 
ed, the  ensign  with  the  colours  shall  place  himself  on  this 
direction,  and  march  on  it  accurately,  keeping  the  general 
guide  of  the  right  between  him  and  the  distant  point,  and 
carrying  the  colours  perpendicularly  before  his  body. 

At  the  instant  v/hen  the  last  company  has  wheeled,  the  ge- 
neral guide  of  the  left  will  place  himself  on  the  direction,  and 
march  accurately,  in  line  with  t\\t\Q.z.dL\x\^  general  guide  ^  and 
the  ensign  who  carries  the  colours. 

The  guide  of  the  leading  company  will  march  even  with 
the  general guide^  and  about  four  paces  from  him;  the  guides 
of  the  following  companies  will  each  march  in  the  steps  of 
the  guide  who  immediately  precedes  him. 

When  a  column  with  the  right  in  front  arrives  in  rear  of 
the  line,  the  commanding  officer  will  conduct  the  guide  of 
the  leading  company  the  distance  of  a  company  to  the  left 
of  the  intermediate  point;  and  cause  that  company  to  wheel 

H 


58 

to  the  right,  so  that  when  the  wheel  is  completed,  the  left 
guide  will  find  himbtll  lour  paces  to  the  rear  of  the  line,  and 
the  intermediate  point  on  his  left. 

When  the  leading  company,  having  wheeled  to  the  right, 
couimences  its  march  parallel  to  the  Wne^  the  general  guide 
of  the  right  will  place  himself  on  the  line,  directing  his  march 
on  the  two  points  in  front;  the  ensign,  carrying  the  colours, 
whi;n  his  company  wheels,  will  place  himself  on  the  line  also; 
and  lastly  the  general  guide  of  the  left. 

Should  the  column  arrive  on  the  right  or  left  of  the  line, 
the  commanding  officer  would  order  "  Colours  and  general 
guide.)!  on  the  line;"  they  would  place  themselves  on  the  line, 
conforming  to  what  has  been  directed. 

Two  well  trained  non-commissioned  officers,  remarkable 
for  marching  accurately,  will  be  appointed  ^s  general  guides  ^ 
and  placed  one  behind  the  right,  the  other  behind  the  left 
company  of  the  battalion,  in  the  rank  of  file  closers. 

Article  II. 

Column  of  Route. 

The  lieutenant  colonel  wishing  to  march  by  the  route  step, 
will  command, 

1  Column,  forward. 

2  Guide  to  the  left. 

3  Route  step. 

4  March. 

5  Arms  at  ease. 

The  captains  repeat  the  word  "  march,"  and  the  whole 
step  off  together.  The  ranks  open  to  three  feet  distance.  The 
men  will  carry  their  firelocks  as  they  please,  on  either  shoul- 
der, the  bayonets  elevated.  They  need  not  observe  the  step, or 
keep  silence;  but  will  preserve  about  three  feet  distance,  and 
not  confuse  the  ranks,  or  pass  the  guides. 

The  direction  is  changed  without  command,  by  the  cap- 
tain of  the  leading  company. 

If  a  defile  is  to  be  passed  that  will  only  receive  a  platoon, 
the  colonel  will  command, 

1  Form  platoons. 

2  March. 

And  the  officers  of  companies  and  platoons  will  proceed 
as  directed  to  form  platoons. 


59 

If  the  narrowness  of  the  defile  renders  it  necessary  to  re- 
duce the  front,  the  officer  of  the  first  platoon  will  command, 

1  One  file  from  the  right  to  the  rear. 

2  March. 

The  soldiers  of  this  file  mark  time,  they  turn  forward  the 
right  shoulder,  and  the  third  rank  man  places  himself  be- 
hind the  third  file  in  line;  the  second  rank  man,  behind  the 
second  file,  and  the  first  rank  man  behind  the  first  file. 

In  this  manner  files  will  be  broken  off,  altei"nately  from 
either  flank. 

The  files  already  broken  off  will  advance  the  outward 
shoulder  a  little,  and  gain  a  file  inward. 

The  file  closers  will  march  behind  the  files  which  remain 
in  line. 

As  the  road  widens,  the  officer  of  the  first  and  each  suc- 
ceeding platoon,  will  command, 

1  One  file  on  the  right  in  line. 

2  March. 

and  the  first  file  in  the  rear  will  quickly  form  in  line. 

In  like  manner  three  or  four  files  may  be  broken  off  at  once. 
The  files  ordered  will  mark  time,  advance  the  right  shoulder, 
and  place  themselves  behind  the  three  nearest  files  which 
remain  in  line. 

The  road  widening,  the  officer  of  the  first  platoon  will 
command, 

1  Three  first  files  into  line. 

2  March. 

The  files  directed  will  step  quickly,  by  the  shortest  way, 
into  line.  The  guide  will  march  by  the  first  man  in  front. 

This  lesson  is  important,  as  a  column  should  never  occupy, 
from  front  to  rear,  more  ground  than  would  be  required  to 
form  it  in  line. 

If  a  leading  subdivision  is  obstructed  by  a  difficult  pass, 
which  occasions  it  to  decrease  the  rate  of  its  march,  the  fol- 
lowing subdivision  will  not  shorten  its  pace  until  it  arrives  at 
the  same  place,  although  it  may  close  up  on  the  leading  one. 
The  same  rule  will  be  observed  to  the  rear  of  the  column. 

When  the  obstacle  is  passed,  the  distances  will  very  natu- 
rally be  recovered. 

When  a  column  meets  with  a  pass  admitting  only  one  or 


60 

two  in  front,  as  a  log  bridge  across  a  deep  stream,  the  com- 
mander will  order  one  or  two  files  at  a  time  to  pass  from  the 
same  flank;  they  will  follow  as  close  as  possible;  the  first  sub- 
division will  form  when  the  files  have  passed,  and  march  for- 
ward so  far,  that  between  it  and  the  defile  a  close  column 
may  form,  containing  the  whole;  it  will  then  halt,  and  wait 
until  the  rear  has  passed  the  defile. 

To  form  Platoons  on  the  March. 
The  lieutenant  colonel  will  command, 

1  Form  platoons. 

at  this  word  of  command,  the  officers  of  second  platoons  step 
before  them,  and  the  captains  of  companies  step  before  the 
first  platoons;  the  officers  of  second  platoons  order, 

Mark  time. 

The  lieutenant  colonel  orders, 

2  March. 

and  as  soon  as  the  first  platoon  clears  the  second,  the  officer 
of  the  second  commands, 

1  Oblique  to  the  right. 

2  March. 

The  first  platoon  marches  on,  and  the  covering  sergeant 
passing  before  the  front  rank,  places  himself  as  guide  on  its 
left.  The  second  platoon  obliques  to  the  right,  and  when  the 
left  guide  is  nearly  in  line  with  the  guide  of  the  first  platoon, 
the  officer  of  the  second  commands, 

1  Forward. 

2  March. 

taking  care  to  give  the  word  "  march,"  when  the  guides  are 
in  line. 

To  form  Companies  on  the  March. 
The  lieutenant  colonel  will  command, 
Form  companies. 


61 

and  each  captain  will  command, 

1  Form  company. 

2  First  platoon,  oblique  to  the  right. 

3  March. 

The  first  platoon  obliques  to  the  right.  Each  second  pla- 
toon continues  to  march  straight  on  by  the  guide  on  the  left, 
and  when  the  first  platoon  has  unmasked  the  second,  the  cap- 
tain will  order, 

1  First  platoon,  mark  time. 

2  March. 

The  covering  sergeant  passing  the  front  takes  his  place  on 
the  right  of  the  company.  The  platoons  unite,  and  the  cap- 
tain commands, 

1  Forward. 

2  March. 

If  the  column  marches  with  the  left  in  front,  the  obliqu- 
ing of  the  platoons  will  be  to  the  left,  and  the  second  platoons 
will  lead. 

To  change  the  Direction- 

The  lieutenant  colonel  will  inform  the  officer  commanding 
the  leading  subdivision  of  the  intention,  place  himself  where 
the  change  of  direction  is  to  take  place,  and  send  the  major 
thirty  paces  forward  on  the  new  direction,  who  will  halt  and 
face  the  lieutenant  colonel. 

The  captain  of  the  leading  subdivision,  when  he  arrives 
near  the  lieutenant  colonel,  will  command,  if  the  change  is  to 
the  side  of  the  guide, 

1  To  the  left,  turn. 

2  March. 

which  last  command  will  be  given  as  the  guide  passes  the 
head  of  the  lieutenant  colonel's  horse. 

The  wheel  is  made  as  prescribed  in  the  drill  of  the  com- 
pany. 

Article  IV. 

Change  of  Direction  by  the  Prompt  Manceiivre. 

When  the  lieutenant  colonel  has  determined  on  the  change 
of  direction,  and  pointed  out  an  object  in  the  new  direction  to 


62 

the  leading  guide,  the  first  company  wheels  as  prescribed  in 
the  change  of  direction.  When  two  companies  have  wheel- 
ed into  the  new  direction,  the  lieutenant  colonel  will  com- 
mand, 

1  Prompt  manoeuvre  by  the  right  flank. 

2  Six  last  companies,  quick  time. 

3  March. 

The  six  last  companies  at  the  word  "  march,"  face  to  the 
right  on  the  march,  wheel  by  files  to  the  left,  and  by  the 
quick  step,  inclining  to  the  head  of  the  column,  enter  parallel. 
The  captain  of  each  company  stops  on  the  left  flank;  his  com- 
pany files  by  him;  and  when  his  left  guide  has  arrived  even 
with  him,  he  rapidly  commands, 

1  Company. 

2  Halt. 

3  Front. 

4  March. 

5  Guide  to  the  left. 

The  word  "  march,"  is  to  be  given  by  the  captain  of  each 
company  when  it  has  its  distance. 

In  practising  this  manoeuvre,  it  will  at  first  be  necessary  to 
delay  the  head  of  the  column,  by  giving  after  the  word 
"  march"  by  the  lieutenant  colonel,  the  command, 

Mark  time  in  front. 

The  principal  use  of  this  manceuvre  seems  to  be,  to  prepare 
to  form  a  line  of  battle  facing  to  the  rear,  on  the  right  and 
left  of  that  whereon  the  column  is  advancing. 

Should  the  commander  give  the  word  "  halt"  before  all 
the  companies  have  filed  into  the  column,  those  placed  in 
column  only  would  halt;  the  companies  marching  by  flank 
would  incline  to  the  rear,  enter  the  column  at  their  proper 
distances,  and  halt,  front,  and  dress.  If  the  column  should 
have  wheeled  up  into  line,  they  would  also  successively 
wheel  into  line. 


63 


Article  V. 
To  halt  the  Column, 
The  lieutenant  colonel  will  command, 

1  Column. 

2  Halt. 

The  captains  will  repeat  "  halt,"  and  no  guide  will  move. 
The  major  will  place  himself  at  twenty  paces  before  the  lead- 
ing guide,  facing  him.  The  second  guide  will  dress  by  the 
first,  and  the  major.  The  lieutenant  colonel  will  then  com- 
mand, 

3  Guides  in  line. 

At  this  command,  the  guides  will  place  themselves  on  the 
same  line  with  the  major  and  the  two  leading  guides,  at  the 
distance  of  a  company. 

The  lieutenant  colonel  will  command, 

4  To  the  left,  dress. 

Each  company  will  approach  its  guide.  The  captains  will 
step  two  paces  outside  of  the  line  of  guides,  and  command, 

1  Left,  DRESS. 

2  Steady. 

and  take  their  places  two  paces  before  the  centres  of  their 
respective  companies. 

Article  VI. 

To  close  the  Column. 

The  battalion  being  in  column  of  companies  at  full  dis- 
tance, the  lieutenant  colonel  will  command, 

1  To  the  front  close  the  column. 

2  March. 

The  captain  of  each  company,  except  the  leading  one,  will 
repeat  the  word  "  march."  The  first  company  will  stand  fast 
if  halted.  If  on  a  march,  its  captain  will  command, 


64 

1  First  company. 

2  Halt. 

3  Left,  DRESS. 

4  Steady. 

At  the  word  "  march,"  all  the  other  companies  will  step 
off  together,  and  be  halted  in  like  manner,  when  closed.  The 
major  and  adjutant  will  see  that  the  left  guides  are  placed 
correctly  in  line.  The  captain  of  each  company  will,  in  dress- 
ing it,  place  himself  two  paces  outside  of  the  line  of  guides, 
afterwards  taking  his  place  two  paces  before  the  centre  of 
his  company. 

To  form  the  column  at  half  company  distance,  the  com- 
mander will  substitute  the  words  ''  to  half  distance,"  in  place 
of  "  to  the  front." 

Article  VII. 
To  march  in  Close  Column. 
The  lieutenant  colonel  will  command, 

1  Column,  forward. 

2  Guide  to  the  left. 

3  March. 

In  columns,  whether  close  or  at  half  distance,  the  words 
*'  march,"  and  "  halt,"  are  to  be  repeated  by  the  commanding 
officers  of  divisions,  companies  or  platoons,  according  as  the 
column  may  be  formed  of  divisions,  companies  or  platoons, 
as  is  done  in  columns  at  whole  distance. 


Article  VIII. 

To  change  Direction  in  Column^  at  half  or  Platoon  distance. 

A  column  at  half  distance  will  change  its  direction  either 
to  or  from  the  side  of  the  guides  by  the  same  words  of  com- 
mand as  are  prescribed  for  a  column  at  whole  distance;  but 
if  the  change  is  made  from  the  side  of  the  guide  the  pivot 
man  will  take  steps  of  twelve  inches,  instead  of  steps  of  six 
inches;  to  avoid  stopping  the  next  company. 


6& 

Article  IX. 
To  change  the  Direction  of  the  Close  Column. 

The  battalion  being  halted,  and  the  commander  desiring 
to  place  it  in  a  new  direction  facing  toward  the  left,  two 
markers  with  bannerols  will  be  placed,  one  of  them  before 
the  right  hand  file,  the  other  behind  and  facing  toward  him, 
at  company  distance,  on  the  new  direction. 

The  lieutenant  colonel  will  then  command, 

1  Change  direction  by  the  right  flank. 

2  Battalion,  to  the  right  Face. 

3  March. 

At  the  second  command,  the  whole  face  to  the  right,  and 
the  captains  place  themselves  beside  their  right  guides. 
At  the  word  "  march,"  the  whole  step  off  together. 
The  leading  file  on  the  right  of  the  first  company,  will  be 
conducted  by  the  right  guide  exactly  parallel  with  the  two 
markers,  who  are  placed  to  ascertain  the  direction  of  the  new 
front.  The  captains  will  halt  on  the  left  of  the  column;  see 
their  companies  file  by  them;  and  when  the  left  guide  of  a 
company  is  advanced  into  the  line  of  guides  on  the  left  of  the 
column,  the  captain  will  command, 

1  Compan}'. 

2  Halt. 

3  Front. 

4  Left  Dress. 

5  Steady. 

The  lieutenant  colonel  will  be  on  the  side  the  companies 
march  to;  the  major  before  the  first  company;  the  adjutant 
behind  the  last. 

The  direction  will  be  changed  from  the  left  flank  to  face 
toward  the  right,  in  a  similar  manner;  only  that  the  captains 
will  conduct  their  companies  until  their  left  guides  are  in  the 
proper  direction  of  the  left  flank  of  the  column. 

In  this  manner  the  column  may  be  established  on  any  di- 
rection included  within  half  the  horizon.  By  countermarch- 
ing it  may  take  any  direction  included  within  the  other  half; 
and  thus  take  any  direction  required. 

r 


(36 

Article  X. 
To  Countermarch. 

The  countermarch  of  the  open  column,  will  be  performed 
as  described  in  the  drill  of  the  company;  each  company  coun- 
termarching on  its  own  ground. 

The  lieutenant  colonel  will  command, 

1  Countermarch. 

2  Battalion,  by  the  right  flank. 

3  To  the  right  Face. 

4  B\'  file  to  the  left,  countermarch. 

5  March. 

At  the  second  command,  each  captain  will  go  to  the  side 
of  his  guide  on  the  right. 

At  the  third  command,  the  left  guide  faces  to  the  right 
about. 

At  the  fifth  command,  the  left  guide  stands  fast.  The  com- 
pany wheeling  by  file  to  the  left,  its  right  arrives  two  paces 
in  rear  of  the  left  guide,  who  stood  fast. 

The  captain  of  the  first  company  will  command, 

1   First  company. 
8  Halt. 

3  Front. 

He  will  then  place  himself  two  paces  outside  of  the  guide 
who  stood  fast,  and  command, 

4  Right  Dress. 

5  Steady. 

and  take  his  place  two  paces  before  the  centre  of  his  com- 
pany. The  left  guide  passes  along  the  front  to  his  post  on  the 
left.  The  covering  sergeant  takes  his  post  as  guide  on  the 
right. 

The  other  companies  are  brought  to  the  front  in  the  like 
manner;  each  captain  designating  his  company  by  its  number 
in  the  battalion. 

The  major  and  adjutant  will  exchange  places,  the  head  of 
the  column  being  changed. 

The  close  column  formed  of  divisions,  the  right  in  front, 
being  to  countermarch,  the  lieutenant  colonel  will  command, 


1  Countermarch. 

2  Battalion,  by  the  right  flank. 

3  To  the  right  Face. 

4  Even  divisions,  forward, 

5  March. 

The  even  divisions  march  by  the  right  flank.  Their  leit 
guides,  who  faced  to  the  right  about,  stand  fast.  So  soon  as 
the  even  divisions  unmask  the  odd  divisions,  the  lieutenant 
colonel  will  command, 

6  Even  and  odd  divisions. 

7  By  file  to  the  left,  countermarch. 

8  March. 

The  countermarch  being  completed,  the  divisions  will 
be  dressed,  as  has  been  explained. 

Article  XI. 

To  form  Divisions  from  the  Close  Column  of  Companies^  at 
the  Halt. 

Supposing  that  the  close  column  of  companies  has  the 
right  in  front,  the  lieutenant  colonel  will  command, 

1  Form  divisions. 

2  Even  companies  by  the  left  flank. 

3  To  the  left,  Face. 

4  March. 

At  the  second  command,  each  captain  of  an  even  num» 
bered  company  will  step  to  the  guide  on  the  left.  At  the 
third  command  these  companies  will  face;  and  the  right  and 
left  guides  of  the  odd  numbered  companies  will  place  them- 
selves, facing  to  the  right,  before  the  flank  files  of  those  com- 
panies, to  mark  the  direction  of  the  divisions.  At  the  fourth 
command,  the  even  companies  will  march;  their  captains 
will  see  them  file  by  them;  and  when  they  have  nearly  un 
covered  the  odd  companies,  will  command, 

1  Company. 

2  Halt. 

3  Front. 


68 

The  captains  will  then  come  beside  the  left  front  rank  men 
of  the  odd  companies,  and  dress  on  them  corrrectly;  the  left 
guide  of  each  even  company,  will  place  himself  before  one 
of  the  three  left  files  of  his  company,  facing  to  the  right,  and 
in  line  with  the  guides  of  the  odd  company.  The  captain 
will  command) 

4  Right  Dress. 

The  second  company  of  each  division  will  dress  into  the 
alignment  of  the  division,  the  front  rank  man  opposite  the 
left  guide  just  touching  with  his  breast  the  guide's  right  arm. 
The  captain  will  then  command, 

5  Steady. 

but  he  will  remain  himself  in  the  front  rank.  The  lieutenant 
colonel  will  command, 

Guides  to  your  posts. 

The  guides  pass  to  their  places,  on  the  flanks  and  in 
the  rear;  and  the  captains  of  the  odd  numbered  companies 
will  take  their  places,  two  paces  before  the  centres  of  the  di- 
visions. 

In  marching  to  the  flank,  the  even  companies  should  care- 
fully lock  up  the  files.  And  great  attention  should  be  given 
to  halt  those  companies  at  the  proper  time. 


PART  IV. 

Different  Modes  of  forming  the  Line  from  Columns. 

Article  I. 
Methods  of  ascertaining  the  Line  to  be  formed  on. 

The  line  may  be  fixed  on,  in  three  different  manners. 

1.  By  placing  two  bannerols  in  the  direction  to  be  given 
to  the  line. 

2.  By  fixing  on  a  point  where  one  of  the  flanks  is  to  rest, 
and  choosing  afterwards  an  object  on  the  opposite  flank,  to 
determine  the  direction  of  the  line. 


69 

3.  By  first  choosing  the  points  of  direction  of  the  two 
flanks,  and  then  fixing  on  intermediate  points. 

In  the  first  case,  the  adjutant  will  place  two  markers  with 
bannerols,  forty  paces  from  each  other,  in  the  direction 
pointed  out  to  him;  the  line  between  them  will  be  the  basis 
of  the  alignment. 

In  the  second  case,  the  point  of  rest  being  shown  to  the 
adjutant,  and  the  object  of  direction  on  the  opposite  flank, 
he  will  fix  two  markers  with  bannerols  at  a  distance  some 
what  less  than  the  extent  of  the  leading  subdivision  of  the 
column,  one  of  them  at  the  point  of  rest,  the  other  on  the 
line  towards  the  object  of  direction,  on  the  opposite  flank. 

In  the  third  case,  where  distant  objects  are  given  for  the 
direction  of  the  two  flanks,  the  intermediate  points  are  thus 
found. 

The  major  and  adjutant  will  proceed  to  a  point  supposed 
to  be  in  a  direct  line  between  the  two  distant  objects,  and 
where  the  right  of  the  line  will  rest.  The  adjutant  will  pro- 
ceed directly  towards  the  object  on  the  left,  the  extent  re- 
quired, and  face  the  major,  who  will  have  taken  care  by 
moving  to  the  right  or  left,  to  keep  the  adjutant  directly  be- 
tween himself  and  the  distant  object  on  the  left.  Should  the 
adjutant  then  perceive  that  the  line  is  to  his  right  or  left,  he 
will  face  and  approach  to  it.  The  major  will  move  in  the  same 
direction,  to  keep  in  line  with  the  adjutant  and  the  distant 
object  on  the  left.  When  the  adjutant  perceives  that  the  ma- 
jor is  in  line  between  him  and  the  object  on  the  right,  he  will 
make  him  a  signal  to  halt;  and  thus  the  two  intermediate 
points  are  ascertained. 

Article  II. 

Different  Methods  of  forming  a  Column  at  full  distance  ^ 
Right  in  Front^  into  Line. 

1  To  the  left. 

2  On  the  right. 

3  To  the  front. 

4  Facing  to  the  rear. 

1.  Column  at  full  Distance^  right  in  fronts  to  the  left  in  Line, 

The  column  being  halted,  and  the  guides  on  the  left  dress- 
ed, the  lieutenant  colonel  will  command. 


70 

1  To  the  left  in  line,  wheel. 

2  March. 

At  the  first  command,  the  left  hand  man  of  the  front  rank 
of  each  company  will  face  to  the  left,  his  breast  touching  the 
guide's  right  arm;  and  the  right  guide  of  the  front  company 
will  place  himself  on  a  line  with  the  left  guides,  facing  the 
left  guide  of  that  company  at  nearly  the  distance  of  a  com- 
pany from  him.  The  major  will  attend  to  this  guide. 

At  the  word  "  march,"  which  each  captain  will  quickly 
repeat,  the  companies  will  wheel  according  to  the  directions 
given  for  wheeling  on  a  standing  pivot. 

When  the  right  of  the  company  has  arrived  within  two 
paces  of  the  line,  the  captain  will  command, 

1  Company. 

2  Halt. 

3  Right  Dress. 

The  company  will  move  up  between  the  captain  and  the 
man  on  the  left  of  the  front  rank,  who  faced  to  the  left.  The 
man  on  the  right  of  the  leading  company  will  lightly  touch 
his  breast  against  the  left  arm  of  the  right  guide  of  that  com- 
pany. Each  captain  having  dressed  his  company,  will  com- 
mand, 

4  Steady. 

and  take  his  place  in  line.  The  lieutenant  colonel  will  com- 
mand, 

Guides  to  your  posts. 

The  captains  and  covering  sergeants  will  open  the  interval, 
by  stepping  to  the  left  behind  their  respective  ranks,  and 
allow  the  guides  to  pass. 

The  file  closers  will  dress  correctly  two  paces  from  the 
rear  rank. 

If  the  column  had  the  left  in  front,  the  wheel  would  be  to 
the  right  into  line,  on  the  same  principles. 

To  form  the  Line  by  Inversion. 

A  sudden  occasion  may  render  it  necessary  to  wheel  the 
companies  of  the  open  column  into  line,  on  the  reverse  flank, 
without  taking  time  to  place  them  in  their  proper  order  from 
rl^ht  to  left. 


71 

The  lieutenant  colonel  will  command, 

1  By  inversion. 

2  To  the  right  in  line. 

3  Guide  to  the  right. 

At  the  second  command,  the  major  places  himself  in  front, 
in  line  with,  and  facing  the  right  guides.  At  the  third  com- 
mand, the  right  guides  are  quickly  dressed,  by  the  major  in 
front  and  the  adjutant  in  the  rear.  The  left  guide  of  the  lead- 
ing company,  also  places  himself  at  nearly  the  distance  of  a 
company  before  the  right  guide,  facing  him,  in  line  with  the 
right  guides. 

4  Right  wheel. 

5  March. 

At  the  word  "  march,"  by  the  lieutenant  colonel,  the  right 
guide  halts,  and  the  right  front  rank  man  of  each  company 
faces  to  the  right,  and  touches  his  breast  against  the  left  arm 
of  the  guide.  The  companies  wheel  on  a  fixed  pivot,  and  the 
battalion  forms  in  line  to  the  right. 

The  lieutenant  colonel  seeing  the  line  formed,  will  com- 
mand, 

G  uides  to  your  posts. 

2.  To  form  the  Line  on  the  Right, 

The  column  marching  with  the  right  in  front,  the  lieuten- 
ant colonel  will  point  out  to  the  major  where  the  right  of  the 
line  is  to  rest,  and  its  direction  towards  the  left,  who  will 
detach  two  markers  with  bannerols,  and  place  one  where 
the  right  of  the  line  is  to  rest,  the  other  on  the  direction  in- 
tended to  be  taken,  where  the  left  of  the  leading  company 
will  extend  to.  They  will  each  present  the  right  side  to  the 
line  when  formed. 

When  the  head  of  the  column  is  nearly  up  to  the  first  of 
them,  the  lieutenant  colonel  will  command, 

1  On  the  right  form  the  line. 

2  Battalion,  guide  to  the  right. 

When  the  company  in  front  is  nearly  opposite  to  the  first 
marker,  its  captain  will  commandj 


72 

1  To  the  right  turn. 
and  when  exactly  even  with  the  marker, 

2  March. 

The  company  will  wheel  to  the  right  by  echellon  of  files, 
left  shoulders  forward;  the  man  on  the  right  touching  with 
his  breast  the  right  arm  of  the  first  marker. 

The  captain  will  command, 

1  Company. 

2  Halt. 

3  Right  Dress. 

and  dress  the  company  by  the  two  markers;  he  will  then 
command, 

4  Steady. 

The  second  company  will  march  until  it  arrives  at  the  left 
of  the  first.  It  will  then  wheel  into  line  in  like  manner,  by 
command  of  its  captain.  He  will  dress  with  the  front  rank  of 
the  first  company.  The  guide  of  this  company  on  the  left,  in 
line  with  the  two  markers,  will  give  direction  to  the  line.  The 
captain  will  command, 

Right  DRESS. 

The  company  will  move  into  line,  and  be  dressed  on  the 
man  of  the  front  rank  on  the  left,  whose  breast  touches  the 
right  arm  of  the  guide. 

The  following  companies  will  form  in  succession  in  the 
same  manner.  The  lieutenant  colonel  will  then  command, 

Guides  to  your  posts. 

The  guides  will  pass  through  the  intervals,  and  the  markers 
will  retire. 

If  the  left  is  in  front,  the  battalion  forms  on  the  left  in  line, 
by  the  same  principles,  and  inverse  means. 

3.  To  form  the  Line  to  the  Front* 

When  the  leading  company  is  at  the  distance  of  a  com- 
pany from  the  point  where  the  right  of  the  line  is  to  rest,  the 
colum-n  will  be  halted;  two  markers  with  bannerols  advanc- 
ed and  placed  on  the  line,  at  nearly  the  distance  of  a  com- 


75 

pany  from  each  other,  and  both  presenting  the  right  shoulder 
to  the  column.  One  of  them  will  be  at  the  point  where  the 
right  is  to  rest;  the  other  on  the  direction  toward  the  left. 
This  being  done,  the  lieutenant  colonel  will  command, 

1  Form  the  line  to  the  front. 

2  Battalion,  guide  to  the  right. 

3  By  companies,  half  wheel  to  the  left. 

4  March. 

At  the  word  "  march"  all  the  companies,  except  that  in 
front,  make  a  half  wheel,  that  is  wheel  one  eighth  of  a  circle, 
to  the  left.  As  soon  as  all  have  made  this  half  wheel,  the 
lieutenant  colonel  will  command, 

1  Forward. 

2  March. 

The  leading  company  forms  on  the  markers. 

The  other  companies  advance  in  echellon  towards  their 
places  in  the  line.  The  right  guide  of  the  second  company 
advances  to  the  left  of  the  first  company.  The  right  guide  of 
each  other  company  follows  that  file  of  the  company  next  on 
the  right  that  is  immediately  before  him,  until  it  wheels  to 
the  right,  when  he  marches  straightforward.  When  the  right 
guide  advances  opposite  the  left  file  of  the  preceding  com- 
pany in  lin©,  the  left  guide  springs  quickly  forward,  faces  the 
markers  on  the  line,  and  dresses  by  them.  The  captain  will 
command,  f 

1  To  the  right  turn. 

2  March. 

and  the  company  forms  by  echellon  of  files  in  line.  He  th^n 
commands, 

1  Company. 

2  Halt. 

3  Right   DRESS. 

4  Steady. 

And  when  the  line  is  completed,  the  lieutenant  colonel 
will  command. 

Guides  to  your  posts. 

When  the  left  is  in  front,  this  formation  will  be  efFerted 
by  inverse  means. 

K 


74 

If  the  direction  taken  for  the  line  forms  more  than  a  right 
angle  with  the  direction  of  the  column,  the  line  would  form 
*'  on  the  right  in  line"  by  the  wheeling  of  companies  in  succes- 
sion, according  to  the  rules  prescribed  for  that  formation. 

4.  To  Form  the  Line  faced  to  the  Rear, 

The  open  column  with  the  right  in  front  is  supposed  t© 
arrive  in  front  and  upon  the  right  of  the  line  to  be  formed 
on.  The  lieutenant  colonel  will  point  out  to  the  major  the 
point  where  the  right  is  to  rest,  and  the  object  of  direction 
on  the  left.  The  major  will  place  two  markers  with  bannerols 
on  the  line  at  company  distance,  one  of  them  at  the  point  of 
rest  for  the  right,  presenting  the  left  side  to  the  column. 

The  head  of  the  column  having  arrived  within  about  com- 
pany distance  of  the  line,  the  lieutenant  colonel  will  halt  the 
column,  and  command, 

1  Form  the  line  faced  to  the  rear. 

2  Battalion,  by  the  right  flank. 

3  To  the  right  face. 

4  March. 

At  the  third  commaad,  all  the  companies  face  to  the  rightj 
and  the  captains  will  place  themselves  beside  their  right 
guides. 

At  the  word  "  march,"  they  move  off  by  flank  to  take  their 
places  in  the  line.  The  leading  company  immediately  wheels 
by  files  to  the  left,  and  leaving  on  its  left  the  marker  who 
stood  before  the  right  of  the  column,  crosses  the  line  two 
paces,  wheels  round  him  by  file  to  the  left,  halts,  fronts,  and 
dresses  on  the  markers,  faced  toward  the  rear  of  the  column. 

When  arrived  within  ten  paces  of  the  line,  the  left  guide 
of  the  second  company  runs  forward,  and  places  himself  in 
line  with  the  markers  who  are  before  the  first  company;  the 
company  to  which  he  is  guide  wheels  around  him  by  files, 
keeping  him  on  its  left;  and  when  the  captain,  who  conducts 
his  company  parallel  to  and  two  paces  in  rear  of  the  line,  ar- 
rives at  the  left  of  the  company  already  formed,  he  will  com- 
mand, 

1  Second  company. 

2  Halt. 

3  Front. 

4  Right  DRESS. 

5  Steady. 


75 

The  other  companies  come  into  line  in  the  like  manner. 
And  finally  the  lieutenant  colonel,  seeing  the  formation  com- 
pleted, will  command, 

Guides  to  your  posts. 

When  the  left  is  in  front,  this  formation  will  be  executed 
by  inverse  means. 

Article  III. 

To  form  the  Line  by  two  kinds  of  Movement. 

A  column  with  the  right  in  front,  arriving  in  rear  of  the 
line,  if  the  lieutenant  colonel  wishes  it  to  form  in  line  extend- 
ing to  the  right  and  left,  from  the  point  where  the  first  com- 
pany wheels  to  the  right,  he  will  halt  when  so  many  com- 
panies have  wheeled  to  march  along  the  line,  as  he  chooses, 
suppose  five,  and  will  command, 

1  To  the  left  in  line. 

2  Three  last  companies,  to  the  front  in  line. 

At  the  second  command,  the  captain  of  each  of  the  three 
last  companies  will  command, 

1  Guide  to  the  right. 

2  Company,  half  wheel  to  the  left. 

The  lieutenant  colonel  then  commands, 

3  March. 

The  first  five  companies  wheel  into  line.  The  captain  of 
each  of  tht  three  last  companies,  when  his  company  has  half 
wheeled,  will  order, 

1  Forward. 

2  March. 

and  form  it  in  line,  as  has  been  directed  for  forming  "  to 
the  front  in  line." 

If  the  column  should  arrive  in  front  of  the  line,  the  lieu- 
tenant colonel,  when  the  first  five  companies  have  wheeled  to 
the  left,  will  halt  it,  and  command, 

1  To  the  left  in  line. 

2  Three  last  companies,  face  to  the  rear  in  line. 


76 

The  captain  of  each  of  the  three  last  companies  will  com- 
mand, 

1  Company,  by  the  right  flank. 

2  To  the  right  face. 

The  lieutenant  colonel  then  will  command, 
March. 

At  this  word,  repeated  by  the  captains  of  companies,  the 
five  first  companies  form  "  to  the  left  in  line;"  the  three  last 
companies  form  "faced  to  the  rear  in  line,"  as  directed  for 
those  formations. 

Article  IV. 

Different  Methods  of  forming  a  Column  at  Half  Distance^ 
Right  in  Fronts  into  Line. 

1  To  the  left. 

2  On  the  right. 

3  To  the  front. 

4  Facing  to  the  rear. 

1.  Column  at  Ha  f  Distance,  Right  in  Front ,  to  the  Left  in 

Line. 

The  column  being  supposed  to  be  marching  along  the  line 
to  be  formed  on,  when  the  rear  company  arrives  at  the  point 
where  the  left  is  to  rest,  the  lieutenant  colonel  will  halt  the 
column,  and  command. 

Take  distance  by  the  head  of  column. 

The  captain  of  the  leading  company  will  command, 

1  First  company,  forward. 

2  Guide  to  the  left. 

3  March. 

The  captain  of  the  second  company,  when  his  company  has 
nearly  its  distance  from  the  first,  will  give  the  commands, 

1  Second  company,  forward. 

2  Guide  to  the  left. 

3  March. 

The  last  word  of  command  to  be  given  when  his  company 
has  exactly  its  distance. 


77 

The  other  companies  will  march  in  the  like  manner;  and 
each  company  will  take  the  step  from  that  which  precedes  it. 

If  the  line  is  to  be  formed,  the  lieutenant  colonel  will  halt 
the  column  at  the  instant  when  the  rear  company  has  its  dis- 
tance. 

2.  Column  at  Half  Distance^  Right  in  Fronts  on  the  Right  in 

Line. 

This  movement  will  be  executed  by  the  means  which  have 
been  prescribed  for  a  column  at  full  distance. 

3.  Column  at  Half  Distance^  to  form  to  the  Front  in  Line, 

This  movement  cannot  be  executed  as  by  a  column  at  full 
distance,  for  want  of  space  to  wheel  a  quarter  of  a  circle. 
The  companies  will  take  distance  by  the  head  of  column;  or 
the  column  may  be  closed,  and  displayed  into  line. 

4.  Column  at  Half  Distance^  to  Form  facing  to  the  Rear  in 

Line. 
This  movement  will  be  executed  in  the  same  manner  as  by 
a  column  at  full  distance. 


Article  V. 
To  display  the  Close  Column  into  Line. 

The  displaying  of  a  close  column  will  always  be  square. 
And  the  first  step  taken  will  be  to  establish  the  column  on 
a  direction  perpendicular  to  the  line. 

A  column  in  close  order  may  form  in  line,  to  the  front, 
rear,  right,  or  left.  First,  by  displaying.  Second,  by  coun- 
termarching and  displaying.  Third  and  Fourth,  by  chang- 
ing the  direction,  and  displaying. 

The  line  being  fixed  on,  the  adjutant  will  establish  two 
markers,  distant  something  less  than  the  extent  of  one  of  the 
divisions  of  the  column,  which  will  be  marched  up  and  halted 
within  two  paces  of  them.  If  the  column  is  not  already  per- 
pendicular to  the  line,  it  will  be  so  established. 

Supposing  the  column  is  to  display  on  the  second  division, 
the  lieutenant  colonel  will  command, 

1  On  the  second  division,  display  the  column. 

2  Battalion,  to  the  right  and  left  face. 

3  March. 


78 

At  the  first  command,  the  captain  commanding  the  second 
division  will  direct  it  to  stand  fast.  The  captains  command- 
ing the  other  divisions  will  direct  them  how  they  are  to  face. 
The  captain  commanding  the  first  division  will  go  to  his  guide 
on  the  right.  1  he  divisions  that  have  faced  will  step  off  at 
th'  'vord  "march."  The  guide  of  the  first  division  will  take 
cart  not  to  cross  the  line.  The  guides  on  the  left  of  the  third 
and  fourth  will  preserve  three  paces  distance  between  them. 
The  captains  commanding  the  first  and  third  divisions  do  not 
march,  but  see  their  divisions  file  by  them.  The  captain  com- 
manding the  fourth,  will  stop  when  the  word"  halt"  is  given 
to  the  third,  see  his  division  file  by  him,  and  halt  it  as  the 
last  file  passes.  When -the  captain  commanding  the  first  di- 
vision perceives  that  it  has  uncovered  the  second,  he  will 
command, 

1  First  division. 

2  Halt. 

3  Front. 

and  place  himself  before  the  centre. 

The  captain  commanding  the  second  division  will  com- 
mand, 

1  Second  division. 

2  Forward. 

3  Guide  to  the  left. 

4  March. 

The  second  division  will  advance  to  the  line  designated  by 
the  markers.  Its  commander  will  order, 

5  Second  division. 

6  Halt. 

The  second  division  will  stand  fast,  and  the  covering  ser- 
geant of  the  fourth  company  will  place  himself  on  the  line 
betAveen  the  two  markers,  face  to  the  right,  and  be  correctly 
established  by  the  major.  The  captain  commanding  the  se- 
cond division  going  to  its  left,  will  command, 

7  Left  DRESS, 

He  will  dress  the  fourth  company,  and  the  captain  of  the 
fourth  will  dress  the  third  company,  afterwards  giving  the 
word, 


79 

8  Steady. 

The  captain  of  the  grenadiers,  who  will  himself  have  halt- 
ed on  hearing  the  word  "  halt"  given  to  the  first  division, 
80  soon  as  his  division  uncovers  the  first,  will  command, 

1  Grenadiers. 

2  Halt. 

3  Front. 

At  the  word  "  front,"  the  guide  of  the  right  of  each  com- 
pany of  grenadiers  will  place  himself  on  the  line,  facing  to  the 
left,  and  dressing  by  the  two  markers  established  on  the  line 
in  front  of  the  second  division. 

As  soon  as  the  captain  commanding  the  first  division  shall 
see  it  nearly  uncovered  by  the  grenadiers,  he  will  command, 

1  First  division,  forward. 

2  Guide  to  the  left. 

3  March. 

He  shall  give  this  last  word  at  the  instant  when  his  divi- 
sion shall  be  completely  uncovered.  This  division  will  majxh 
up  to  the  line,  and  when  it  shall  have  arrived  within  two 
paces,  the  captain  will  order, 

1  First  division. 

2  Halt. 

and  place  himself  beside  the  right  hand  front  rank  man  of 
the  second  division;  the  right  guide  of  each  company  of  the 
first  division  will  place  himself  on  the  line,  dressing  by  the 
two  markers  in  front  of  the  second  division;  the  captain  of 
the  first  division  will  then  command, 

3  Left  DRESS. 

He  will  dress  the  second  company,  while  the  captain  of 
the  second  dresses  the  first  company,  and  each  of  thenri  will 
command, 

4  Steady. 

The  captain  of  the  grenadiers  so  soon  as  he  has  se«;n  the 
first  division  on  the  hne,  without  waiting  to  hear  the  word 
"  steady"  given  to  that  division,  will  place  himself  beside 
the  right  front  rank  man,  and  give  to  his  division  tho  com- 
mand. 


80 

Left  DRESS. 

And  the  division  of  grenadiers  will  be  dressed  in  the 
manner  prescribed  for  dressing  the  first  division. 

The  displaying  of  the  divisions  which  move  to  the  left,  is 
conducted  in  the  same  manner. 

The  displaying  being  completed,  the  lieutenant  colonel 
will  command, 

Guides  to  your  posts. 

The  captains  commanding  the  first,  second,  and  grenadier 
divisions,  and  the  guides,  take  their  places  in  line.  The 
markers  retire. 

The  major  will  superintend  and  fix  the  guides  on  the  right, 
and  the  adjutant  those  on  the  left,  when  the  display  is  made 
on  a  central  division.  If  the  display  is  on  either  of  the  flank 
divisions,  the  major  superintends  and  fixes  the  guides  of  the 
whole. 

The  display  of  a  close  column  of  companies  would  be  ef- 
fected by  similar  means. 


PART  V. 

The  March  in  Line»^ 

\ 

i  Article  I. 

To  march  in  Line  to  the  Front. 

The  lieutenant  colonel  having  informed  the  major  of  his 
intention  to  march  the  battalion  in  line  to  the  front,  will 
place  himself  forty  paces  in  the  rear,  and  facing  the  colours; 
the  major  will  place  himself  forty  paces  in  front  of  the 
colours,  and  face  the  lieutenant  colonel,  who  by  signals 
with  the  sword  will  establish  him  on  a  line  with  the  colours, 
and  perpendicular  to  the  line  of  the  battalion,  and  then  will 
fix  on  some  distinct  distant  object,  if  such  a  one  offers,  in  line 
with  the  major  and  ensign.  When  the  major  is  established  on 
the  perpendicular  line,  the  ensign  will  take  two  objects  on 
the  ground  on  a  line  passing  'between  the  major's  heels, 
one  of  them  fifteen  or  twenty  paces  distant  from  himself. 
The  lieutenant  colonel  will  command, 

1  Battalion,  forward. 


81 

At  this  command,  the  front  rank  of  the  colour  guard  will 
advance  six  pacts  to  the  front;  the  centre  rank  will  occupy 
its  place  in  the  line;  the  two  general  guides  will  advance 
six  paces,  and  place  themselves  one  before  the  captain  on  the 
right,  the  other  before  the  sergeant  on  the  left  of  the  front 
rank  of  the  battalion. 

The  major  will  establish  correctly  the  ensign  who  carries 
the  colours,  between  himself  and  the  corporal  in  the  centre  of 
the  second  rank  of  the  colour  guard,  and  then  place  himself 
before  the  third  company. 

The  adjutant  will  place  himself  a  few  paces  on  the  left  of 
the  front  rank  of  the  colour  guard. 

The  lieutenant  colonel  will  then  command^ 

2  March. 

The  battalion  steps  off  with  life.  The  ensign  who  is  res- 
ponsible for  the  direction,  and  the  length  and  cadence  of  the 
step,  will  exactly  pursue  the  line  designated  by  the  points  he 
has  taken  on  the  ground,  and  will  carry  the  colours  on  the 
right  hip;  the  corporals  on  his  right  and  left  will  preserve 
the  same  step  with  him;  the  general  guides  will  march  by 
the  same  step,  and  dress  by  the  ensign's  rank,  without  re- 
garding each  other. 

The  three  corporals  of  the  second  rank  of  the  colour 
guard  will  march  with  great  accuracy,  the  corporal  in  the 
centre  exactly  following  the  ensign,  and  they  will  only 
lengthen  or  shorten  the  step  by  the  command  of  the  lieu- 
tenant colonel.  The  captain  of  the  fifth  company  will  march 
with  his  elbow  touching  the  left  hand  corporal  of  this  rank. 

The  captains  of  the  fourth  and  sixth  companies,  with  the 
captain  of  the  fifth  company,  and  the  centre  rank  of  the  co- 
lour guard,  will  form  the  basis  of  the  line  of  the  battalion; 
they  will  be  attentive  to  keep  the  head  direct,  and  the  shoul- 
ders square  to  the  front.  The  soldiers  will  take  care  not  to 
get  before  this  basis;  and  will  take  the  step  from  the  ensign. 

The  lieutenant  colonel  will  ride  fifteen  or  twenty  paces  in 
rear  of  the  centre  of  the  battalion.  If  he  perceives  that  the 
direction  on  which  the  ensign  marches  is  too  much  to  the 
right,  he  will  command, 

Point  of  direction  more  to  the  left. 

The  adjutant  will  move  quickly  to  forty  paces  before  the 
ensign,  and  halt,  facing  the  lieutenant  colonel,  who  bv  signals 

I. 


82 

with  the  sword  will  direct  him  to  the  proper  station.  The 
adjutant  will  then  by  signals  direct  the  ensign  to  the  left, 
until  he  covers  the  centre  file  of  the  colour  guard  in  line. 
The  ensign  and  the  general  guides  will  conform  to  the  new 
direction. 

The  major  will  observe  that  the  captains  conform  to  the 
direction,  and  when  necessary,  order,  "  captain  of  such  a 
company,  to  the  line." 

The  soldiers  will  keep  the  head  direct;  preserve  the  touch 
of  the  elbow  of  the  man  next  towards  the  centre;  resist  pres- 
sure from  the  flanks;  and  remain  a  very  little  farther  back 
than  the  line  of  captains. 

Should  the  battalion  lose  the  step,  the  lieutenant  colonel 
will  command, 

The  step. 

The  captains  and  soldiers  will  cast  a  glance  at  the  ensign, 
and  take  the  step  from  him. 


Article  II. 

To  pass  Obstacles  xvhen  tnarching-  in  LinCj  to  the  Front 
or  Rear, 

A  battalion  marching  to  the  front  in  line,  it  is  supposed 
that  an  obstacle  presents  itself  before  the  fourth  company; 
the  lieutenant  colonel  will  command, 

1  Fourth  company. 

2  Pass  the  obstacle. 

The  captain  of  the  fourth  company  will  step  before  it,  and 
command, 

1  Fourth  company. 

2  By  the  left  flank,  by  file  to  the  right. 

3  March. 

At  the  command  "  march,"  the  company  will  turn  to  the 
left,  wheeling  by  files  to  the  right,  and  follow  the  three  right 
hand  files  of  the  fifth  company;  the  covering  sergeant  will 
lead  the  front  rank,  and  the  captain  will  march  by  his  side. 

The  left  guide  of  the  third  company  will  come  to  the  left 
of  his  company,  and  preserve  between  himself  and  the  fifth 
company  a  space  sufficient  for  the  fourth  company,  when  it 
comes  again  into  line. 


83 

If  the  obstacle  presents  itself  before  a  company  in  the  left 
wing  of  the  battalion,  this  duty  will  be  fulfilled  by  the  cap- 
tain next  on  the  left. 

The  obstacle  being  passed,  the  lieutenant  colonel  will 
command, 

Fourth  company,  into  line. 
The  captain  will  command, 

1  Foulth  company,  into  line. 

2  March. 

The  files  will  come  successively  into  line,  the  soldiers  ad- 
vancing the  left  shoulder,  and  taking  the  quick  step. 

In  this  manner  two  companies  would  pass  an  obstacle.  If 
more  than  two  are  obstructed,  they  will  form  in  column  be- 
hind the  next  company  toward  the  centre,  by  command  of 
the  lieutenant  colonel,  in  this  manner. 

Suppose  ihat  an  obstacle  presents  itself  before  the  four 
companies  on  the  left,  the  lieutenant  colonel,  at  company  dis- 
tance from  the  obstacle,  will  command, 

1  Four  companies  on  the  left  obstructed. 

2  By  the  right  flank  to  the  rear  in  column. 

3  Quick  time,  march. 

At  the  second  command,  the  captains  of  the  four  compa- 
nies on  the  left  step  before  them,  and  direct  them  how  to 
execute  the  movement. 

At  the  word  "  march,"  they  face  to  the  right  in  marching; 
the  captains  disengage  the  heads  of  the  companies  to  the  rear, 
lead  them  quick  in  rear  of  the  fourth  company,  and  com- 
mand, 

1  Halt. 

2  Front. 

3  Common  time. 

4  March. 

5  Guide  to  the  left. 

The  companies  then  follow  at  company  distance,  in  column; 
and  when  the  obstacle  is  passed,  the  lieutenant  colonel  will 
command, 

1  Four  left  companies. 

2  To  the  front  in  line. 

The  captains  of  companies  will  command, 


84 

1  Guide  to  the  right.. 

2  Company,  left  wheel. 

And  then  the  lieutenant  colonel  will  command, 

3  Quick  time,  march. 

The  captains  repeat  the  word  "  march,"  and  when  a  halt 
wheel  is  made,  they  will  command, 

1  Forward. 

2  March. 

And  the  companies,  by  the  quick  step,  move  up  into  hne, 
and  form  as  directed  for  forming  "  to  the  front  in  line;'  the 
captains  respectively  commanding,  "the  step;"  when  the  com- 
pany will  take  the  step  from  the  ensign,  or  from  the  adjutant, 
if  the  ensign  has  not  recovered  his  station. 


Article  III. 
To  change  Direction  when  Marchhig  in  Line. 

A  battalion  advancing  in  line,  to  change  the  direction  t» 
:he  right,  the  lieutenant  colonel  will  command, 

1  Battalion,  to  the  right  wheel. 

2  March. 

The  ensign  will  direct  himself  circularly  to  the  right  by- 
steps  of  one  foot  in  length.  The  whole  battalion  wheels  on 
the  principles  of  wheelmg  at  the  halt;  the  left  hand  file  step- 
ping two  feet,  and  the  captain  of  the  right  company  acting 
as  a  pivot.  The  soldiers  will  take  care  not  to  get  before  the 
captains.  The  adjutant  will  place  himself  before  the  ensign, 
and  direct  his  march  so  that  the  circle,  of  which  he  describes 
a  portion  in  marching,  is  neither  too  large  nor  too  small. 

To  resume  the  direct  march,  the  lieutenant  colonel  will 
command, 

1  Forward. 

2  M  .rch. 

And  the  whole  will  march  to  t^e  front;  the  lieutenant  co- 
lonel and  the  adjutant  fixing  the  ensign  in  a  new  direction. 


S5 


Article  IV. 
To  march  in  Line  Obliquely. 
The  lieutenant  colonel  will  command, 

1  Oblique  to  the  right. 

2  March. 

The  whole  will  take  the  oblique  step.  The  major  will  take 
care  to  preserve  the  battalion  on  a  direction  parallel  to  the 
line  on  which  it  stood  when  it  took  the  oblique  step. 

To  march  directly  forward,  the  lieutenant  colonel  will 
command, 

1  Forward. 

2  March. 

At  the  word  "  march,"  the  battalion  will  march  straight 
forward,  and  the  lieutenant  colonel  and  the  adjutant  will 
give  the  ensign  a  new  direction. 


Article  V. 

To  halt  the  Battalion  marching  to  the  Fronts  and  to  dress  it. 

The  battalion  marching  to  the  front,  the  lieutenant  colonel 
will  command, 

1  Battalion. 

2  Halt. 

The  battalion  will  stand  fast  at  the  second  command.  If 
the  lieutenant  colonel  does  not  mean  to  take  a  new  direction, 
he  may  order  "  captains,  dress  the  line;"  and  they  will  each 
dress  his  company. 

If  the  lieutenant  colonel  wishes  to  take  a  new  direction,  he 
will  place  himself  a  few  paces  from  the  general  guide  on 
either  flank,  who  with  the  ensign  will  face  towards  him,  and 
he  will  fix  them  on  the  direction  by  signals  with  the  sword; 
the  ensign  will  hold  the  colours  perpendicularly  before  his 
face;  the  front  rank  of  the  colour  guard  will  retire  into  line. 

The  lieutenant  colonel  will  command, 

"  Guides  on  the  line. 


86 

At  this  command,  the  guide  of  each  company  most  dis- 
tant from  the  centre  will  place  himself  on  the  line,  facing  to 
the  colours,  and  leaving  a  proper  space  for  their  companies. 
The  major  and  adjutant  will  dress  them  correctly  on  the 
line.  The  captains  of  the  companies  on  the  right  of  the  co- 
lours, will  go  to  the  left  of  their  respective  companies."^  The 
lieutenant  colonel  will  command, 

4  Upon  the  centre  dress. 

The  companies  step  off  at  once  to  their  respective  guides. 
Their  captains  will  command, 

1  Right  (or  left)  dress. 

2  Steady. 

The  lieutenant  colonel  orders, 

5  Colours  and  guides  to  your  posts. 

Upon  which  the  ensign,  the  guides,  and  the  captains  of 
companies  on  the  right  of  the  centre,  take  their  proper  places 
in  the  line. 


Article  VI. 

To  March  in  Retreat. 

The  battalion  being  halted,  the  lieutenant  colonel  will 
command, 

1  Battalion,  right  about — face. 

The  whole  face  about;  the  front  rank  of  the  colour  guard, 
and  the  general  guides,  if  they  are  in  front,  will  take  their 
places  in  line;  the  ensign  will  come  into  the  third  rank,  now 
the  first.  The  lieutenant  colonel  places  himself  in  the  rear  of 
the  first  rank;  the  major  and  adjutant  place  themselves  in 
front  of  the  third  rank;  the  covering  sergeants  step  into  the 
rank  of  file  closers,  now  in  front;  and  the  captains  take  their 
places  in  the  third  rank. 

A  direction  is  given  to  the  ensign  by  the  same  means  as 
in  the  march  to  the  front;  and  the  lieutenant  colonel  will  com- 
mand, 

•  Because  the  companies  are  to  dress  to  the  centre:  and  it  is  a  general 
rtile  that  they  dress  toward  that  point  the  word  comes  troni. 


87 

2  Battalion,  forward. 

The  ensign  and  two  corporals  take  six  paces  forward,  and 
are  replaced  by  the  second  rank  of  the  colour  guard;  the  ge- 
neral guides  of  the  battalion  step  forward  in  like  manner. 

3  March. 

The  whole  move,  the  ensign  directing  his  march  by  points 
on  the  ground.  The  major  corrects  the  line  of  file  closers. 
The  lieutenant  colonel  and  the  adjutant  will  perform  the  same 
duties  as  when  advancing. 


Article  VII. 

To  halt  the  Battalion  marching  in  Retreat^  and  face  it  to 
the  Front. 

The  commander  will  order, 

1  Battalion, 

2  Halt. 

3  Rightabout — face. 

The  whole  face  about;  and  the  ensign,  colour  guard,  cap- 
tains of  companies,  and  covering  sergeants,  regain  their  pro- 
per places  in  the  line. 

If  necessary,  the  line  will  be  correctly  dressed,  as  prescri- 
bed in  the  direction  for  halting  a  battalion  marching  in  line  to 
the  front. 


Article  VIII. 

To  March  in  Line  by  a  Flank. 

The  battalion  being  in  line  and  halted,  the  lieutenant  colo- 
nel will  command, 

1  Battalion,  by  the  right  flank. 

2  To  the  right  face. 

3  Toward. 

4  March. 

The  captains  in  facing  will  place  themselves  one  pace  out 
of  the  first  rank,  so  as  to  march  on  the  left  of  the  covering 
sergeants,  who  will  conduct  the  first  rank. 

The  battalion  at  the  word  "  march,"  steps  off  briskly,  or- 


88 

ditiary  time,  heads  erect,  the  file  closers  marching  in  their 
places  in  line. 

The  major  marches  even  with  the  first  file,  the  adjutant 
even  with  the  colours,  each  six  paces  from  the  first  rank. 
They  give  the  step  to  the  battalion. 

The  lieutenant  colonel  will  command, 

1  By  files,  to  the  left  wheel. 

2  March. 

The  files  will  wheel  in  succession  on  the  same  ground,  the 
pivot  man  making  a  small  circle,  and  shortening  the  step. 

When  the  battalion  marches  by  files  to  the  left  flank,  the 
captains  will  not  go  to  the  Ittft  of  their  companies;  the  ser- 
geant and  corporal  on  the  left  of  the  battalion  will  conduct  it. 


Article  IX. 
To  form  the  Battalion  marching'  by  a  Flank^  into  Line  by  File. 

If  the  battalion  is  marching  by  the  left  flank,  the  lieute- 
nant colonel  having  fixed  on  the  direction  of  the  line,  will  di- 
rect the  major  to  place  two  markers  with  bannerols,  distant 
from  each  other  near  the  extent  of  a  company,  one  of  them 
placed  where  the  left  will  rest,  and  both  presenting  the  left 
shoulder  to  the  battalion  as  it  forms  in  line. 

When  the  leading  flank  has  arrived  near  to  the  first  marker, 
the  lieutenant  colonel  will  command, 

1  To  the  left  by  file,  form  in  line. 

2  Captains  to  your  leading  files. 

3  March. 

At  the  second  command,  each  captain  will  quickly  place 
himself  beside  the  front  rank  man  of  his  left  file. 

At  the  word  "  march,"  the  sergeant  who  leads  the  left  will 
turn  to  the  left,  and  place  his  breast  against  the  left  arm  of 
the  marker  who  is  fixed  on  the  line;  the  battalion  will  form 
on  the  line  by  files,  according  to  the  instruction  given  in  the 
drill  of  the  company;  and  each  captain  will  post  himself  on  the 
line,  on  the  left  of  the  left  front  rank  man  of  his  company-. 

The  right  guide  of  each  company,  except  that  on  the  left, 
will  place  himself  on  the  line  in  the  direction  of  the  markers, 
opposite  the  right  file  of  his  company,  at  the  moment  when 
that  file  arrives  in  line. 


89 

When  the  formation  is  completed,  the  lieutenant  colonel 
will  command, 

Guides  to  your  posts. 

The  markers  will  retire,  and  the  captains  and  guides  will 
take  their  places  in  line. 

The  line  will  be  formed  to  the  right  by  inverse  means. 

Article  X. 

Passage  of  Lines. 

3Iove7nent  ofthejirst  Line  in  Retreat. 

A  battalion  of  the  first  line  marching  in  retreat,  when  ar- 
rived within  twenty  paces  of  the  second  line,  the  lieutenant 
colonel  without  halting  commands, 

1  Battalion,  by  the  left  flank. 

2  By  company,  by  file  to  the  right. 

3  March. 

At  the  word  "  march,"  the  battalion  faces  to  the  left  in 
marching,  the  leading  file  of  each  company  disengages  and 
wheels  to  the  right;  the  rank  of  the  colours  by  the  left  flank 
fall  into  their  places  as  part  of  the  fourth  company;  the  co- 
vering sergeant  leads  the  company,  the  captain  marches  be- 
side him  towards  the  corresponding  opening  in  the  second 
line.  The  distances  between  the  companies  are  to  be  correctly 
preserved.  The  battalion  having  passed  the  second  line  one 
hundred  paces,  the  lieutenant  colonel  will  command, 

1  Battalion. 

2  Halt. 

3  Front. 

4  Left  DRESS. 

5  Left  in  line  wheel. 

6  March. 

At  the  second  command,  to  be  repeated  by  every  captain, 
the  whole  halt. 

At  the  third  command,  each  captain  will  come  to  the  cen- 
tre in  front  of  his  company. 

At  the  fourth  command,  which  will  not  be  given  until  the 
guides  are  correctly  established,  the  companies  will  dress  by 
their  respective  guides;  and  at  the  fifth,  the  left  front  rank 
man  of  each  company  faces  to  the  left,  touching  with  his 

M 


90 

breast  the  guide's  right  arm.  The  wheel  is  made  as  prescri- 
bed in  forming-  line  to  the  left. 

On  passing  the  line,  the  lieutenant  colonel  will  give  the 
captain  of  the  first  company  an  object  to  direct  his  march. 
The  captains  will  dress  by  the  left,  on  the  first  company,  and 
preserve  the  distances,  to  which  the  major  and  adjutant 
will  attend. 

Movement  of  the  Second  Line  m  passing  Lines. 
The  lieutenant  colonel  of  the  second  line  will  command, 

1  Double  platoons. 

2  Second  platoons,  by  the  right  flank. 

3  To  the  right  face. 

4  March. 

At  the  first  command,  the  captains  will  quickly  place  them- 
selves before  the  centres  of  their  companies.  At  the  second, 
they  instruct  the  first  platoon  that  it  is  to  stand  fast,  and  the 
second  that  it  is  to  face  to  the  right.  At  the  third,  the  second 
platoon  of  each  company  faces  to  the  right,  and  the  captains 
disengagf  the  first  file  to  the  rear.  At  the  word  "  march," 
the  second  platoon  doubles  behind  the  first  at  one  pace  dis- 
tance from  the  rear  rank,  and  its  officer  will  command, 

1  Platoon. 

2  Halt. 

3  Front. 

4  Left  DRESS. 

5  Steady. 

At  the  last  command,  the  officers  and  sergeants  place  them- 
selves so  that  there  will  be  two  on  the  flank  of  each  platoon, 
and  four  as  file  closers  in  rear  of  the  second  platoon,  thus;  the 
captain  on  the  right  of  the  front  rank  of  the  first,  the  covering 
sergeant  on  the  right  of  the  rear  rank  of  the  second,  the  se- 
cond lieutenant  on  the  left  of  the  front  rank  of  the  first,  the 
second  sergeant  on  the  left  of  the  rear  rank  of  the  second, 
and  the  first  lieutenant,  ensign,  and  the  two  other  sergeants, 
as  file  closers  behind  the  second  platoon. 

When  the  battalion  of  the  first  line  has  passed,  the  lieu- 
tenant colonel  of  the  battalion  of  the  second  line  will  com- 
mand, 

1  Form  the  line.  i 

2  Second  platoons,  by  the  left  flank. 


91 

3  To  the  left  face. 

4  March. 

As  soon  as  the  second  platoons  are  unmasked,  the  officers 
who  command  them  will  respectively  order, 

1  Platoon. 

2  Halt. 

3  Front. 

4  Right  DRESS. 

5  Steady. 

The  file  closers  will  regain  their  places  in  line. 

By  this  manoeuvre  a  line  exhausted  may  be  replaced  by 
fresh  troops. 

The  battalion  of  the  second  line  will  advance  in  line,  and 
the  lieutenant  colonel,  in  sufficient  time,  will  command, 

1  Double  platoons. 

2  Second  platoons,  march. 

At  the  second  word  of  command,  the  second  platoon  of 
each  company  will  mark  time,  and  as  soon  as  the  first  has 
cleared  its  flank,  shall  oblique  to  the  right  and  double  behind 
the  first.  The  officer  commanding  the  second  platoon  will 
give  the  orders  to  mark  time,  and  oblique,  from  the  rear. 
The  officers  and  sergeants  will  arrange  themselves  on  the 
flanks  of  the  platoons,  as  has  been  prescribed. 

The  ensign  will  incline  to  the  right,  so  that  the  second  lieu- 
tenant on  the  left  of  the  second  platoon,  of  the  fourth  com- 
pany will  follow  in  his  steps.  The  centre  and  rear  ranks  of 
the  colour  guard  double  with  this  platoon. 

The  lieutenant  colonel  of  the  battalion  of  the  first  line, 
seeing  the  second  within  twenty  paces,  will  command, 

1  Battalion,  by  the  right  flank. 

2  To  the  right  face. 

3  By  company,  by  file  to  the  right. 

4  March. 

The  battalion  of  the  first  line  will  file  through  the  inter- 
vals of  the  second,  halting  at  a  hundred  paces  in  its  rear, 
and  wheeling  into  line,  as  has  been  explained. 

As  soon  as  the  first  line  has  passed,  the  lieutenant  colonel 
of  the  second  line  will  command, 

1  Form  the  line. 

3  Second  platoons,  march. 


92 

At  the  word  "  march,"  the  second  platoons  oblique  to  the 
left,  the  officers  and  sergeants  resume  their  places  in  the 
line,  the  first  platoons  march  forward,  and  as  soon  as  the 
second  platoons  are  uncovered,  the  officer  commanding  each 
will  command, 

1  Forward. 

2  Quick  time, 'march. 

The  second  platoons  resume  their  places  in  the  line,  dress, 
and  take  the  step. 

The  passage  might  be  effected  by  filing  from  the  left  of 
companies,  in  which  case  the  captains  leading  the  retiring 
companies  would  dress  by  the  right,  on  the  eighth  company. 


Article  XI. 

To  change  Front, 

The  battalion  being  in  line,  and  the  lieutenant  colonel  de- 
siring to  change  front  on  the  right  flank,  by  throwing  for- 
ward the  left  flank,  he  will  cause  the  major  to  place  two 
markers  with  bannerols  on  the  proposed  direction,  in  the 
manner  which  has  been  explained,  presenting  the  right 
shoulder  to  the  first  company.  This  being  done,  the  lieu- 
tenant colonel  will  command, 

1  Change  front  forward  on  the  right  flank. 

2  By  company  half  wheel  to  the  right. 

3  March. 

4  Forward. 

5  March. 

6  Guide  to  the  right. 

At  the  second  command,  the  captains  place  themselves 
before  the  centres  of  their  companies. 

At  the  third  command,  the  companies  will  wheel  on  a 
halted  pivot;  when  sufficiently  advanced,  the  captains  will 
order  "  mark  time,"  unless  the  fourth  command  has  been 
given  by  the  lieutenant  colonel.  The  right  company  forms 
on  the  markers. 

At  the  fifth  command,  the  companies  march  straight  for- 
ward. At  the  sixth  command,  they  preserve  the  touch  with 
the  right  elbow.  The  right  guide  will  march  in  the  steps  of 
that  file  of  the  next  company  to  the  right,  that  he  observes 


immediately  before  him,  until  that  company  turns  to  the 
right,  when  he  will  march  straight  forward. 

When  the  right  of  the  second  company  has  arrived  at  the 
left  of  the  first,  the  captain  will  command, 

1  Turn  to  the  right. 

2  March. 

The  company  wheels  by  echellon  of  files;  it  will  be  halted 
two  paces  from  the  line,  and  dressed  by  the  words  of  com- 
mand often  prescribed. 

All  the  other  companies  form  in  line  in  the  same  manner; 
which  being  completed,  the  lieutenant  colonel  will  command, 

Guides  to  your  posts. 

In  order  to  change  the  front  on  the  right  flank,  by 
throwing  the  left  to  the  rear,  the  lieutenant  colonel  will  cause 
two  markers  to  be  placed,  one  of  them  before  the  outside 
file  of  the  right  flank,  the  other  at  twenty  paces  to  the  right  of 
that  flank,  on  the  new  direction. 

The  lieutenant  colonel  will  then  command, 

1  Change  front  to  the  rear  on  the  right  flank. 

2  Battalion,  to  the  right  about — face. 

3  By  company,  half  wheel  to  the  left. 

4  March. 

5  Forward. 

6  March. 

7  Guide  to  the  left. 

At  the  second  word  of  command,  the  companies  face  about. 
At  the  third,  the  captains  place  themselves  before  the  centre 
of  the  rear  rank  of  their  companies,  now  in  front.  At  the 
fourth,  the  companies  wheel  as  ordered.  At  the  sixth,  thcv 
march  forward.  At  the  seventh,  they  preserve  the  touch  witfi 
the  left  elbow;  the  guide  pursues  the  file  immediately  before 
him. 

The  first  company  wheels  a  little  past  the  new  direction 
and  faces  about.  At  the  word  "  face,"  its  guides  place  them- 
selves on  the  new  direction,  their  right  sides  to  the  company, 
and  dressing  by  the  two  markers;  the  company  dresses  on 
its  guides. 

The  second  company  turns  to  the  left  by  echellon  of  files, 
passes  the  line  a  few  paces,  comes  to  the  right  about,  and 
dresses  by  its  guides,  who  place  themselves  in  line  with  the 


94 

markers,  and  the  guides  of  tht:  first  company.  All  the  othei' 
companies  will  form  on  the  line  in  the  same  manner. 

The  formation  being  completed,  the  lieutenant  colonel  will 
command, 

Guides  to  your  posts. 

The  battalion  will  change  front  forward,  or  to  the  rear,  on 
the  left  flank,  on  the  same  principles. 

The  battalion  may  change  front  on  any  central  company, 
so  as  to  take  any  direction  whatever,  one  wing  being  thrown 
forward,  the  other  to  the  rear,  according  to  the  principles 
which  have  been  explained. 

Suppose  the  fifth  company  is  selected  as  that  on  which  the 
change  of  front  is  to  be  executed,  and  that  the  left  wing  is  to 
be  thrown  forward;  the  lieutenant  colonel  will  order  the  ad- 
jutant to  place  two  markers  on  the  new  direction,  in  front  ot 
the  fifth  company,  one  of  them  before  its  right  file,  the  other 
at  company  distance  from  him.  The  lieutenant  colonel  will 
command, 

1  Change  front  on  the  fifth  company,  the  left  wing  thrown 

forward. 

2  Company,  on  the  right,  right  about — face. 

3  By  company,  half  wheel  to  the  right. 

4  March. 

5  Forward. 

6  March. 

7  Guide  to  the  right. 

At  the  second  command,  all  the  companies  to  the  right  of 
the  fifth,  face  to  the  right  about.  At  the  fourth  they  wheel, 
and  the  fifth  company  forms  upon  the  markers.  At  the  sixth, 
the  other  companies  proceed  and  execute  the  movement  ac- 
cording to  the  principles  laid  down.  The  major  will  dress 
the  guides  of  the  right  wing,  the  adjutant  those  of  the  left. 

The  companies  will  wheel  about  half  the  angle  made  by 
the  new  and  old  lines. 

Article  XII. 

To  pass  a  Defile  in  Retreat^  by  the  Right  or  Left  Wing. 

The  lieutenant  colonel  will  suppose  a  defile  in  rear  of  the 
left  wing,  and  command, 

In  rear,  by  the  right  wing,  pass  the  defile. 


i 


9S 

The  captain  of  the  first  company  will  command, 

1  First  company. 

2  By  the  right  flank. 

3  To  the  right  face. 

4  March. 

The  first  file  will  wheel  to  the  right,  march  to  the  rear 
lour  paces  beyond  the  file  closers,  wheel  again  to  the  right, 
and  direct  itself  along  the  rear;  the  other  files  of  this  com- 
pany will  wheel  on  the  same  ground.  The  other  companies 
will  wheel  each  by  comitiand  of  its  captain  on  the  ground 
occupied  by  its  right  hand  file,  as  the  last  of  the  preceding 
company  passes  it. 

The  leading  company  when  arrived  at  the  left,  will  wheel 
to  the  right  to  enter  the  defile.  All  the  others  will  wheel  on 
the  same  ground.  Oncoming  out  of  the  defile,  the  captain  oi 
the  first  company  will  command, 

1  Form  company. 

2  March. 

The  covering  sergeant  marches  straight  forward.  The 
men  advance  the  right  shoulder,  take  the  quick  step,  and 
come  into  line  one  at  a  time,  without  running.  The  captain 
then  commands. 

Guide  to  the  left.  ' 

and  steps  before  the  centre  of  the  company,  taking  the  step. 
The  other  companies  form  in  the  same  manner. 

A  defile  in  rear  of  the  right  wing,  would  be  passed  from 
the  left,  by  similar  principles.  The  captains  would  conduct 
the  leading  files. 

Article  XIII. 

To  form  the  Column  of  Attack. 

This  movement  consists  in  forming  a  double  column  in 
rear  of  the  two  centre  companies. 

The  lieutenant  colonel  will  command, 

1  Form  Column  of  attack. 

2  By  company,  on  the  centre  in  column. 

3  Battalion,  right  and  left  face. 

4  Quick  time,  March. 


96 

At  the  second  command,  all  the  captains  except  those  of 
the  fourth  and  fifth  companies  will  place  themselves  before 
the  centre  of  their  respective  companies,  and  caution  them 
which  way  to  face.  They  will  face  to  the  centre.  The  cap- 
tains of  the  fourth  and  fifth  w^ill  not  move. 

At  the  third  command,  the  companies,  except  the  fourth 
and  fifth,  will  face;  those  on  the  left  to  the  right,  those  on  the 
right  to  the  left.  The  captains  of  companies,  will  disengage 
the  three  files  next  the  centre  to  the  rear.  The  right  guide  of 
each  left  company,  and  the  left  guide  of  each  right  company, 
vill  place  himself  before  the  front  rank  man  of  the  leading 
file.  The  captains  of  companies  will  place  themselves  beside 
the  guides,  to  conduct  them. 

At  the  word  "  march,"  the  movement  will  commence.  The 
captain  of  the  fifth  company  will  step  quickly  to  its  left  flank. 
The  captain  of  the  fourth  will  not  move.  Those  two  compa- 
nies stand  fast;  the  others  move  oflFin  quick  time,  and  place 
themselves  at  the  distance  of  platoon,  or  half  distance,  so  that 
the  fourth,  third,  second,  and  first  companies,  form  the  right 
half  of  the  column,  and  the  fifth,  sixth,  seventh,  and  eighth 
companies,  the  left  half.  The  corresponding  companies  will 
unite  into  one  division  in  column.  Each  captain  of  a  com- 
pany will  command, 

1  Company. 

2  Halt. 

3  Front. 

4  Left  (or  right)  dress. 

5  Steady. 

They  will  dress  to  the  centre,  from  whence  the  command 
comes. 

The  captains  having  dressed  their  companies,  will  place 
themselves  on  the  outward  flanks;  the  two  corresponding 
companies  form  one  line,  the  centre  of  which  is  marked  by 
the  right  guide  of  the  left  company,  who  will  cover  exactly 
the  guide  in  the  centre  of  the  division  before  him. 

If  there  be  with  the  battalion  a  grenadier  or  light  company, 
and  one  only,  it  will  form  at  half  distance  in  the  rear,  its 
centre  opposite  to  the  centre  of  the  division. 

The  music  will  form  in  the  rear. 

To  display  the  Column  of  Attack. 

The  lieutenant  colonel  will  cause  two  markers  to  be  placed 
before  the  outward  flank  files  of  the  two  companies  at  the 
head  of  the  column,  and  will  command, 


97 

1  Display  the  column. 

2  Battalion,  right  and  left  face. 

3  March. 

At  the  word  march,  the  column  displays  on  the  two  leading- 
companies  which  stand  fast,  according  to  the  principles  laid 
down  for  displaying  of  close  columns.  The  captain  of  the  fifth 
company  will  come  to  its  right.  The  captain  of  the  fourth 
will  step  back  to  the  second  rank,  until  the  captain  of  the 
third  dresses  his  company. 

The  displaying  having  been  completed,  the  lieutenant 
colonel  will  order, 

Guides  to  your  posts. 

The  lieutenant  colonel  may  give  orders  for  firing  by  files 
while  the  column  is  displaying.  In  that  case,  the  captains  of 
the  fourth  and  fifth  would  commence  giving  the  words  of 
command  for  this  kind  of  firing,  on  hearing  the  word 
*'  steady"  given  to  the  third  and  sixth  companies;  and  these 
last  would  commence  giving  the  words  of  command  for  the 
fire,  on  hearing  the  word  "  steady"  given  to  the  second  and 
seventh  companies;  and  so  of  the  rest. 

Article  XIV.  ' 
Of  Rallying'  when  Dispersed. 

The  battalion  being  in  line,  the  lieutenant  colonel  will 
order  a  signal  to  disperse  to  be  beat;  and  the  soldiers  will 
break  oflF,  and  scatter  themselves. 

When  the  lieutenant  colonel  wishes  the  battalion  to  reas- 
semble, he  will  place  the  ensign  with  the  colours,  and  two 
markers,  at  near  company  distance,  on  the  line  he  intends 
the  battalion  to  form  on;  and  will  order  the  assembly  to  be 
beat.  Each  captain  will  assemble  and  form  his  company  four 
paces  in  the  rear  of  its  place  in  the  line. 

The  colonel  will  establish  the  company  of  the  colours  on 
the  line  by  the  markers,  and  command, 

On  the  centre,  dress. 

Each  company  will  advance  by  command  of  its  captain, 
its  guide  most  distant  from  the  centre  placing  himself  on 
the  line,  and  be  dressed  according  to  the  manner  heretofore 
prescribed,  the  captains  of  the  companies  on  the  right 
coming  to  the  left  flank  to  dress  them. 

N 


98 

The  line  being  formed,  the  lieutenant  colonel  will  com- 
mand, 

Guides  to  your  posts. 

END  OF  THE  BATTALION  DRILL. 


SECTION  V. 

Evolutions  of  the  Brigade, 

The  drill  of  the  battalion  having  explained  all  the  evolu- 
tions that  a  single  battalion  can  be  required  to  execute,  in  any 
situation,  it  remains  to  apply  these  principles  to  aline  of  se- 
veral battalions. 

In  these  instructions  we  will  suppose  a  brigade  of  four  bat- 
talions; but  the  rules  prescribed  will  be  equally  applicable  to 
a  regiment,  or  to  a  greater  number  of  battalions. 

When  several  brigades  are  to  exercise  in  line,  the  battal- 
ions will  be  distinguished  by  numbers  according  to  their 
places  in  the  line.  The  battalion  on  the  right  will  be  called 
the  first,  the  next  to  it  the  second,  the  next  the  third,  and 
so  on  to  the  left  of  the  line. 

Places  of  the  Commander  in  Chief  of  Brigadier  Generals , 
and  of  Colonels^  in  Line. 

In  line,  the  commander  in  chief  has  no  fixed  situation  as- 
signed to  him;  he  will  go  wherever  his  presence  is  necessary. 
In  column,  he  will  be  at  its  head  to  direct  it. 

In  the  evolutions,  he  will  be  where  he  can  best  superintend 
and  direct  the  general  movements.  Nevertheless,  he  may  be 
wherever  else  he  judges  his  presence  necessary,  having  his 
place  supplied  by  one  who  is  charged  with  his  orders. 

In  line  of  several  brigades,  the  brigadier  generals  will  place 
themselves  fifty  paces  in  the  rear  of  the  centres  of  their  bri- 
gades. In  column,  they  will  place  themselves  upon  the  direct- 
ing flank,  about  twelve  paces  from  the  line  of  guides. 

The  brigadier  generals,  and  colonels,  in  line,  in  column, 
and  in  going  through  the  various  movements,  will  superin- 
tend the  execution  of  all  that  is  commanded.  For  this  pur- 
pose they  may  go  wherever  their  presence  is  necessary, 
within  the  extent  of  their  brigades  or  regiments. 


99 


Central  Rules  for  the  Words  of  Command. 

When  all  the  battalions  in  line  are  to  execute  the  same 
movement,  the  commander  in  chief  will  give  to  the  battalion 
nearest  him,  the  general  commands  relative  to  the  movement, 
which  will  be  immediately  repeated  by  the  lieutenant  colonel 
of  that  battalion. 

Each  lieutenant  colonel  will  repeat,  as  quick  as  possible, 
all  the  general  commands  which  he  may  hear  given  to  the 
next  battalion  on  his  right  or  left,  according  to  the  side  from 
whence  the  word  of  command  comes;  unless  the  commander 
in  chief  has  ordered  otherwise. 

The  lieutenant  colonels  having  repeated  the  general  com- 
mand as  directed,  will  then  command  and  cause  to  be  exe- 
cuted the  preparatory  movements  in  their  battalions,  which 
are  to  precede  the  general  movement. 

When  the  extent  of  front,  or  noise,  prevents  the  words  of 
command  from  being  easily  heard  from  one  battalion  to  an- 
other, the  majors  and  adjutants  will  repeat  them. 

When  a  lieutenant  colonel  shall  see  the  next  battalion  exe- 
cuting a  movement,  the  word  of  command  for  which  he  has 
not  heard,  he  will  cause  his  battalion  to  execute  the  same 
movement. 

When  the  line  is  to  execute  a  central  movement,  the  com- 
mander in  chief  will  repair  to  the  spot  he  has  chosen  as  the 
centre  on  which  the  movement  is  to  take  place;  and  he  will 
give  or  send  to  the  lieutenant  colonel  of  each  of  the  nearest 
battalions  on  the  right  and  left,  an  order  to  give  the  general 
word  of  command  for  the  movement  which  each  part  of 
the  line  is  to  execute. 

In  column,  the  same  rules  for  the  repetition  of  the  words 
©f  command,  will  be  observed. 

Whenever  a  line  breaks  into  several  columns,  the  senior 
officer  in  rank  of  each  will  command  it,  and  fulfil,  with  re- 
gard to  the  column,  the  duties  of  commander  in  chief. 

For7nation  of  a  Regiment  in  Line  before  its  ^carters. 

When  a  regiment  is  to  form  in  line  in  front  of  its  quarters, 
the  colonel  will  order  the  fourth  company  of  one  of  the  bat- 
talions forward,  establish  it  on  the  direction  of  the  line,  and 
place  two  markers  with  bannerols  close  to  its  front,  and  fa- 
cing each  other.  He  will  then  direct  the  lieutenant  colonel 
of  the  other  battalion  to  establish  the  fourth  company  ©f 
his  battalion  upon  the  same  direction. 


100 

These  two  companies  being  formed,  at  the  distance  of  a 
battalion  and  an  interval  of  twenty  four  paces,  the  colonel 
will  direct  a  short  roll  to  be  beat,  which  being  done,  the 
companies  of  each  battalion  will,  by  command  of  their  res- 
pective captains,  move  up  successively  on  the  line  of  the 
fourth  company  of  their  respective  battalions.  The  lieuten- 
ant colonels  will  see  that  the  company  guides  of  each  batta- 
lion place  themselves  exactly  on  the  same  line. 

The  battalions  being  formed,  if  the  regiment  is  to  ma- 
ncEUvre,  the  colonel  will  order  the  adjutants  to  tell  off  the 
battalions,  which  will  be  quickly  done,  beginning  on  the 
right  of  each. 

The  corporals  who  are  to  form  the  guard  of  the  colours  of 
each  battalion,  will  fall  in  on  the  left  of  the  fourth  company, 
which  on  this  account  is  to  have  three  files  of  men  less  than 
the  other  companies. 

Fonnation  and  Order  of  March  of  the  Escort  of  the  Colours, 

When  the  regiment  parades  under  arms,  if  the  colours 
are  required,  one  of  the  flank  companies,  or,  if  they  are  de- 
tached, a  battalion  company  will  march  to  escort  the  colours, 
in  the  following  order. 

The  drum  major,  the  music  of  the  battalion  which  fur- 
nishes the  detachment,  followed  by  the  band  of  the  regi- 
ment; the  detachment  in  column  of  platoons,  with  supported 
arms;  the  two  ensigns  appointed  to  carry  the  colours,  to- 
gether, side  by  side,  between  the  two  platoons. 

The  detachment  will  march  in  this  order,  without  beat  of 
drum,  or  music.  On  arriving  in  front  of  the  commanding 
officer's  quarters,  the  platoons  will  wheel  into  line,  the  mu- 
sicians and  band  formed  on  the  right.  The  two  ensigns,  ac- 
companied by  the  lieutenant  and  a  sergeant,  will  proceed 
to  receive  the  colours. 

When  the  ensigns,  followed  by  the  lieutenant  and  ser- 
geant, bring  out  the  colours,  the  detachment  by  command 
of  its  officer  will  present  arms;  the  ensigns  will  halt;  the 
drums  will  beat  the  troops  accompanied  by  the  band. 

The  officer  will  cause  the  music  to  cease;  order  his  party 
to  shoulder  arms,  and  wheel  into  platoons;  the  ensigns 
carrying  the  colours,  will  place  themselves,  side  by  side,  be- 
tween the  platoons;  and  the  lieutenant  and  sergeant  will  re- 
sume their  places.  The  party  will  then  march  to  the  ground 
where  the  regiment  is  assembled,  with  drums  beating,  and 
music  playing. 


101 

Honours  paid  to  the  Colours. 

A\'hen  the  colours  arrive,  the  colonel  will  order  arms  to 
be  shouldered;  the  drums  and  music  will  cease;  the  party  in 
quick  time  will  resume  their  places  in  line,  passing  lor  that 
purpose  in  rear  of  the  regiment.  The  lieutenant  colonels  will 
place  themselves  respectively  six  paces  before  the  centres  of 
their  battalions. 

The  ensigns  will  march  in  quick  time,  side  by  side,  at  the 
distance  of  ten  paces  before  the  front,  and  each  will  halt  op- 
posite to  the  centre  of  his  battalion,  facing  to  it.  The  lieuten- 
ant colonel  will  order  arms  to  be  presented,  and  salute  with 
his  sword.  The  ensigns  will  immediately  take  their  posts  in 
the  line,  and  the  lieutenant  colonels  will  order  arms  to  be 
shouldered. 

The  colours  will  be  escorted  back  to  the  quarters  of  the 
colonel,  in  the  same  order. 


PART  I. 

Article  I. 
To  open  the  Ranks. 
The  brigadier  general  will  give  this  command, 

1  The  rear  ranks  will  take  open  order. 

This  word  of  command  having  been  repeated,  the  lieuten- 
ant colonels  will  command  their  respective  battalions, 

Rear  ranks,  take  distance. 

The  preparatory  movements  will  be  made  as  prescribed  in 
the  drill  of  battalion.  The  brigadier  general  will  command, 

2  March. 

This  command  being  quickly  repeated  by  each  lieutenant 
colonel,  the  centre  and  rear  ranks  of  each  battalion  step  back, 
and  take  open  order,  according  to  the  directions  given  in  the 
drill  of  battalion. 

Each  battalion  executes  this  movement  as  if  it  were  by  it- 
self, and  the  centre  and  rear  ranks  of  one  battalion  need  not 
dress  by  those  of  another. 


102 

Article  II. 

31anual  Exercise, 

The  manual  exercise  is  not  to  be  gone  through  in  line,  it 
there  be  more  than  one  battalion. 


Article  III. 
Loading  and  Firings. 

Loading  at  will,  or  in  the  quickest  time,  is  the  only  mode 
practised  in  line. 

The  brigadier  general  having  closed  the  ranks,  will  com- 
mand, 

1  The  line  will  load  arms. 

This  command  having  been  repeated,  the  brigadier  gene- 
ral will  order, 

2  Prime  and  load. 

This  command  will  be  repeated,  and  executed  as  has  been 
directed  in  the  drill  of  battalion. 

The  brigadier  general,  to  cause  the  line  to  fire  by  battalion 
at  the  halt,  will  command, 

1  The  line  will  fire  by  battalion. 

This  order  having  been  repeated,  he  will  command, 

2  Commence  firing. 

The  odd  numbered  battalions,  or  right  battalions  of  each 
regiment,  will  begin  the  firing  by  battalion.  The  lieutenant 
colonel  of  each  of  these  battalions  having  repeated  the  com- 
mand "  commence  Jiring^^''  will  immediately  give  the  com- 
mands prescribed  in  the  drill  of  battalion  for  the  execution  of 
this  fire. 

The  lieutenant  colonels  of  the  even  numbered,  or  left  hand 
battalions,  will  not  give  their  first  word  of  command  until 
they  perceive  that  some  firelocks  in  the  odd  numbered  bat- 
talion next  on  the  right,  are  shouldered.  The  lieutenant  co- 
lonels of  the  odd  nuKibered  or  right  hand  battalions,  will  in 
turn  observe  the  same  rule  with  regard  to  the  even  number- 
ed battalion  next  on  the  left.  And  thus  the  fire  will  continue 
alternately. 


103 

The  fire  by  wings  will  be  executed  in  each  battalion  as  has 
been  directed  in  the  drill  of  battalion:  each  lieutenant  colonel 
having  repeated  the  command,  "  commence  firing,"  will  im- 
mediately after,  without  regarding  any  other  battalion,  give 
the  commands  prescribed  for  the  execution  of  this  fire. 

The  fire  bv  companies  will  be  executed  as  prescribed  in 
the  drill  of  battalion,  the  captains  of  the  odd  numbered  com- 
panies giving  their  first  word  of  command  immediately  upon 
the  lieutenant  colonel  having  given  the  command,  "com- 
mence firing." 

The  fire  by  files  will  be  thus  executed.  The  brigadier 
general  will  command, 

1  Fire  by  files. 

This  having  been  repeated,  the  lieutenant  colonels  will 
order, 

1  Battalion. 

2  Ready. 

The  brigadier  general  will  then  command, 

2  Commence  firing. 

The  lieutenant  colonels  will  repeat  this  command;  and  the 
fire  by  files  will  commence  and  be  executed  as  prescribed  in 
the  drill  of  battalion. 

The  brigadier  general  will  cause  the  firing  to  cease  by  a 
ruffle  or  short  roll  of  the  drum;  which  will  be  instantly  re- 
peated by  the  drums  of  each  battalion,  as  soon  as  it  is  heard 
from  the  orderly  drum. 

So  soon  as  the  arms  of  a  battalion  are  loaded,  the  lieutenr 
ant  colonel  will  order  "  the  tap  of  the  drumstick,"  as  a  signal 
for  the  captains  and  their  covering  sergeants  to  take  their 
places  in  line. 

To  fire  to  the  rear,  the  brigadier  general  will  command, 

The  line  will  fire  to  the  rear. 

This  command  having  been  repeated,  each  lieutenant  co- 
lonel will  command, 

1  Battalion. 

2  Rightabout — face. 

The  brigadier  general  will  then  command  the  various 
firings,  which  will  be  executed  as  has  been  prescribed. 


104 

The  brigadier  general  having  caused  the  firing  to  cease, 
will  command, 

The  line  will  face  to  the  front. 

This  command  having  been  repeated,  each  lieutenant 
colonel  will  command, 

1  Battalion. 

2  Right  about — face. 

The  brigadier  general,  to  allow  the  troops  to  stand  at  ease, 
will  order, 

1  The  line  will  rest. 

This  command  having  been  repeated,  he  will  command, 

2  Order,  arms. 

This  command  having  been  repeated  and  executed,  he  will 
command, 

3  Rest. 

This  order  will  be  executed  as  prescribed  in  the  drill  of 
battalion. 

The  brigadier  general  choosing  that  the  line  shall  give  at- 
tention, will  direct  a  short  roll  to  be  beat,  which  will  be  re- 
peated as  soon  as  heard  by  the  drummers  of  each  battalion. 

The  roll  ceasing,  each  lieutenant  colonel  will  command, 

Battalion. 

The  soldiers  will  take  the  erect  position  of  attention. 
The  brigadier  general  will  then  command, 

Shoulder,  arms. 

This  command  having  been  repeated,  the  line  will  shoulder 
arms. 


105 


PART  II. 

Various  Modes  of  fanning'  Column  from  the  Line. 

Article  I. 
Wheeling  by  Companies  to  the  Right  or  Left, 

The  brigadier  general  will  order, 

1  Form  column  of  companies  by  wheeling  to 

the  right. 

This  caution  having  been  repeated,  he  will  command, 

2  By  company,  to  the  right  wheel. 

This  command  having  been  repeated,  the  brigadier  general 
will  order, 

3  March. 

At  this  command,  quickly  repeated,  the  line  will  break 
into  open  column,  in  the  manner  prescribed  in  the  drill  of 
battalion. 

No  guide  is  to  move  after  the  word  "  steady"  has  been 
given  by  the  captain  of  his  company.  If  the  direction  or  dis- 
tance is  lost,  it  must  be  regained  on  the  march. 

If  the  brigadier  general  thinks  proper  to  form  the  line 
again  immediately,  he  will  correct  the  position  of  the  guides 
as  hereafter  prescribed,  under  the  article  "  to  halt  the  co- 
lumn." 

Article  II. 
To  form  the  Open  Column  by  filing  by  Companies  to  the  Rear, 

The  brigadier  general  will  command, 

1  Form  column  of  companies  the  right  in  front, 
by  filing  to  the  rear. 

Each  lieutenant  colonel  having  repeated  this  command, 
will  himself  give  the  following, 

O 


ia6 

1  Battalion,  by  the  right  flank. 

2  To  the  right  face. 

3  Companies,  by  files  to  the  right. 

The  brigadier  general  will  then  command, 

2  March. 

At  this  command,  quickly  repeated,  each  battalion  files 
into  open  column,  as  prescribed  in  the  drill  of  battalion. 


Article  III. 

To  break  into  Column  to  the  Rights  in  order  to  march  towards 

the  Left. 

The  brigadier  general  to  effect  this  will  order, 

The  line  will  break  into  column  by  the  right, 
to  march  towards  the  left. 

This  command  having  been  repeated,  the  lieutenant  colo- 
nel of  the  right  battalion  will  cause  the  movement  to  be  ex- 
ecuted, by  the  commands,  and  in  the  manner,  prescribed  in 
the  drill  of  battalion. 

The  lieutenant  colonel  of  each  other  battalion,  will,  in  his 
turn,  cause  the  movement  to  be  executed. 

The  company  on  the  rightof  each  battalion,  will  march  for- 
ward twice  the  distance  of  its  front,  while  the  other  compa- 
nies of  the  battalion  are  wheeling  to  the  right. 

The  lieutenant  colonels  will  judge  the  moment  when  they 
ought  to  break  their  respective  battalions,  and  march,  so  as 
to  leave  between  their  first  company,  and  the  last  of  the  pre- 
ceding battalion,  the  distance  of  a  company,  and  twenty  four 
paces. 

The  brigadier  general  will  break  the  line  into  column  by 
the  left,  in  order  to  march  towards  the  right,  upon  the  same 
principles. 

Article  IV. 
To  form  the  Close  Column  from  the  Line. 

It  is  supposed  that  from  the  line,  a  close  column  of  divi- 
sions is  to  be  formed,  with  the  right  in  front,  on  the  second 
division  of  the  second  battalion. 


107 

This  example  will  be  sufficient  for  every  other  case. 
The  brigadier  general  will  come  to  the  second  battalion,, 
and  order, 

1  Close  column  by  division. 

This  command  having  been  repeated,  he  will  send  an 
order  to  the  lieutenant  colonel  of  the  third  battalion,  to  give 
the  following  command,  which  will  be  repeated  by  the  lieu- 
tenant colonel  of  the  battalion  on  his  left: 

Upon  the  second  battalion,  to  the  rear,  in  column. 

The  brigadier  general  will  at  the  same  time  send  an  order 
to  the  lieutenant  colonel  of  the  first  battalion,  to  give  the  fol- 
lowing command: 

Upon  the  second  battalion,  to  the  front,  in  column. 

These  orders  having  been  given  to  the  commanders  of 
the  first  and  third  battalions,  the  brigadier  general  will  direct 
the  lieutenant  colonel  of  the  second,  to  command, 

On  the  second  division,  right  in  front,  in  column. 

The  lieutenant  colonel  of  the  second  battalion  having  given 
the  command,  will  immediately  give  these  following: 

1  Battalion,  by  the  right  and  left  flank. 

2  To  the  right  and  left  face. 

The  lieutenant  colonels  of  the  third  and  fourth  battalions, 
having  given  the  command  prescribed  to  be  given  by  them, 
will  proceed  to  give  these  which  follow: 

1  Battalion,  by  the  right  flank, 

2  To  the  right  face. 

The  three  right  files  of  each  division  of  those  two  bat- 
talions, will  disengage  to  the  rear. 

The  lieutenant  colonel  of  the  first  battalion  having  given 
the  command  prescribed  to  be  given  by  him,  will  proceed  to 
give  those  which  follow: 

1  Battalion,  by  the  left  flank. 

2  To  the  left  face. 

The  three  left  files  of  each  division  of  this  battalion,  will 
disengage  to  the  front. 


108 

The  lieutenant  colonels  having  given  those  several  words 
of  command,  the  brigadier  general  will  order, 

2  March. 

This  word  being  repeated,  the  second  battalion  will  form 
close  column  on  the  second  division,  as  has  been  directed  in 
the  drill  of  battalion. 

The  third  and  fourth  battalions  will  proceed  in  this  man- 
ner. The  first  division  of  each,  preceded  by  the  major,  will 
march  directly  to  the  place  it  is  to  occupy  in  the  column.  It 
will  march  with  a  step  of  one  foot,  until  the  other  divisions 
of  the  same  battalion  come  up  with  it,  when  it  will  take  the 
step  of  two  feet.  Each  of  those  battalions  formed  thus  into 
close  column,  will  march  by  flank  to  the  point  where  it  is  to 
enter  into  the  column.  Having  arrived  within  fifteen  paces 
of  this  point,  the  first  division  will  enter  squarely,  at  six  paces 
distance  from  the  rear  division  of  the  preceding  battalion. 
The  captains  commanding  divisions  will  stop  at  the  flank  of 
direction,  see  their  divisions  file  past  them,  and  halt,  front, 
and  dress  them,  as  prescribed  in  the  drill  of  battalion. 

The  first  battalion  will  proceed  in  a  similar  manner,  its 
fourth  division  entering  the  column  six  paces  in  front  of  the 
first  division  of  the  second  battalion.  The  left  guide  of  each 
division  of  this  battalion  having  arrived  nearly  as  far  as  the 
line  of  the  guides  of  the  divisions  already  formed  in  column, 
the  captain  will  halt,  front  and  dress  the  division  as  prescri- 
bed in  the  drill  of  battalion;  the  left  guides  facing  to  the  rear. 

The  lieutenant  colonels  will  see  that  the  battalions  march 
in  order,  the  divisions  three  paces  distant  from  each  other, 
dressing  by  that  division  which  is  first  to  enter  the  column; 
and  that  the  divisions  enter  parallel  to  those  already  in  co- 
lumn. 

The  majors  will  preserve  the  distances  between  the  bat- 
talions, and  place  the  guides  correctly. 

When  the  first  battalion  has  taken  its  place  in  column,  the 
lieutenant  colonel  will  command. 

Guides,  right  about — face. 

At  this  word,  the  left  guides  of  divisions,  who  had  faced 
to  the  rear,  will  face  to  the  front  of  the  column. 

A  close  column  with  the  left  in  front,  is  formed  on  similar 
principles. 

In  the  like  manner,  a  greater  number  of  battalions  maybe 
formed  in  close  column,  upon  any  division  and  battalion, 


109 


Observation  on  this  Movement. 

This  method  of  forming  a  close  column  from  the  line,  has 
the  advantages  of  maintaining  the  battalions  in  their  full 
strength,  each  forming  a  distinct  close  column,  during  the 
movement;  and  of  taking  up  the  least  possible  time;  as  each 
battalion  moves  by  the  shortest  line  to  its  place  in  the  column. 


PART  III. 

Article  I. 
To  march  in  Column  at  full  Distance. 

The  brigadier  general,  when  he  would  put  the  column  in 
march,  will  inform  the  lieutenant  colonel  of  the  leading  bat- 
talion what  direction  the  leading  guide  is  to  take,  and  the  lieu- 
tenant colonel  will  instruct  the  guide  in  the  means  by  which 
he  is  to  regulate  the  direction  of  his  march,  according  to  the 
principles  prescribed  in  the  drill  of  battalion. 

The  brigadier  general  will  then  command, 

1  Column,  forward. 

The  lieutenant  colonels  having  repeated  this  command 
will  order,  if  the  right  is  in  front, 

Guide  to  the  left. 

The  brigadier  general  will  then  order, 

2  March. 

At  this  command,  which  will  be  very  quickly  repeated  by 
the  lieutenant  colonels,  and  officers  commanding  subdivi- 
sions, the  column  will  maixh. 

The  guide  of  the  first  subdivision  will  march  on  the  direc- 
tion pointed  out  to  him,  by  the  means  prescribed  in  the  drill 
of  battalion,  and  the  following  guides  will  each  march  in  the 
steps  of  the  one  immediately  preceding,  without  attending  to 
the  general  direction. 

The  major  of  the  leading  battalion  will  observe  that  the 
leading  guide  does  not  deviate  from   the  line  he  ought  to 


ilO 

inarch  on,  and  the  major  of  each  following  battalion  will  ob- 
serve,  that  the  leading  guide  preserves  between  him  and  the 
preceding  battalion,  the  distance  of  a  company,  and  twenty 
four  paces  for  tlie  interval. 

When  the  column  is  to  march  along  a  given  line,  in  order 
to  form  on  it  by  wheeling  to  the  left,  the  brigadier  general 
will  cause  the  line  to  be  ascertained  by  mounted  officers,  by 
whom  the  general  guides  will  direct  themselves. 

Whether  the  column  arrives  before  or  behind  the  line,  the 
brigadier  general  will  send  forward  two  mounted  officers  to 
ascertain  two  intermediate  points,  between  the  distant  points 
of  direction,  which  he  has  selected  on  the  right  and  left.  One 
of  the  officers  will  post  himself  where  the  head  of  the  column 
is  to  enter  on  the  line,  and  the  column  will  so  wheel  as  to 
march  four  paces  in  the  rear  of  the  line  to  be  formed  on,  as 
prescribed  in  the  drill  of  battalion. 

The  manner  of  finding  two  intermediate  points,  between 
two  distant  and  conspicuous  objects,  has  been  explained 
in  the  drill  of  battalion. 


Article  II. 

Column  of  Route. 

The  column  being  halted,  if  the  brigadier  general  would 
have  it  to  march  by  the  route  step,  he  will  command, 

1  Column,  forward. 

The  lieutenant  colonels  will  repeat  the  command,  and 
order, 

Guide  to  the  right. 

The  brigadier  general  will  then  command, 

2  Route  step,  march. 

Which  the  lieutenant  colonels  and  officers  commanding 
subdivisions  will  repeat,  and  the  whole  will  move. 

If  when  the  column  is  marching  with  the  cadenced  step, 
the  brigadier  general  should  think  proper  to  take  the  route 
step,  he  will  command, 

Route  step,  march. 


Ill 

Which  will  be  repeated,  and  the  soldiers  will  march  and 
carry  their  arms  at  ease. 

When  a  column  of  many  battalions  meets  with  a  defile, 
which  requires  the  front  to  be  diminished,  it  will  be  execu- 
ted by  the  battalions  successively,  as  each  arrives  at  the  place 
where  the  diminution  becomes  necessary.  Thus  a  column  of 
companies  meeting  with  a  defile  which  can  only  admit  a  pla- 
toon, the  lieutenant  colonel  of  the  leading  battalion  will  form 
it  into  platoons  at  once,  when  the  column  is  close  to  the  de- 
file; hut  the  next  lieutenant  colonel  will  not  repeat  the  com- 
mand, until  his  own  battalion  shall  have  arrived  close  to  the 
defile. 


Article  III. 

Change  of  Direction  of  an  Open  Column  at  full  Distance  of 
Coynpanies. 

The  brigadier  general  will  give  an  order  to  the  lieutenant 
colonel  of  the  battalion  to  change  the  direction,  and  will 
place  an  aid-de-camp  on  the  spot  where  it  is  to  be  effected. 

The  change  of  direction  will  be  executed  as  directed  in 
the  drill  of  the  battalion. 

In  a  column  of  route,  the  change  of  direction  will  be  made 
by  an  order  from  the  officer  of  the  leading  company. 


Article  IV. 

Change  of  Direction  by  the  Prompt  3faneeuvre. 

The  column  marching  with  the  right  in  front,  the  briga- 
dier general  deeming  it  expedient  to  change  the  direction  by 
the  prompt  manoeuvre,  will  point  out  to  the  lieutenant  colonel 
of  the  leading  battalion  the  spot  where  the  leading  subdivi- 
sion will  change  its  direction,  and  the  point  of  view  in  front, 
on  which  the  leading  guide  is  afterwards  to  direct  his  march; 
and  when  at  least  two  subdivisions  have  wheeled  into  the 
new  direction,  the  brigadier  general  will  order, 

1  Prompt  manoeuvre  by  the  right  flank. 

This  command  having  been  repeated  by  each  of  the  lieu- 
tenant colonels,  the  one  who  commands  the  leading  battalion 
will  immediately  order^ 


112 

Six  last  platoons,  by  the  right  flank. 

The  lieutenant  colonels  of  each  of  the  following  battalions 
will  give  the  word, 

Battalion,  by  the  right  flank. 

The  brigadier  general  will  order, 

2  Quick  time,  march. 

And  the  manoeuvre  will  be  effected  as  explained  in  the 
drill  of  the  battalion. 

The  leading  company  of  each  battalion  will  enter  the  new 
direction  so  as  to  preserve  the  interval  between  it  and  the 
preceding  battalion. 

Should  the  word  "  halt"  be  given  by  the  brigadier  general 
before  the  manceuvre  has  been  completed,  it  will  only  be  re- 
peated by  the  lieutenant  colonels  of  those  battalions  which 
are  in  the  new  direction;  the  others  will  continue  marching, 
inclining  to  the  rear,  so  as  to  enter,  at  their  proper  distances, 
the  column. 

Article  V. 
To  halt  the  Column, 
The  brigadier  general  will  command, 

1  Column. 

This  having  been  repeated,  he  will  command, 

2  Halt. 

This  will  be  rapidly  repeated  by  commanders  of  battalions 
and  subdivisions. 

If  the  general  guides  and  colours  are  on  the  directing 
flank,  the  brigadier  general  will  correct  the  position  of  those 
of  the  battalion  at  the  head  of  the  column,  and  the  colours  of 
the  second  battalion;  the  majors  of  the  following  battalions 
will  dress  the  general  guides  of  those  battalions  by  the  pre- 
ceding colours. 

The  brigadier  general  will  then  command, 

3  Guides  on  the  line. 


113 

This  command  having  been  repeated,  the  company  guides 
will  step  on  the  line;  the  major  of  each  battalion  will  fix  the 
position  of  the  guides  of  the  leading  wing,  and  the  adjutant 
will  correct  the  position  of  those  of  the  rear  wing.  The 
guides  will  dress  by  the  pikes  of  the  colours  in  front,  and  take 
care  to  preserve  their  proper  distances. 

The  brigadier  general  will  command,  if  the  right  is  in 
front, 

4  Left  DRESS. 

At  this  command  repeated,  the  companies  will  approach 
to  their  respective  guides.  If  a  company  is  several  paces 
from  its  guide,  the  captain  will  cause  it  to  face,  and  march 
by  flank  to  the  guide. 

If  the  general  guides  and  the  colours  are  not  marching  on 
the  flank,  the  brigadier  general  will  command, 

1  Colours  and  general  guides  on  the  line. 

This  command  being  repeated,  the  general  guides  and  en- 
signs with  the  colours  step  out  on  the  directing  flank,  the 
brigadier  general  by  signals  with  the  sword  establishes  the 
general  guides  and  colours  of  the  first  battalion  on  the  direc- 
tion he  has  chosen,  and  those  of  the  following  battalions  will 
place  themselves  on  the  line,  the  majors  and  adjutants  di- 
recting them.  The  brigadier  general  then  will  order, 

2  Guides  on  the  line. 

This  command  having  been  repeated  and  executed  as  has 
been  explained,  the  brigadier  general  will  command, 

3  Left  DRESS. 

If  the  directing  flank  is  nearly  correct,  the  brigadier  gene- 
ral might,  instead  of  bringing  the  colours  and  general  guides 
on  the  line,  order, 

Guides  in  line. 

Which  being  repeated,  the  majors  and  adjutants  would 
correct  the  positions  of  the  guides,  as  has  been  explained. 

P 


114 


Article  VI. 

To  close  the  Column  to  Half  Distance^  or  into  Close  Column. 

If  the  column  is  to  close  to  half  distance,  the  brigadier  ge- 
neral will  order, 

1  To  half  distance,  close  the  column. 
This  having  been  repeated,  he  will  command, 

2  March. 

The  captain  of  the  leading  subdivision  will  halt  it,  and  the 
other  subdivisions  of  the  column  will  continue  to  march  un- 
til they  respectivelv  arrive  within  half  distance  of  the  prece- 
ding subdivision  halted,  when  they  will  be  halted  by  their 
officers  respectively,  and  dressed  as  has  been  explained  in  the 
drill  of  the  battalion. 

The  leading  subdivisi  n  of  each  battalion  will  halt  at 
companv  distance  from  the  rear  subdivision  of  the  preceding 
battalion. 

If  the  close  column  is  to  be  formed,  the  brigadier  general 
will  command, 

1  To  the  front  close  the  column. 
This  having  been  repeated  he  will  command, 

2  March. 

and  the  column  will  close,  leaving  an  interval  of  six  paces  bC' 
tvveeu  the  battalions,  and  three  paces  between  subdivisions. 


Article  VII. 
To  inarch  in  Column  at  Half  Distance^  or  in  Close  Column, 

The  brigadier  general,  to  put  in  march  a  close  column,  or 
column  at  half  distance,  will  give  the  same  words  of  com- 
mand as  to  a  column  at  full  distance. 

He  will  also  halt  it  by  the  same  words  of  command;  and  to 
dress  the  guides  on  the  directing  flank,  he  will  place  the  two 
1'^ading  guides,  and  command, 


115 

1  Guifles  by  your  file  leaders. 

2  Lcil  DRE.sS. 

At  the  first  command,  which  will  be  repeated,  the  guides 
will  place-  themselves  on  the  line;  and  on  the  second  com- 
mand, which  will  be  repeated,  the  subdivisions  will  approach 
and  Uress  by  them. 


Article  VIII. 

Change  of  Direction  of  a  Column  at  Half  Distance, 

A  column  at  half  distance  will  change  its  direction  in  the 
same  manner  as  a  column  at  full  distance,  with  only  this  dif- 
ference, that  if  the  change  is  from  the  side  of  the  guide,  the 
pivot  man  of  each  subdivision  takes  steps  of  twelve  inches, 
instead  of  six. 


Article  IX. 
Changing  the  Direction  of  a  Close  Column, 

The  changes  of  direction  of  a  close  column,  are  executed 
by  filing  from  the  flanks,  according  to  the  manner  prescrib- 
ed in  the  drill  of  battalion. 

Two  markers  being  established  on  the  new  direction,  one 
of  them  immediately  before  the  right  hand  file  of  the  leading 
subdivision  of  the  foremost  battalion,  the  brigadier  general 
will  command, 

Change  the  direction  by  the  right  flank. 

This  command  having  been  repeated,  each  lieutenant  col- 
onel will  immediately  order, 

Battalion,  to  the  right  face. 

The  brigadier  general  then  will  command, 

March. 

This  will  be  rapidly  repeated,  and  the  column  will  file  from 
the  right  flank  into  the  new  direction,  according  to  the  prin- 
ciples prescribed  in  the  drill  of  battalion. 

To  change  direction  to  the  right,  the  column  will  file  from 
the  left  flank. 


116 

The  major  of  the  leading  battalion,  from  the  front,  will 
correct  the  position  of  the  guides  of  his  battalion;  and  the 
major  of  each  of  the  succeeding  battalions  will  perform  the 
same  duty  from  the  rear  of  his  battalion,  as  it  arrives  on  the 
new  direction. 


Article  X. 

To  Countermarch. 

The  column  being  at  full  or  half  distance,  to  execute  the 
countermarch,  the  brigadier  general  will  order, 

1  The  column  will  countermarch. 

The  lieutenant  colonels  will  repeat  this  order,  and  com- 
mand, 

1  Battalion,  by  the  right  flank. 

2  To  the  right  face. 

3  By  files  to  the  left,  countermarch. 

The  brigadier  general  then  orders, 

2  March. 

And  at  this  word,  rapidly  repeated,  all  the  companies  of 
the  column  will  countermarch,  as  directed  in  the  drill  of  bat- 
talion. 

When  the  close  column  of  divisions,  right  in  front,  is  to 
countermarch,  the  brigadier  general  will  command, 

1  The  column  will  countermarch. 

This  command  having  been  repeated  by  the  lieutenant 
colonels,  they  will  order, 

1  Battalion,  by  the  right  flank. 

2  To  the  right  face. 

3  Even  divisions,  forward. 

The  brigadier  general  will  command, 

2  March. 

At  this  word,  rapidly  repeated,  the  even  numbered  divi- 
sions of  every  battalion  will  march  out  of  the  column  by  flank; 
and  when  they  are  clear  of  the  column,  the  lieutenant  colo- 
nels will  command, 


H7 

1  Even  and  odd  divisions. 

2  By  files  to  the  left,  countermarch. 

3  March. 

And  the  countermarch  is  executed  as  prescribed  in  the 
drill  of  battalion;  in  the  right  battalions  the  flank  company 
marches  with  the  even  divisions,  and  in  the  left  battalions 
the  flank  company  will  march  with  the  odd  divisions. 


Article  XL 

Being  in  Column  of  Companies  at  the  Halt^  to  form  Divisions. 

The  right  being  in  front,  the  brigadier  general  will  com- 
mand, 

Form  divisions. 

This  command  having  been  repeated,  the  lieutenant  co- 
lonels will  command, 

1  Even  companies,  by  the  left  flank. 

2  To  the  left  face. 

The  brigadier  general  will  order, 

March. 

This  command  being  quickly  repeated,  the  movement  is 
executed  in  the  manner  directed  in  the  drill  of  battalion. 

When  the  column  of  divisions  is  formed,  each  lieutenant 
colonel  will  command. 

Guides  to  your  posts. 


lis 


PART  IV. 


Different  Methods  of  forming  in  Line  from  Open  and  Close 
Columns, 


Article  I. 

Methods  of  Determining  the  Line. 

The  different  methods  of  determining  the  line,  have  been 
explained  in  the  drill  of  battalion. 

Article  II. 

Different  Methods  of  passing  from  Open  Colum7i  into  Line. 

A  column  at  full  distance,  with  the  right  in  front,  may  be 
formed  into  line: 

1  To  the  left. 

2  On  the  right. 

3  To  the  front. 

4  Facing  to  the  rear. 

It  only  remains  to  apply  the  principles,  which  have  been 
explained  in  the  battalion  drill,  to  a  column  of  several  bat- 
talions. 

Column  at  full  Distance^  with  the  Right  ifi  Front,  to  form 
to  the  Left  in  Line. 

It  being  ascertained  that  the  guides  are  correctly  dressed 
in  line,  the  brigadier  general  will  command, 

1  To  the  left  in  line,  wheel. 

This  word  having  been  repeated  by  the  lieutenant  colonels, 
the  right  guide  of  each  leading  company  quickly  places  him- 
self in  the  line  of  guides  on  the  left,  at  company  distance  from 
tht  left  guide  of  his  company,  according  to  the  di:  eLt.ons  in 
the  battalion  drill.  The  brigadier  general  then  commands, 

2  March. 


119 

This  command  having  been  rapidly  repeated,  the  line  is 
formed  by  wheeling  the  companies  to  the  left. 

The  line  being  formed,  the  brigadier  general  will  com- 
mand, 

3  Guides  to  your  posts. 

To  Form  the  Line  by  Inversion. 

Should  it  become  suddenly  necessarv  to  form  the  line  to 
the  right,  the  column  having  the  right  in  front,  the  brigadier 
general  will  command, 

1  By  inversion,  to  the  right  in  line. 

This  word  having  been  repeated  by  the  lieutenant  colonels, 
they  wi  1  then  order. 

Guide  to  the  right. 

The  major  and  adjutant  will  quickly  dress  the  guides  on 
the  righi  of  their  respective  battalions;  and  the  left  guide  of 
the  leading  company  will  place  himself  before  and  facing,  at 
company  distance,  the  right  guide  of  the  company,  on  the 
line  of  the  right  guides. 

The  brigadier  general  then  orders, 

2  March. 

At  this  word  quickly  repeated,  the  line  will  form  by 
wheeling  the  companies  to  the  right  as  has  been  described 
in  the  drill  of  battalion. 

The  brigadier  general  then  orders, 

3  Guides  to  your  posts. 

The  formation  by  inversion  to  the  left,  when  the  left  of 
the  column  is  in  front,  is  executed  on  the  same  principles. 

General  Rules  for  Formations  in  succession. 

Under  this  head  are  included  all  formations  wherein  the 
different  subdivisions  of  a  column  of  several  battalions,  arrive 
one  after  the  other  in  line;  as  forming  to  the  right  when  the 
right  is  in  front;  to  the  left  when  the  left  is  in  front;  forming 
line  to  the  front,  or  facing  to  the  rear;  and  the  display  of  close 
columns  into  line.  In  each  of  these  cases,  the  following  rules 
will  be  observed. 


120 

The  major  will  precede  his  battalion  on  the  line,  place 
himself  at  the  point  of  rest,  and  allow  the  interval  between 
his  battalion  and  the  next  to  it. 

As  soon  as  the  subdivision  of  the  colours  comes  on  the 
line,  the  ensign  carrying  the  colours  will  quit  his  rank,  and 
place  himself  opposite  to  his  file  on  the  line  of  the  guides  al- 
ready fixed,  facing  the  point  of  rest,  and  with  the  staff  of  the 
colours  carried  perpendicularly  before  the  middle  of  his 
body. 

When  two  of  the  colours  are  placed  on  the  line,  the  lieu- 
tenant colonels  will  command,  "  Guides  to  your  posts,"  as 
soon  as  the  last  subdivision  is  dressed  on  the  line;  but  the 
colours  will  remain  until  the  whole  line  is  formed,  when  the 
brigadier  general  will  order, 

Colours  to  your  posts. 

The  major  will  place  the  two  leading  guides  of  his  bat- 
talion on  the  line,  by  the  colours  which  have  been  already 
placed;  and  afterwards  will  place  the  other  guides  and  the  cO' 
lours  of  the  battalion,  as  they  respectively  come  into  line. 

To  form  the  Column  at  full  Distance^  the  Right  in  Front  ^ 
on  the  Right  in  Line. 

The  brigadier  general  will  point  out  to  an  aid-de-camp,  or 
to  the  adjutant  of  the  leading  battalion,  the  point  of  rest  for 
the  right  flank,  and  the  point  of  direction  to  the  left,  who  will 
quickly  station  two  markers,  one  of  them  at  the  point  of  rest, 
as  has  been  described  in  the  drill  of  the  battalion. 

The  leading  division  having  taken  a  direction  nearly  pa- 
rallel to  that  on  which  the  line  is  to  form,  the  brigadier  gene- 
ral will  order. 

On  the  right  form  the  line. 

This  being  repeated  by  the  lieutenant  colonels,  they  will 
order. 

Battalion,  guide  to  the  right. 

The  leading  subdivision  having  arrived  opposite  the  first 
marker,  will  turn  to  the  right;  and  the  formation  in  line  will 
be  executed  as  has  been  explained  in  the  drill  of  battalion. 

When  the  head  of  the  second  battalion  shall  have  arrived 
behind  the  right  of  the  line,  the  lieutenant  colonel  will  com- 
mand. 

Battalion,  guide  to  the  right. 


121 

and  each  succeeding  battalion  will  receiv^e  the  same  order, 
when  its  head  arrives  at  the  same  ground. 

When  the  last  subdivision  of  the  preceding  battalion  has 
wheeled  to  the  right,  in  order  to  form  in  line,  the  major  of 
the  next  battalion  will  quickly  place  himself  where  the  right 
flank  of  his  battalion  will  rest,  allowing  an  interval  of  twenty 
four  paces  between  the  battalions. 

The  subdivision  at  the  head  of  the  second  battalion  having 
arrived  opposite  the  major,  will  wheel  to  the  right,  and  be 
halted  by  the  officer  commanding  it  at  the  distance  of  two 
paces  from  the  line;  the  guides  of  the  subdivision  will  im- 
mediately place  themselves  on  the  line,  facing  to  and  dress- 
ing by  the  guides  of  the  first  battalion;  their  positions  will  be 
fixed  by  the  major;  when  this  is  effected,  the  captain  will 
order, 

Right  DRESS. 

Steady. 

The  leading  subdivision  of  every  succeeding  battalion  will 
be  established  in  the  same  manner. 

The  formation  of  the  line  being  completed,  the  brigadier 
general  will  order, 

Colours  to  your  posts. 

The  brigadier  general,  from  the  point  of  rest,  will  observe 
that  the  ensigns  and  colours  of  the  two  battalions  on  the 
right,  are  correctly  placed  on  the  direction  he  means  to  give 
to  the  line. 

If  the  column  had  the  left  in  front,  it  would  form  the  line 
on  the  left  by  the  same  principles. 


To  form  the  Column  at  Full  Distance  to  the  Front  in  Line. 

The  open  column  at  full  distance  with  the  right  in  front, 
arriving  behind  the  right  of  the  Ime  on  which  the  comman- 
der intends  to  form  it,  he  will  point  out  to  an  aid-de-camp, 
or  to  the  adjutant  of  the  leading  battalion  the  point  of  rest 
on  the  right,  and  the  distant  point  of  direction  on  the  left;  the 
aid-de-camp  or  adjutant  will  place  two  markers  on  the  line 
of  direction,  one  of  them  at  the  point  of  rest,  in  the  manner 
which  has  been  explained  in  the  drill  of  battalion. 

The  head  of  the  column  being  arrived  within  compan}- 
■  llstance  of  the  markers,  will  be  halte.d,  and  the  captain  of 

Q 


122 

the  leading  subdivision  instructed  to  form  it  oa  the  markers. 
The  brigadier  general  will  then  order, 

1  Form  the  line  to  the  front. 

This  command  having  been  repeated,  the  lieutenant  co- 
lonel of  the  leading  battalion  will  order, 

1  Battalion,  guide  to  the  right. 

2  By  companies  half  wheel  to  the  left. 

The  lieutenant  colonel  of  each  other  battalion  will  com- 
mand, 

Battalion,  head  of  column  to  the  left.  ' 

The  brigadier  general  will  then  order, 

2  March. 

At  this  word,  quickly  repeated,  the  battalion  at  the  heai 
of  the  column  will  form  the  line  to  the  front,  by  the  means 
explained  in  the  drill  of  battalion. 

The  other  battalions  will  march  diagonally,  in  separate 
columns,  toward  the  line. 

The  head  of  one  of  these  battalions  having  arrived  within 
the  distance  of  a  company  of  its  major,  who  will  have  pre- 
ceded it  on  the  line,  the  lieutenant  colonel  will  halt  it;  the 
two  guides  of  the  leading  subdivision  will  instantly  move 
on  the  line,  and  be  placed  by  the  major.  The  lieutenant  co- 
lonel  will  command, 

1  Form  the  line  to  the  front. 

2  Guide  to  the  right. 

3  By  company,  half  wheel  to  the  left. 

4  March. 

5  Forward. 

6  March. 

The  line  being  formed,  the  brigadier  general  will  com- 
mand, 

Colours,  to  your  posts. 

The  correctness  of  this  formation  will  depend  on  the  ex- 
actness  with  which  the  battalions  march  diagonally  to  the 
line;  to  insure  this,  the  brigadier  general  before  the  move- 
ment commences,  will  send  forward  two  mounted  officers, 
who  will  determine  the  points  where  the  right  of  each  bat- 
talion will  rest.  The  first  of  these  officers  at  the  distance  o* 


123 

the  front  of  a  battalion  and  twenty  four  paces,  will  face  the 
brigadier  general,  who  will  by  signal  fix  him  on  the  directioni 
the  second  officer  will  at  the  distanceof  a  battalion  and  twenty 
four  paces  further,  face  about,  and  dress  on  the  direction,  by 
the  first  officer  and  the  brigadier  general.  These  officers  will 
be  relieved  by  the  majors  of  the  second  and  third  battalionsj 
and  the  first  of  them  will,  so  soon  as  he  is  relieved,  gallop 
on,  and  take  up  the  position  for  the  right  of  the  fourth  bat- 
talion, from  which  he  will  be  relieved  in  the  like  manner,  by 
the  major  of  that  battalion.  The  majors  will  quit  their  bat- 
talions to  perform  this  duty  at  the  distance  of  one  hundred 
paces. 

A  column  with  the  left  in  front,  arriving  in  rear  of  the 
line,  would  form  thereon  by  similar  principles.  It  would 
break  off  to  the  right,  and  the  point  of  rest  of  each  battalion 
would  be  on  the  left. 

The  Column  at  Full  Distance^  with  the  Right  in  Fronts  to  face 
to  the  Rear  in  Line. 

The  column  with  the  right  in  front,  and  at  full  distance, 
arriving  in  the  front  of  the  right  of  the  line  on  which  the 
commander  means  to  form  in  line,  he  will  point  out  to  an 
aid-de-camp,  or  the  adjutant  of  the  leading  battalion,  the  spot 
where  the  I'ight  of  the  line  is  to  rest,  and  the  point  of  direc- 
tion on  the  left;  the  aid  or  adjutant  will  immediately  place 
two  markers  on  the  direction,  one  of  them  at  the  point  of 
rest,  in  the  manner  explained  in  the  drill  of  battalion. 

The  head  of  the  column  having  arrived  at  about  the  dis- 
tance of  a  company  from  the  markers  placed  on  the  line,  the 
brigadier  general  will  halt  the  column,  and  immediately  di- 
rect the  captain  of  the  leading  company  that  he  is  to  form 
his  company  oh  the  markers,  faced  to  the  rear. 

The  brigadier  general  will  then  command, 

1  Form  the  line  faced  to  the  rear. 

This  command  having  been  repeated,  the  lieutenant  c,c- 
lonel  of  the  first  battalion  will  order, 

1  Battalion,  by  the  right  flank. 

2  To  the  right  face. 

The  lieutenant  colonel  of  each  other  battalion  will  order. 
Battalion,  head  of  column  to  the  right. 


124 
The  brigadier  general  will  command, 

2  March. 

This  command  having  been  repeated,  the  first  battalioti 
will  form  the  line  fronting  to  the  rear,  as  has  been  explained 
in  rhe  drill  of  the  battalion. 

The  following  battalions  will  move  diagonally  in  separate 
colu'T.ns  toward  the  line. 

The  major  of  each  battalion  will  precede  it  on  the  line,  as 
has  been  directed  when  the  formation  is  to  the  front;  the  bat- 
talion column  will  halt  at  companj'  distance  from  the  point 
where  the  right  is  to  restj  the  guides  of  the  leading  company 
will  be  placed  on  the  direction  by  the  major,  and  dressed  cor- 
rectly with  those  of  the  preceding  battalion;  and  the  battalion 
will  form  on  the  line  by  the  prescribed  words  of  command 
from  its  lieutenant  colonel. 

The  line  being  formed,  the  brigadier  general  will  com- 
mand. 

Colours,  to  your  posts. 

A  column  with  the  left  in  front,  arriving  in  front  of  the 
left  of  the  line,  would  form  in  line  facing  to  the  rear,  by  the 
same  principles,  by  an  inverted  proceeding;  the  heads  of 
battalion  columns  would  change  direction  to  the  left,  and 
the  companies  would  file  by  the  left  flank  into  line. 

To  Form  the  Line  hy  txvo  kinds  of  Movement, 

It  is  sometimes  necessary  to  combine  two  kinds  of  move- 
ment in  the  formation  of  the  line,  as  will  be  explained. 

When  a  column  at  full  distance  is  to  form  a  line  upon  a 
central  subdivision  of  the  column,  if  the  line  is  to  form  to 
the  front,  all  that  portion  of  the  column  which  precedes  the 
subdivision  intended  for  the  basis  of  the  alignment,  will 
countermarch,  and  afterwards  form  in  line  facing  to  the  rear 
upon  that  subdivision;  and  all  that  portion  of  the  column 
which  follows  the  selected  subdivision,  Avhich  is  to  be  the 
basis  of  the  alignment,  will  form  to  the  front  in  line  upon  that 
subdivision. 

The  commander  in  such  a  case  will  always  select  the  rear 
subdivision  of  a  battalion. 

The  column  being  composed  of  companies,  at  full  distance, 
with  the  right  in  front,  the  brigadier  general  desiring  to  form 
ihe  line  upon  the  second  battalion,  will  halt  the  column,  come 
■'  o  the  rear  subdivision  pf  the  second  battalion,  and  cause  two 


125 

markers  with  bannerols  to  be  fixed  before  the  right  and  lefi 
files  of  this  subdivision,  which  is  to  be  the  basis  of  the  align- 
ment. 

The  brigadier  general  will  send  an  order  to  the  lieutenant 
colonel  of  the  first  battalion  to  countermarch  his  battalion; 
the  second  battalion  will  also  countermarch,  by  command  ot 
its  lieutenant  colonel,  except  the  last  subdivision. 

The  brigadier  general  will  send  an  order  to  the  lieutenant 
colonel  of  the  first  battalion  to  give  the  following  words  of 
command, 

1  Form  the  line  faced  to  the  rear. 

2  Battalion,  head  of  column  to  the  left. 

He  will  also  send  an  order  to  the  lieutenant  colonel  of  the 
fourth  battalion,  to  give  the  following  words  of  command, 

1  Form  the  line  to  the  front. 

2  Battalion,  head  of  column  to  the  left. 

He  will  himself  order  the  lieutenant  colonel  of  the  second 
battalion  to  give  the  following  words  of  command, 

1  Form  the  line  faced  to  the  rear. 

2  Battalion,  by  the  left  flank. 

3  To  the  left  face. 

And  he  will  order  the  lieutenant  colonel  of  the  third 
battalion  to  give  the  following  words  of  command, 

1  Form  the  line  to  the  front. 

2  Battalion,  guide  to  the  right. 

3  By  company,  half  wheel  to  the  left. 

The  brigadier  general  will  then  order, 
March. 

Upon  this  word  of  command,  quickly  repeated,  the  gene- 
ral movement  will  commence,  and  be  executed  on  the  prin- 
ciples which  have  been  explained,  in  "  forming  the  line  to 
the  front,"  and  "  faced  to  the  rear." 

The  third  battalion  having  wheeled  into  echellons,  the  first 
company  will  march  to  the  point  where  the  major  stands;  the 
guides  will  be  speedily  placed  by  him  on  the  line,  dressing 
by  the  markers;  the  first  company  will  form  on  them;  the 
other  companies  forming  in  succession  on  its  left. 

If  instead  of  facing  to  the  front,  it  was  the  intention  of 
the  commander  to  form  the  line  on  a  central  subdivision. 


126 

iaced  to  the  rear,  he  would  select  the  leading  subdivision  of 
the  third  battalion,  which  he  would  countermarch,  and  form 
on  the  markers;  and  the  formation  of  the  whole  would  be  ef- 
fected on  principles  similar  to  those  just  explained. 

When  a  column  with  the  right  in  front  arrives  in  rear  of 
the  line,  pursues  the  direction  towards  the  right,  and  is  to 
form  the  line  before  the  whole  of  the  column  has  entered  the 
new  direction,  the  formation  will  be  executed  in  this  manner. 

The  commander  having  halted  the  column  at  the  moment 
when  the  fourth  company  of  the  second  battalion  shall  have 
wheeled  into  the  new  direction,  having  corrected  the  position 
of  the  general  guides,  who  ought  to  be  on  the  flank  of  so 
much  of  the  column  as  has  extended  along  the  line,  and  es- 
tablished the  colours  of  the  second  battalion  on  this  direction, 
as  has  been  described  under  the  article  "  to  halt  the  column," 
he  will  send  an  order  to  the  lieutenant  colonel  of  the  third 
battalion  to  direct  the  head  of  his  battalion  column  to  the  left, 
in  order  to  form  "  to  the  front  in  line."  So  soon  as  this  order 
has  been  delivered,  the  brigadier  general  will  command, 

1  To  the  left  in  line  wheel. 

This  order  will  be  repeated  by  the  lieutenant  colonels  of  the 
:  econd  and  first  battalions,  and  the  lieutenant  colonel  of  the 
second  will  immediately  command, 

Four  last  companies,  to  the  front  in  line. 

The  lieutenant  colonel  of  the  third  battalion  will  give  the 
following  order,  which  the  lieutenant  colonel  of  the  fourth 
battalion  will  immediately  repeat. 

Battalion,  head  of  column  to  the  left. 
The  brigadier  general  will  then  order, 

2  March. 

At  this  word  of  command,  quickly  repeated,  the  forma- 
tion will  be  executed. 

If  the  column  instead  of  arriving  in  the  rear  of  the  line  to 
be  formed  on,  should  arrive  in  front  thereof,  the  formation 
into  line  would  be  executed  in  this  manner. 

The  commander  having  halted  the  column  at  the  mo- 
ment when  the  fourth  company  of  the  second  battalion  shall 
have  wheeled  into  the  new  direction,  having  corrected  the 
position  of  the  general  guides,  and  established  the  colours  of 
the  second  battalion  on  this  direction,  will  send  an  order  to 


127 

the  lieutenant  colonel  of  the  third  battalion  to  direct  the  head 
of  his  battalion  column  to  the  right,  in  order  to  "  form  the 
line  faced  to  the  rear."  So  soon  as  this  order  has  been  deliver- 
ed, the  brigadier  general  will  command, 

1  To  the  left  in  line  wheel. 

This  order  having  been  repeated  by  the  lieutenant  colonels 
of  the  second  and  first  battalions,  the  lieutenant  colonel  of  the 
second  battalion  will  immediately  afterwards  command. 

Four  last  companies,  form  in  line  faced  to  the  rear. 

The  lieutenant  colonel  of  the  third  battalion  will  give  the 
following  orders,  which  will  be  repeated  by  the  lieutenant 
colonel  of  the  fourth, 

1  Form  in  line  faced  to  the  rear. 

2  Battalion  head  of  column  to  the  right. 

The  brigadier  general  will  then  order, 

2  March. 

Upon  this  word,  quickly  repeated,  the  formation  will  be 
executed. 

The  same  movements  ivill  be  executed  by  a  column  hav- 
ing the  left  in  front,  upon  the  same  principles,  by  inverting 
the  manner  of  proceeding. 

•  A  Remark  on  these  Movements. 

Should  the  head  of  the  third  battalion  be  within  less  than 
fifty  paces  of  the  line,  when  the  column  is  halted,  it  may  form 
to  the  front,  or  facing  to  the  rear  in  line,  without  changing 
the  head  of  the  battalion  column. 


Article  IV. 

Different  Methods  of  forming  a  Column  at  Half  Distance 
into  Line. 

Columns  at  half  distance,  the  right  in  front,  as  well  as  those 
at  whole  distance,  may  be  formed  in  line, 

1  To  the  left. 
^  On  the  right. 


128 

'J  To  the  front,  or 
4  Facing  to  the  rear. 

1.  To  form  the  Column  at  half  Distance  -with  the  Right  in 
Fronts  to  the  Left  in  Line. 

In  order  to  form  into  line  a  column  at  half  distance,  the 
right  in  front,  by  wheeling  to  the  left,  it  is  necessary  that  the 
subdivisions  should  take  full  distance,  by  marching  off  the 
head  of  the  column,  as  follows. 

A  column  at  half  distance  with  the  right  in  front  being 
supposed  to  be  pursuing  a  direction  on  which  the  commander 
thinks  proper  to  form  the  line  by  wheeling  to  the  lett,  he 
will  halt  the  column  when  the  last  subdivision  has  arrived 
where  it  is  to  rest,  and  will  command, 

Take  distance,  by  the  head  of  column. 

This  order  having  been  repeated,  the  captain  commanding 
the  leading  subdivision  will  command, 

Company,  forward. 
Guide  to  the  left. 
March. 

The  following  subdivisions  will  step  off"  successively  as 
they  have  their  distances,  by  command  of  their  officers,  as 
directed  in  the  drill  of  the  battalion. 

The  lieutenant  colonels  will  take  care  that  their  leading 
subdivisions  do  not  march  until  the  proper  interval  is  allowed, 
between  their  battalions  and  those  which  precede  them. 

At  the  instant  when  the  rear  subdivision  has  its  distance, 
the  brigadier  general  will  halt  the  column,  ascertain  that  the 
guides  are  exactly  on  the  direction,  and  then  wheel  the  co- 
lumn to  the  left  into  line. 

Before  the  movement  commences,  the  brigadier  general 
will  point  out  to  the  major  of  the  leading  battalion  the  ob- 
ject of  direction  in  front,  who  will  take  care  that  the  lead- 
ing guide  directs  his  march  thereon  without  deviation. 

The  close  column  would  take  full  distance  by  the  same 
words  of  command,  and  the  movement  would  be  executed 
'ipon  the  same  principles. 


129 


2.  To  form  the  Column  at  Half  Distance^  xvith  the  Right  in 
Front,  on  the  Right  in  Line, 

A  column  at  half  distance,  with  the  right  in  front,  will 
form  the  line  on  the  right,  by  the  same  words  of  command 
and  mode  of  procedure  as  a  column  at  full  distance. 

3.  To  Form  the  Column  at  Half  Distance  to  the  Front  in  Line. 

A  column  at  half  distance,  having  arrived  in  the  rear  of 
the  line  and  being  to  form  to  the  front,  the  commander  will 
cause  the  leading  battalion  to  take  full  distance,  and  then 
give  the  words  of  command  for  forming  "to  the  front  in 
line." 

The  other  battalions  will  take  wheeling  distances,  as  they 
march  diagonally  to  their  respective  places  in  the  line. 

Or  the  commander  may  cause  the  leading  battalion  to  form 
close  column  and  display,  while  the  other  battalions  break 
off,  march  diagonally,  and  take  wheeling  distances. 

4.  To  Form  the  Column  at  Half  Distance,  facing  to  the  Rear 

in  Line. 

A  column  at  half  distance  will  form  the  line  faced  to 
the  rear,  by  the  same  words  of  command,  and  means  of 
proceeding,  that  have  been  prescribed  for  a  column  at  full 
distance;  and  it  will  not  be  necessary  to  increase  the  distance 
between  the  subdivisions. 


Article  V. 

Of  Close  Columns. 

A  close  column,  consisting  of  any  number  of  battalions, 
may  be  formed  in  line  by  displaying, 

1  Faced  to  the  front. 
^  Faced  to  the  rear. 

3  Faced  to  the  left. 

4  Faced  to  the  right. 

R 


130 


1.  To  display  the  Close  Column^  faced  to  the  Front  in  Line. 

A  column  of  four  battalions  marching  by  companies  at  full 
distance,  with  the  right  in  front,  the  commander  desiring  to 
display  it  into  line  to  the  front,  will  send  two  mounted  officers 
instructed  to  ascertain  the  line  to  be  formed  on.  One  of  them 
will  remain  at  the  point  where  the  head  of  the  column  will 
strike  the  line. 

When  the  head  of  the  column  approaches  near  to  the  line 
to  be  formed  on,  the  brigadier  general  will  close  the  column, 
an:l  halt  the  leading  company  at  the  distance  of  two  paces 
from  the  airl-de-camp  stationed  on  the  line. 

Unless  particular  circumstances  induce  the  brigadier  ge- 
neral to  display  the  column  of  companies  into  line,  he  will 
form  divisions  at  the  halt,  and  again  close  the  column,  placing 
its  directing  flank  at  right  angles  to  the  direction  of  the  line. 

The  brigadier  general  will  then  cause  two  markers  with 
bannerols  to  be  placed  opposite  the  right  and  left  hand  files 
of  the  division  at  the  head  of  the  column,  and  establish  them 
correctly  on  the  direction.  He  may  then  display  upon  any 
battalion  he  pleases. 

We  will  suppose  that  the  column  is  to  be  displayed  on  the 
second  battalion  j  and  this  example  will  be  sufficient  for  the 
various  cases  of  displaying  columns. 

The  brigadier  general  will  command, 

1  By  battalions  in  close  column,  on  the  second  bat- 
talion display  the  column. 

"  This  word  of  command  having  been  repeated,  the  lieu- 
tenant colonel  of  the  second  battalion  will  caution  it  to  stand 
fast.  The  lieutenant  colonel  of  the  first  battalion  will  com- 
mand, 

1  Battalion,  by  the  right  flank. 

2  To  the  right  face. 

The  lieutenant  colonels  of  the  third  and  fourth  battalions 
will  pass  in  front  of  their  battalions  to  the  right  flank,  and 
command, 

1  Battalion,  by  the  left  flank. 

2  To  the  left  face. 

As  soon  as  the  brigadier  general  shall  have  named  the 
battalion  on  which  the  column  is  to  display,  an  aid  will  pro- 


131 

ceed  to  post  himself  on  the  direction  toward  the  right,  a 
little  beyond  the  point  to  which  the  right  will  extend;  he 
will  dress  correctly  on  the  two  markers  posted  before  the 
leading  division. 

The  brigadier  general  will  then  command, 

2  March. 

At  this  word,  quickly  repeated,  the  movement  will  com- 
mence. The  battalions  march  by  file  to  the  flank,  uncovering 
each  other,  and  preserving  the  intervals. 

The  captain  commanding  the  first  division  of  the  first  bat- 
talion at  the  head  of  the  column,  placed  beside  his  right 
guide,  will  direct  his  march  a  little  in  the  rear  of  the  aid-de- 
camp, stationed  on  the  line  toward  the  right. 

The  major  of  the  third,  will  precede  his  battalion,  and  as- 
certain the  place  where  it  should  halt,  allowing  six  paces  be- 
tween the  close  columns  as  they  stand  on  the  line  before  they 
display. 

As  soon  as  the  leading  file  of  this  battalion  arrives  as  far 
as  the  position  of  the  major,  the  lieutenant  colonel  will  com- 
mand, 

1  Third  battalion. 

2  Halt. 

3  Front. 

The  fourth  battalion  will  be  halted  in  like  manner  when  it 
has  its  distance,  which  the  major  will  take  up  in  the  like 
manner. 

The  lieutenant  colonel  of  the  second  battalion,  seeing  it 
nearly  uncovered,  will  command, 

1  Battalion,  forward. 

2  Guide  to  the  left. 

3  March. 

At  the  word  "  march,"  which  will  be  given  when  the  bat- 
talion is  altogether  uncovered,  it  will  march  forward  to  its 
place  on  the  line;  and  when  its  leading  division  shall  have 
arrived  close  to  the  two  markers  posted  on  the  line,  the  lieu- 
tenant colonel  will  halt  the  battalion,  the  major  will  place  the 
covering  sergeant  of  the  second  company  on  the  line,  cor- 
rectly between  the  two  markers;  and  when  this  is  done  the 
lieutenant  colonel  will  command, 

Left  DRESS. 


132 

The  leading  division,  and  every  other,  will  dress  by  the 
left;  the  guides  carefully  preserving  their  distances. 

The  other  battalions  will  march  to,  and  dress  on  the  line 
in  the  like  manner;  the  right  and  left  guides,  and  the  cover- 
ing sergeant  in  the  centre  of  each  division,  coming  forward 
on  the  line,  and  dressing  correctly  by  the  markers. 

The  displaying  of  the  brigade  column  into  battalion  close 
columns,  being  finished,  the  brigadier  general  will  order, 

Guides  to  your  posts. 

At  this  command,  the  guides  placed  before  each  battalion 
close  column,  will  take  their  places,  and  the  markers  will 
retire. 

The  brigadier  general  will  determine  on  what  battalion  and 
division  the  line  is  to  display,  according  as  he  may  deem  it 
expedient  to  extend  the  line  to  the  right  or  left. 

We  will  suppose  that  he  has  determined  to  display  on  the 
second  division  of  the  second  battalion. 

The  brigadier  general  will  proceed  to'the  second  battalion, 
cause  two  markers  to  be  placed  before  the  right  and  left  files 
of  the  front  division,  and  command, 

1  On  the  second  division  of  the  second  battalion, 
display  the  columns. 

This  order  having  been  repeated,  the  lieutenant  colonel  of 
the  second  battalion  will  caution  the  second  division  to  stand 
fast,  and  command, 

1  Battalion,  by  the  light  and  left  flank. 

2  To  the  right  and  left  face. 

The  lieutenant  colonel  of  the  first  battalion  will  command, 

1  Battalion,  by  the  right  flank. 

2  To  the  right  face. 

The  lieutenant  colonels  of  the  third  and  fourth  battalions 
will  command, 

1  Battalion,  by  the  left  flank. 

2  To  the  left  face. 

The  battalions  having  faced  to  the  flanks,  each  lieutenant 
colonel  will  place  himself  on  the  right  flank  of  his  battalion. 

3o  soon  as  the  brigadier  general  names  the  battalion  and 
division  on  which  the  line  will  display,  two  mounted  oflicers 


133 

will  gallop  off,  the  one  to  the  right,  the  other  to  the  left,  to 
post  themselves  a  little  beyond  where  the  flanks  of  the  line 
will  rest;  they  will  face  each  other,  and  establish  thf  msclves 
exactly  on  the  line,  by  the  means  prescribed  in  the  drill  of 
the  battalion. 

When  the  brigadier  general  perceives  that  those  two 
mounted  officers  are  steadily  Rxed  on  the  line,  he  will  com- 
mand, 

2  March. 

At  this  command,  quickly  repeated,  the  display  commen- 
ces. The  captain  commanding  the  front  division  of  the  bat- 
talion which  will  be  on  the  right  of  the  line,  placed  beside  the 
right  guide,  will  direct  his  march  by  the  mounted  officer,  in 
such  a  manner  as  not  to  cross  the  line,  but  remain  rather  in 
rear  of  it. 

The  captain  commanding  the  first  division  of  the  fourth 
battalion,  will  in  the  same  manner  direct  his  march  by  the 
mounted  officer,  so  as  not  to  cross  the  line;  but  remain 
rather  in  rear  of  it. 

The  second  battalion  will  be  the  first  to  display,  according 
to  the  mode  prescribed  in  the  drill  of  the  battalion. 

The  lieutenant  colonel  of  the  first  battalion  upon  seeing  the 
first  division  of  the  second  halted,  will,  as  soon  as  his  bat- 
talion has  taken  an  interval  of  twenty  four  paces  from  the 
second,  command, 

1  Fourth  division, 

2  Halt. 

The  captain  commanding  this  divsion  will  thencommand^ 
Front. 

The  third,  second,  and  first  divisions,  and  the  grenadiers 
or  light  infantry,  continue  marching  on,  and  will  respectively 
be  halted  by  the  captains  commanding  them,  as  has  been  pre- 
scribed in  the  drill  of  battalion. 

As  soon  as  the  fourth  division  of  this  battalion  shall  be 
uncovered,  the  captain  commanding  it  will  order, 

1  Division,  forward. 

2  Guide  to  the  left. 

3  March. 

At  the  word  "  march,"  the  fourth  division  will  advance 
towards  the  line;  and  it  will  be  halted  by  the  captain  who 


134 

commands  it,  at  the  distance  of  two  paces  from  the  major, 
who  will  have  preceded  it,  and  placed  himself  on  the  line. 

As  soon  as  the  fourth  division  is  halted,  the  guides  on  th^ 
right  and  left  of  the  division,  and  the  covering  sergeant  in 
its  centre,  will  place  themselves  on  the  line,  facing  towards 
the  guides  of  the  second  battalion;  the  major  will  dress 
them  correctly  on  the  line;  and  when  this  is  done,  the  cap- 
tain commanding  the  division  will  order, 

Left  DRESS. 

The  battalions  marching  to  the  left,  will  respectively  dis- 
play on  the  same  principles.  The  first  division  of  each  of 
those  battalions  will  be  first  halted  by  the  lieutenant  colonel, 
and  the  captain  commanding  will  order  it  to  front. 

The  line  having  displayed,  the  brigadier  general  will  com- 
mand, 

Colours  to  your  posts. 

A  column  with  the  left  in  front  would  display  on  the  same 
principles,  by  an  inverted  procedure. 

2.  To  display  the  Close  Column  faced  to  the  Rear  in  Line. 

When  the  commander  thinks  proper  to  display  the  close 
column  into  line  faced  to  the  rear,  he  will  commence  by 
causing  the  column  to  countermarch;  after  which  he  will 
display  it  into  line  by  the  words  of  command,  and  means 
prescribed  for  displaying  to  the  front. 

3.  To  display  the  Close  Column  to  the  Left  in  Line. 

A  close  column  may  display  into  line  facing  to  the  left 
flank.  The  commander  to  effect  this,  will  first  change  the 
direction  of  the  column  to  the  left,  by  filing  from  its  right 
flank  into  a  direction  perpendicular  to  that  on  which  it  is  in- 
tended to  display  into  line;  and  then  he  will  display  the 
column,  by  the  words  of  command  and  means  already  pre- 
scribed. 

4.  To  display  the  Close  Column  to  the  Right  in  Li?ie. 

A  close  column  may  also  display  into  line  facing  to  the 
right  flank.  For  this  purpose  the  commander  will  cause  the 
column  to  change  its  direction  to  the  right,  by  filing  from  its 
left  flank,  into  a  direction  perpendicular  to  that  on  which  it 


135 

is  intended  to  display  into  linej  and  then  he  will  display  the 
column,  as  already  directed. 

If  after  the  close  column  of  the  brigade  has  displayed  into 
battalion  close  columns,  standing  on  the  same  line,  the  briga- 
dier general  should  deem  it  necessary  that  the  whole  should 
advance  in  this  order,  he  will  announce  the  battalion  of  di- 
rection in  this  manner, 

The  second  is  the  battalion  of  direction. 

This  order  having  been  repeated,  he  will  command 

1  Battalion,  forward. 

Each  of  the  lieutenant  colonels  will  repeat  this  order,  and 
then  command. 

Guide  to  the  centre. 

The  adjutant  of  each  battalion  will  place  himself  six  paces 
immediately  in  front  of  the  captain  in  the  centre  of  the  lead- 
ing division.  The  captains  commanding  divisions  will  re- 
sume their  places  in  the  line. 

The  brigadier  general  will  then  order, 

2  March. 

This  order  being  quickly  repeated,  the  battalion  close 
columns  step  off  to  the  front,  preserving  the  touch  of  the 
elbow  on  the  side  of  the  centre  of  each  division.  The  adju- 
tants direct  their  march  perpendicularly  to  the  front;  the 
leading  divisions  march  by  them,  and  the  other  divisions 
exactly  in  the  steps  of  the  leading  divisions.  The  majors  on 
the  reverse  flank  of  the  leading  divisions  will  regulate  the 
step.  The  lieutenant  colonels  from  the  rear  will  see  that  the 
march  is  direct  to  the  front. 


136 

PART  V. 

Article  I. 

To  March  in  Line, 

We  will  suppose  four  battalions  drawn  up  correctly  in 
line,  and  that  the  brigadier  general  would  march  them  in  line 
to  the  front;  for  this  purpose  he  will  name  a  directing  batta- 
lion, thus: 

The  second  is  the  battalion  of  direction. 

This  order  having  been  repeated,  the  lieutenant  colonel 
and  major  of  each  battalion,  will  post  themselves,  the  former 
in  the  rear,  and  the  latter  in  front  of  the  battalion,  in  the 
direction  of  the  file  of  the  colours,  as  has  been  prescribed  in 
the  drill  of  battalion. 

The  brigadier  general  will  then  command, 

1  Battalion,  forward. 

This  order  having  been  repeated,  the  ensign's  rank  and  the 
general  guides  will  move  forward  six  paces,  and  dress;  the 
adjutant  will  correct  their  position,  and  place  himself  six 
paces  from  the  ensign's  rank,  on  the  flank  most  remote,  from 
the  regulating  battalion. 

The  brigadier  general  will  then  order, 

2  March. 

At  this  word,  rapidly  repeated,  the  line  moves  at  the  same 
instant;  and  each  battalion  will  particularly  attend  to  the  in- 
structions which  have  been  given  for  marching  in  line,  in  the 
drill  of  the  battalion. 

If  the  direction  of  the  march  has  not  been  fixed  exactly 
perpendicular  to  the  line,  the  error  will  soon  be  discovered; 
as  the  battalion  will  slant,  and  close  the  interval  on  one  side. 
The  brigadier  general  will  attend  particularly  to  the  direct- 
ing battalion,  and  repair  this  fault,  if  it  has  been  committed, 
by  sending  an  aid  to  forty  paces  in  front  of  the  directing  bat- 
talion, going  himself  as  far  to  the  rear,  establishing  the  aid 
on  the  true  direction,  and  ordering  that  it  shall  be  con- 
formed to. 

Each  battalion  is  to  preserve  the  interval  on  the  side  of 


137 

the  directing  battalion;  and  the  lieutenant  colonels  will  at- 
tend thereto. 

It  is  not  necessary  that  the  colours  of  the  different  bat- 
talions should  be  exactly  on  the  same  line;  therefore  the  ad- 
jutant vrill  not  direct  the  ensign's  rank  to  alter  the  step,  un- 
less it  appears  evidently  necessary  to  maintain  a  connexion 
with  the  line. 

The  general  guides  of  the  battalion  will  march  by  the  en- 
sign's rank,  without  regarding  each  other,  or  the  colours  and 
general  guides  of  the  other  battalions. 


Article  II. 

To  Chang's  the  Direction  when  Marching-  in  Line. 

If  when  the  line  is  on  the  march  to  the  front,  the  brigadier 
general  should  deem  it  necessary  to  alter  its  direction  so  as 
to  throw  forward  a  wing,  by  a  wheel  on  either  flank,  it  will 
be  executed  in  this  manner. 

We  will  suppose  that  the  brigadier  general  determines  to 
advance  the  left  wing;  he  will  come  to  the  right  battalion,  and 
establish  two  markers  before  it,  one  of  them  at  the  right 
flank,  the  other  forty  paces  distant  from  him  on  the  new  di- 
rection; the  brigadier  general  will  direct  the  lieutenant  co- 
lonel of  the  right  battalion,  to  establish  his  battalion  on  the 
markers;  and  then  he  will  command, 

1  Change  the  direction  to  the  right. 

Each  lieutenant  colonel  wijl  repeat  this  command,  and 
then  order, 

Battalion,  to  the  right  wheel. 
The  brigadier  general  will  command, 

2  March. 

This  word  being  quickly  repeated,  each  battalion  will 
commence  wheeling,  as  directed  in  the  drill  of  battalion;  and 
as  soon  as  it  has  sufficiently  wheeled,  its  lieutenant  colonel 
will  command. 

Forward,  march. 

At  this  command,  each  battalion  will  march  direct  to  the 
fro  nt, 

S 


138 

The  battalion  on  the  right,  will  wheel  until  its  direction 
is  parallel  to  that  of  the  markers;  it  will  halt  four  paces  from 
theni)  when  the  lieutenant  colonel  will  order, 

1  Colours  and  general  guides  on  the  line. 

They  being  established  on  the  new  direction,  he  will  order, 

2  Guides  on  the  line. 

3  On  the  centre,  dress. 

The  lieutenant  colonel  of  the  second  battalion,  will  direct 
its  march  so  that  it  may  arrive  parallel  to  the  new  direction; 
and  to  effect  this,  he  will  repeatedly  wheel  a  few  paces,  as 
he  approaches  the  line. 

The  major  will  precede  his  battalion  on  the  line,  and  mark 
the  interval,  placing  himself  on  the  same  direction  with  the 
markers  before  the  first  battalion. 

The  lieutenant  colonel  will  halt  the  battalion  within  four 
paces  of  the  new  line,  and  establish  it  thereon  by  the  words 
of  command  that  have  just  been  prescribed  to  be  given  by 
the  lieutenant  colonel  of  the  first  battalion. 

The  third  and  fourth  battalions  will  conform  to  the  di- 
rections which  have  been  given  relative  to  the  second  bat- 
talion. 

The  brigadier  general  from  the  right  of  the  line,  will  see 
that  the  two  first  colours  are  correctly  placed  on  the  direc- 
tion; and  when  the  last  battalion  is  established  thereon,  he 
will  order, 

Colours,  to  your  posts. 


Article  III. 

To  Halt  and  Dress  the  Line, 

The  brigadier  general  being  desirous  to  halt  the  line,  will 
command, 

Battalion. 

This  word  having  been  repeated,  he  will  command, 

Halt. 

Which  being  rapidly  repeated,  the  line  will  halt;  the  ge- 
neral guides  and  colours  will  remain  in  front. 


139 

The  line  being  halted,  if  the  brigadier  general  would  dress 
it,  he  will  place  himself  a  few  paces  to  the  right  of  the  colours 
of  the  regulating  battalion,  and  determine  on  the  new  direc- 
tion to  be  given  to  the  colours;  it  should  pass  before  every 
battalion,  unless  particular  reasons  induce  the  commander  to 
choose  a  new  direction,  cutting  the  old  line. 

The  brigadier  general  will  then  order  the  ensign  and  the 
general  guide  on  the  left  of  the  regulating  battalion  to  face 
him,  and  will  by  signals  with  the  sword  establish  them  on 
the  direction;  the  general  guide  on  the  right  will  face  to  and 
dress  by  the  general  guide  on  the  left,  and  the  ensign,  who 
will  lower  his  colours;  the  major  will  correct  his  position,  if 
necessary;  the  two  corporals  of  the  ensign's  rank  will  take 
their  places  in  the  line. 

The  three  points  on  the  line,  marked  by  the  ensign  and 
the  two  general  guides  of  this  battalion,  being  established, 
the  brigadier  general  will  direct  the  ensign  to  raise  his  co- 
lours, and  then  will  command, 

Colours  on  the  line. 

This  command  having  been  repeated,  the  ensigns  bearing 
the  colours,  and  the  general  guides  of  all  the  other  battalions, 
will  step  on  the  new  direction,  face  to  and  dress  by  the  co- 
lours and  general  guides  of  the  regulating  battalion;  the 
major  and  adjutant  of  each  battalion  will  correct  the  position 
of  its  colours  and  general  guides;  the  ensigns  will  carry  the 
colours  perpendicularly  before  their  eyes,  and  the  corporals 
of  the  ensign's  rank  will  resume  their  places  on  his  right  and 
left. 

The  brigadier  general  seeing  all  the  colours  of  the  line  es- 
tablished on  the  new  direction,  will  command, 

Guides  on  the  line. 

This  command  having  been  repeated,  the  right  guides  of 
companies  of  the  right  wing,  and  the  left  guides  of  companies 
of  the  left  wing  of  each  battalion,  place  themselves  on  the  line, 
facing  to  the  colours  of  their  respective  battalions;  the  ma- 
jors and  adjutants  will  correct  their  positions.  So  soon  as  this 
is  done,  each  lieutenant  colonel,  without  waiting  for  each 
other,  or  for  an  order,  will  command, 

On  the  centre  dress. 


140 

At  this  command,  each  battalion  will  move  up  to  its  guides, 
and  will  be  dressed  as  has  been  directed  in  the  drill  of  bat- 
talion. 

The  brigadier  general  seeing  all  the  battalions  inline,  will 
order. 

Colours  and  guides,  to  your  posts. 

This  order  having  been  repeated,  the  ensigns,  general 
guides,  guides  of  companies,  and  captains  of  companies  in 
the  right  wings  of  battalions,  will  resume  their  places  in  line. 

If  the  new  direction  should  cut  the  old  line,  so  as  to  throw 
some  of  the  battalions  to  the  rear,  the  lieutenant  colonels  of 
such  battalions,  so  soon  as  they  perceive  this,  will  face  them 
to  the  right  about,  march  to  the  rear,  and  come  to  the  front 
on  passing  the  new  direction. 


ACTICLE  IV. 

Firing  Adva?icing. 

Firing  advancing  will  be  executed  by  the  odd  and  even 
numbered  battalions  alternately.  For  this  purpose  the  bri- 
gadier general  will  order, 

1  Fire  by  battalion  advancing. 

This  command  having  been  repeated,  he  will  order, 

2  Odd  battalions,  commence  firing. 

This  order  having  been  repeated,  the  lieutenant  colonels 
of  the  right  hand  battalions,  will  command, 

1  Battalion,  quick  time. 

2  March. 

On  the  word  "  march,"  the  right  hand  or  odd  battalions 
take  the  quick  step,  and  when  they  have  advanced  forty  paces, 
will  be  halted;  each  battalion  will,  by  word  of  command  from 
its  lieutenant  colonel,  fire  by  battalion,  load,  and  take  the 
quick  step,  resuming  the  ordinary  time  on  coming  up  with 
the  even  battalions. 

During  this  time,  the  even  battalions  will  have  advanced 
in  ordinary  time;  the  lieutenant  colonel  of  each  of  these  bat- 
talions, so.  soon  as  the  odd  battalion  next  on  the  right  shall 
have  resumed  its  place  in  the  line,  will  order  his  battalion  to 


141 

take  the  quick  step.  It  will  advance  forty  paces  in  quick  time, 
halt,  execute  the  fire  by  battalion  by  word  of  command  from 
its  lieutenant  colonel,  load,  take  the  quick  step,  and  resume 
the  ordinary  time  on  rejoining  the  odd  battalions,  which  have 
been  marching  forward  in  ordinary  time. 

The  battalions,  odd  and  even,  will  advance  and  fire  in  this 
manner,  alternately. 

At  the  word  "  halt,"  given  to  a  battalion  when  it  is  to  fire, 
the  ensigns' rank  will  resume  its  place  in  the  line;  the  general 
guides  will  place  themselves  on  the  flanks,  on  the  front  rank; 
as  soon  as  the  fire  is  executed  the  ensign's  rank,  and  the  two 
general  guides,  will,  without  an  order,  resume  their  places  in 
front  of  the  battalion;  the  captains,  covering  sergeants,  and 
second  and  rear  ranks  of  the  colours,  will  also  resume  their 
places  in  line. 

In  this  case,  the  lieutenant  colonel  will  not  order  a  roll  to 
be  beat,  after  executing  the  fire. 

But  when  the  brigadier  general  has  determined  that  the 
firing  shall  cease,  he  will  order  a  short  roll  to  be  beat,  which 
will  instantly  be  repeated  by  the  drummers  of  each  battalion; 
upon  this  signal,  all  the  battalions  will  dress  by  the  battalion 
of  direction,  which  will  march  in  ordinary  time;  the  battalions 
in  the  rear  will  advance  in  quick  time,  and  those  before  the 
regulating  battalion  will  mark  time. 

The  battalions  which  have  fired  will  load  before  they  re- 
sume their  places  in  the  line. 

If  there  were  many  battalions  in  line,  the  odd  battalions 
would  regulate  themselves  by  the  nearest  odd  battalions  on 
the  side  of  direction,  as  to  the  time  of  advancing  and  halting. 
The  even  battalions  would  observe,  with  regard  to  each  other, 
the  same  rule. 


Article  V. 

To  March  in  Retreati 

The  ilne  being  halted,  the  brigadier  general,  when  he 
would  have  it  to  retreat,  will  command, 

1  Battalion,  right  about — face. 

This  command  having  been  repeated,  the  line  will  face  to 
the  right  about;  the  lieutenant  colonel,  major,  adjutant,  en- 
sign's rank,  and  general  guides,  will  conform  to  the  directions 
given  in  the  drill  of  battalion. 


142 

The  brigadier  general  will  then  order, 

2  Battalion,  forward. 

This  order  having  been  repeated,  the  ensign's  rank,  the 
general  guides  of  each  battalion,  the  captains,  covering  ser- 
geants, and  file  closers,  will  conform  to  what  has  been  pre- 
scribed in  the  drill  of  battalion. 

The  brigadier  general  will  then  order, 

3  March. 

The  line  will  march  in  retreat  by  the  same  principles  as  if 
it  advanced  with  the  tirst  rank  in  front. 


Article  VI. 
To  change  the  Direction  -when  Marching  in  Retreat, 

When  the  line  is  retreating,  if  the  commander  deems  it 
necessary  to  change  the  direction,  so  as  to  withdraw  either 
wing,  the  movement  is  executed  upon  the  same  principles  as 
when  the  line  is  advancing,  and  by  the  same  words  of  com- 
mand. 

The  battalion  on  the  pivot  flank,  will  march  four  paces  over 
the  new  line,  and  be  halted  by  the  lieutenant  colonel;  he  will 
bring  it  to  the  right  about,  and  establish  it  on  the  markers  by 
the  means  prescribed,  ordering, 

1  Colours  and  general  guides  on  the  line. 

2  Guides  on  the  line. 

3  On  the  centre  dress. 

The  other  battalions  will  respectively  cross  the  line  four 
paces,  come  to  the  right  about,  and  be  formed  on  the  line  in 
a  similar  manner. 

When  the  last  battalion  is  formed  upon  the  line,  the  bri- 
gadier general  will  order, 

Colours  to  your  posts. 


143 

Article  VII. 

Tojire  xvhen  Retreating  in  Line, 

When  the  line  marching  in  retreat  is  to  fire,  the  brigadier 
general  will  command, 

Fire  by  battalion  retreating. 

This  command  having  been  repeated,  the  brigadier  gene- 
ral will  order, 

Odd  battalions,  commence  firing. 

This  order  having  been  repeated,  the  lieutenant  colonels 
of  the  odd  battalions  only,  will  halt  their  battalions,  and  face 
them  to  the  right  aboutj  these  battalions  will,  by  command 
of  their  respective  lieutenant  colonels,  fire  by  battalion,  load, 
face  to  the  right  about,  retire  in  quick  time,  join  the  even 
battalions,  and  then  march  in  ordinary  time. 

During  this  time,  the  even  battalions  march  in  retreat  ia 
ordinary  time.  The  lieutenant  colonel  of  each  of  these  bat- 
talions will  halt,  and  face  it  to  the  right  about,  so  soon  as  the 
odd  battalion  on  its  proper  right  (now  its  left)  shall  have  re- 
joined it,  the  even  battalions  will  in  their  turn,  by  command 
of  their  lieutenant  colonels,  fire,  load,  face  to  the  right  about, 
and  retire  in  quick  time,  to  join  the  odd  battalions;  when 
they  will  resume  the  step  in  ordinary  time. 

The  battalions  odd  and  even,  will  halt,  face  about,  and  fire 
alternately  in  this  manner. 

In  firing  by  battalions  retreating,  the  ensigns  rank  and 
general  guides  will  not  resume  their  places,  when  the  word 
*'  halt"  is  given  to  their  battalions,  to  stop  the  retreat  pre- 
vious to  firing;  nor  will  they  face  to  the  front;  but  they  will 
wait  until  the  fire  is  executed. 

The  odd  battalions  will  regulate  themselves  by  the  nearest 
odd  battalions  on  the  side  of  direction,  as  to  the  time  of  halt- 
ing. The  even  battalions  will  observe,  with  regard  to  eacli 
other,  the  same  rule. 

The  brigadier  general  will  cause  a  roll  of  the  drum  to  be 
beat,  as  a  signal  to  cease  firing;  and  on  this  signal,  the  bat- 
talions which  have  fired  will  load,  and  each  will  either  mark 
time,  or  march  in  quick  time,  as  may  be  necessary  to  joia 
and  drQss  with  the  regulating  battalion. 


144 

Article  VIII. 
To  pass  a  Defile  to  the  Front. 

When  the  line  is  marching  to  the  front,  and  meets  with  a 
defile  which  is  to  be  passed,  the  movement  will  be  executed 
in  the  following  manner. 

The  brigadier  general  will  halt  the  line  near  the  defile, 
and  give  the  following  orders, 

The  line  will  pass  the  defile  to  the  front. 

This  order  having  been  repeated,  he  will  come  to  the  bat- 
talion immediately  opposite  to  the  defile,  and  send  an  order 
to  the  lieutenant  colonels  of  the  battalions  next  to  it  on  the 
right  and  left,  to  wheel  their  battalions  by  platoons,  that  on 
the  right  to  the  left,  and  that  on  the  left  to  the  right;  all  the 
other  battalions  will  wheel  by  platoons  in  the  like  manner. 

The  two  platoons  immediately  opposite  to  the  defile,  will, 
by  order  of  the  lieutenant  colonel  of  the  battalion,  move  for- 
ward to  the  distance  of  a  company,  and  the  platoons  on  the 
right  and  left  will  wheel,  those  on  the  right  to  the  left,  and 
those  on  the  left  to  the  right;  the  officer  of  the  right  platoon 
which  has  moved  forward,  will  order  "  guide  to  the  left," 
And  the  officer  of  the  left  platoon  will  order  "  guide  to  the 
*'  right;"  the  guides  will  place  themselves  accordingly. 

The  brigadier  general  will  then  order, 

1  Column,  forward. 

This  command  having  been  repeated,  the  lieutenant  colo- 
nels of  battalions  which  have  wheeled  to  the  left,  will  order, 
*' guide  to  the  right;"  and  those  of  battalions  which  have 
wheeled  to  the  right,  will  order  "  guide,  to  the  left."  The 
brigadier  general  will  order, 

2  March. 

Upon  this  word  of  command,  quickly  repeated,  the  two 
platoons  opposite  the  defile  will  advance,  dressing  by  their 
guides  in  the  centre;  the  two  columns  will  march  towards 
each  other;  the  corresponding  platoons  will  wheel,  one  to  the 
right,  the  other  to  the  left,  so  as  to  unite  as  they  enter  the 
defile;  the  officer  commanding  the  platoon  on  the  right  will 
order,  "  guide  to  the  left;"  the  officer  commanding  the  pla- 


145 

toon  on  the  left  will  command  "  guide  to  the  right,"  and  the 
two  platoons  will  march  by  their  guides  in  the  centre.  Thej' 
will  march  by  the  cadenced  step,  and  preserve  platoon  dis- 
tance. The  officers  commanding  platoons  will  march  before 
the  centres  of  their  respective  platoons. 

If  the  defile  becomes  narrower,  the  commanding  officer  of 
each  platoon  will  break  off  files  from  the  outward  flank;  they 
will  themselves  take  the  places  of  their  guides,  who  will  fall 
back  to  the  second  rank,  and  a  file  closer  of  each  platoon 
will  place  himself  on  the  third  rank,  in  the  rear  of  the  officer 
and  guide.  They  will  bring  the  files  to  the  front  again  as 
soon  as  the  ground  will  admit. 

As  the  column  clears  the  defile,  each  captain  of  a  company 
will  order  the  rear  platoon  of  his  company  to  move  up,  and 
with  the  front  platoon  form  the  company.  The  companies 
thus  formed,  and  united  two  and  two  into  divisions,  will  con- 
tinue to  march  by  the  guides  in  the  centre. 

If  the  brigadier  general  should  deem  it  necessary  to  dis- 
play immediately  on  coming  out  of  the  defile,  he  will  halt 
the  head  of  the  column  when  he  supposes  there  is  a  sufficient 
space  between  it  and  the  defile  to  contain  the  whole  of  each 
column,  in  close  column.  He  will  direct  the  lieutenant 
colonels  that  they  are  to  move  up  into  close  column.  The 
companies  will  march  up  until  halted  by  their  respective 
captains,  at  three  paces  distance  from  each  other,  two  com- 
panies forming  a  division,  dressing  by  its  centre.  When  the 
whole  have  arrived  in  close  column,  the  brigadier  general 
will  display  the  line. 

Should  the  commander  think  proper  to  form  the  line 
fronting  to  the  right,  so  that  the  right  of  the  line  would  rest 
at  the  defile,  he  will  halt  the  columns  at  the  instant  when 
the  rear  platoon  of  the  right  column  has  cleared  the  defile; 
the  right  column  will  then  wheel  to  the  right  in  line;  and  the 
left  column  will  form  line  on  its  right,  by  marching  on  in  the 
rear  of  the  right  wing,  wheeling  and  dressing  in  succession, 
by  platoons  or  companies,  into  line. 

To  form  the  line  fronting  to  the  left  flank,  the  left  column 
would  wheel  to  the  left  into  line,  and  the  right  column  would 
form  the  line  on  the  left,  by  successive  wheeling  of  platoons, 
or  companies. 

Should  the  defile  be  opposite  to  the  interval  between  two 
battalions,  those  on  the  right  would  all  wheel  by  platoons  to 
the  left,  and  those  on  the  left  would  all  wheel  by  platoons 
to  the  right;  the  two  columns  would  march  and  meet  each 

T 


146 

other;  and  at  distance  of  a  company,  the  leading  platoons 
would  wheel,  the  one  to  the  right,  the  other  to  the  left,  unite, 
and  enter  the  delile  as  has  been  explained. 

Should  the  defde  be  opposite  to  the  right  or  to  the  left 
battalion  of  the  line,  the  brigadier  general  will  cause  the 
whole  to  wheel  forward  by  companies  to  the  right  or  to  the 
left,  and  put  it  in  march  to  pass  the  defile  in  a  single  column, 
with  the  right  or  the  left  in  front,  and  the  leading  company 
will  march  directly  to  the  entrance  of  the  defile. 


Article  IX. 

To  pass  a  Defile  to  the  Rear. 

When  a  line  retreating  meets  with  a  defile  thi"ough  which 
it  must  pass,  the  brigadier  general  will  halt  it  near  the  defile, 
face  it  to  the  front,  and  order, 

By  the  two  wings,  pass  the  defile  to  the  rear. 

This  order  having  been  repeated,  the  lieutenant  colonel  of 
the  battalion  on  the  right,  will  order. 

By  the  right  wing,  pass  the  defile  to  the  rear. 

The  lieutenant  colonel  of  the  battalion  on  the  left,  will 
order. 

By  the  left  wing,  pass  the  defile  to  the  rear. 

The  two  battalions  on  the  flanks  immediately  commence 
the  movement,  conforming  to  what  has  been  prescribed  in 
the  drill  of  the  battalion;  and  when  the  leading  flank  of  each 
of  them  has  arrived  opposite  to  the  defMe,  they  will  wheel 
by  files  to  enter  the  defile  together.  The  following  battalions 
will  execute  the  same  movement.  The  lieutenant  colonel  of 
each  battalion,  shall  give  the  order  in  such  time  that  the  lead- 
ing file  of  his  battalion  may  be  six  paces  in  the  rear  of  the 
last  file  of  the  preceding  battalion. 

The  leading  files  of  the  corresponding  battalions  of  the 
two  wings  of  the  line,  shall  enter  the  defile  together. 

If  the  defile  will  admit  of  the  nrarch  of  a  company,  co- 
lumns of  platoons  will  be  formed  from  file,  on  entering  the 
defile;  and  will  march  as  explained  in  the  preceding  article. 

This  movement  will  commence  by  the  direction  of  the 
brigadier  general,  and  be  executed  successively  as  the  com- 
panies enter  the  defile. 


147 

The  head  of  each  column  having  cleared  the  defile,  the 
platoons  will  successively  form  companies  as  directed  in  the 
preceding  article;  and  if  the  brigadier  general  would  form 
the  line  fronting  to  the  defile,  he  will  direct  the  left  column 
to  change  its  direction  to  the  left,  and  the  right  column  to 
change  its  direction  to  the  right,  halting  each  at  the  instant 
when  the  last  company  has  wheeled  into  the  direction;  the 
left  column  will  then  wheel  to  the  left  into  line,  and  the 
right  column  to  the  right  into  line;  or  one  of  them  may 
countermarch,  and  the  whole  wheel  together  into  line. 

Should  the  defile  not  be  immediately  behind  the  centre  of 
the  line,  so  many  battalions  on  the  one  wing  as  exceed  the 
number  of  the  battalions  on  the  other,  will  first  pass  the  de- 
file in  single  column. 

When  the  defile  is  situated  behind  a  battalion  on  the  ex- 
tremity of  one  of  the  wings  of  the  line,  it  will  not  be  passed 
from  both  wings;  but  only  from  the  wing  mosc  distant  from 
the  defile;  the  battalion  immediately  before  the  passage  being 
always  the  last  to  enter  it. 


Article  X. 
Changes  of  Fro  Jit. 

Changes  of  front  will  be  effected  by  the  methods  prescribed 
for  forming  "  to  the  front  in  line,"  and  for  forming  "  faced 
*'  to  the  rear  in  line,"  as  will  be  explained. 

We  will  suppose  that  the  brigadier  general  desires  to 
change  front  perpendicularly  on  the  centre  of  the  line,  by 
throwing  forward  the  left  wing;  he  will  cause  two  markers 
to  be  placed  before  the  right  flank  of  the  third  battalion,  at 
company  distance;  and  the  captain  of  the  right  company  of 
that  battalion  will  be  apprised  that  when  the  movement  com- 
mences he  is  to  form  his  company  on  them. 

The  brigadier  general  will  then  command, 

1  Change  front  on  the  third  battalion,  the  left 
wing  thiown  forward. 

This  command  having  been  repeated,  he  will  send  an 
order  to  the  lieutenant  colonel  of  the  fourth  battalion,  to 
form  a  column  of  companies  by  wheeling  to  the  right;  and 
he  will  send  an  order  to  the  lieutenant  colonel  of  the  second 
battalion  to  form  a  column  of  companies  by  wheeling  to  the 
left;  this  will  also  be  executed  bv  the  first  battalion. 


148 

The  third  battalion  will  stand  fast. 

When  the  brigadier  general  observes  that  the  battalions 
have  formed  columns,  he  will  send  an  order  to  the  lieutenant 
colonel  of  the  fourth  battalion  to  command, 

1  To  the  front  in  line. 

2  Battalion,  head  of  column  to  the  left. 

Also  an  order  to  the  lieutenant  colonel  of  the  first  batta- 
lion to  command, 

1  Form  the  line  faced  to  the  rear. 

2  Battalion,  head  of  column  to  the  left. 

Also  an  order  to  the  lieutenant  colonel  of  the  second  bat- 
talion to  command, 

1  Form  the  line  faced  to  the  rear. 

2  Battalion,  by  the  left  flank. 

3  To  the  left  face. 

And  he  will  direct  the  lieutenant  colonel  of  the  third  bat- 
talion to  command, 

1  Change  front  forward  on  the  first  company. 

2  By  company,  half  wheel  to  the  right. 

The  brigadier  general  will  then  command, 
2  March. 

Upon  this  word,  quickly  repeated,  the  general  movement 
commences.  The  third  battalion  will  execute  the  "  change 
"  of  front"  as  has  been  explained  in  the  drill  of  battalion. 
The  second  will  form  "  facing  to  the  rear  in  line."  The 
fourth  will  march  diagonally  to  the  front  to  its  place  in  the 
new  direction,  and  form  "  to  the  front  in  line."  And  the  first 
will  march  diagonally  to  the  rear  to  its  place  in  the  new  di- 
rection, and  form  '■'■  facing  to  the  rear  in  line." 

A  change  of  front  on  the  centre,  by  throwing  forward  the 
right  wing,  as  also  changes  of  front  on  either  flank  of  the 
line,  will  be  executed  upon  the  same  principles. 

Chang'e  of  Front  by  txvo  Lines. 

When  two  lines  are  formed  one  in  the  rear  of  the  other, 
and  are  to  change  front  forward  or  to  the  rear,  perpendicu- 
larly or  obliquely,  upon  the  extremity  of  the  right  or  left 


149 

wing,  or  on  any  other  battalion  of  the  first  line,  the  move- 
ment will  be  executed  in  the  following  manner. 

Changing  the  Front  perpendicularly  fonvard  on  the  Extre- 
mity of  the  Right  Wing  of  the  First  Line. 

We  will  supposfe  each  line  to  consist  of  four  battalions, 
and  that  the  immediate  commander  of  the  first  line  com- 
mands the  whole. 

The  commander  in  chief  will  send  to  the  commander  of 
the  second  line  information  that  the  first  line  is  about  to 
change  front  perpendicularly  forward  on  the  extremity  of  it,s 
right. 

Movement  of  the  First  Line. 

The  commander  in  chief  will  wheel  forward  to  the  right, 
the  company  on  the  right  of  the  first  line,  and  establish  it  on 
the  new  direction;  he  will  then  cause  that  line  to  change 
front  forward  on  this  company,  by  the  words  of  command 
and  methods  of  proceeding  prescribed  in  this  article. 

Movetiient  of  the  Second  Line. 

The  commander  of  the  second  line  being  informed  of  the 
movement  about  to  be  executed  by  the  first,  will  go  to  the 
company  on  the  right  of  the  second  battalion  of  his  line,  and 
wheel  it  forward  to  the  right,  so  as  to  stand  on  a  line  perpen- 
dicular to  its  original  direction;  he  will  then  cause  the  se- 
cond line  to  execute  a  central  change  of  front  on  this  com- 
pany, by  throwing  forward  all  to  the  left  of  it  in  the  original 
line,  and  throwing  the  first  battalion  to  the  rear,  by  the  modes 
of  proceeding  prescribed  in  this  article. 

Change  of  Front  perpendicidarly  to  the  Rear,  upon  the  Extre- 
mity of  the  Right  Wing  of  the  First  Line. 

The  commander  in  chief  will  send  to  the  commander  of 
the  second  line  information,  that  the  first  line  is  about  to 
change  front  perpendicularly  to  the  rear,  upon  the  extremity 
of  its  right  wing. 

Movement  of  the  First  Line. 

The  commander  of  the  first  line  will  establish  the  com- 
pany on  the  right  of  that  line  in  a  direction  perpendicular  to 
that  on  which  it  stood,  to  the  rear  of  the  line,  and  facing  to 
the  left.  He  will  then  cause  the  line  to  change  front  to  the 


150 

rear  on  this  company  by  the  words  of  command  and  methods 
of  proceeding  already  prescribed. 

Movement  of  the  Second  Line* 

The  commander  of  the  second  line  having  been  informed 
of  the  movement  about  to  be  executed  by  the  first,  will  de- 
tach an  aid-de-camp  to  the  right,  who  will  pursue  the  direc- 
tion of  the  line,  and  having  gone  so  far  as  to  allow  the  length 
of  a  battalion  and  an  interval  from  its  right  flank,  will  take 
post  to  mark  the  point  where  the  right  of  the  second  line  is 
to  rest.  When  this  point  is  ascertained,  the  commander  af 
the  second  line  will  order  it  to  wheel  forward  to  the  right 
into  open  column  of  companies,  and  cause  it  to  form  in  line 
parallel  to  the  direction  about  to  be  taken  by  the  first  line,  by 
the  methods  of  proceeding,  and  words  of  command  pre- 
scribed for  forming  a  column  faced  to  the  rear  in  line;  with 
this  tliiference,  that  at  the  word  "  march,"  at  the  commence- 
ment of  the  movement,  the  leading  battalion  will  march  in 
column  directly  towards  the  aid-de-camp,  and  will  be  halted 
at  the  distance  of  a  company  from  the  spot  where  he  is 
posted.  This  battalion  will  then  form  "  faced  to  the  rear  in 
*'  line,"  by  the  means  prescribed  in  the  drill  of  the  battalion; 
and  all  the  other  battalions  will  move  diagonally  in  columns 
toward  the  rear,  to  their  places  in  the  new  direction,  and 
form  facing  to  the  rear  in  line. 

Changes  of  front  forward,  or  to  the  rear,  on  the  extremity 
of  the  left  wing,  will  be  executed  on  the  same  principles. 

Changing  the  Front  perpendicularly  on  the  Centre  of  the  First 
LiJie,  the  Left  Wing  throxun  forward. 

The  commander  in  chief  having  caused  the  commander  of 
the  second  line  to  be  informed  of  the  movement  about  to  be 
executed  by  the  first,  will  himself  proceed  to  the  right  com- 
pany of  the  third  battalion. 

Movement  of  the  First  Lifie. 

The  commander  in  chief  will  cause  the  right  company  of 
the  third  battalion  to  be  wheeled  to  the  right,  and  established 
on  a  direction  perpendicular  to  the  line.  He  will  then  order 
a  central  change  of  front  to  be  executed  on  this  company,  by 
throwing  the  left  wing  forward,  and  the  right  wing  to  the 
lear,  by  the  words  of  command  and  means  which  have  been 
prescribed. 


151 


Movement  of  the  Second  Line. 

The  commander  of  the  second  line  having  been  informed 
of  the  movement  about  to  be  executed  by  the  first  line,  will 
proceed  to  his  fourth  battalion,  and  cause  the  company  on  its 
right  to  be  wheeled  forward  to  the  right,  and  established  on 
a  direction  perpendicular  to  the  line.  He  will  then  cause  the 
second  line  to  execute  a  central  change  of  front  on  this  com- 
pany, throwing  the  left  wing  forward,  and  the  right  wing  to 
the  rear,  by  the  words  of  command  and  means  which  have 
been  prescribed. 

Central  changes  of  front,  the  right  wing  thrown  forward, 
will  be  executed  on  the  same  principles,  upon  any  battalion 
of  the  first  line. 

Changing  the  Front  obliquely  forruard  upon  the  Extrejnity  of 
the  Right  Wing  of  the  First  Line. 

The  commander  in  chief  will  come  to  the  right  flank  of 
the  first  line,  and  will  select  an  object  in  front  of  the  left, 
which  will  be  a  point  of  direction  on  the  left  of  the  new  line. 

The  major  will  at  the  same  time,  by  direction  of  the  com- 
mander in  chief,  place  himself  in  front  of,  and  close  to  the 
right  hand  file  of  this  battalion,  facing  to  the  left;  he  will 
march  fifty  paces  along  the  front,  halt,  face  to  the  front  and 
march  directly  forward  on  a  line  perpendicular  to  that  on 
which  the  battalion  stands,  in  ordinary  time,  counting  the 
paces,  and  will  be  halted  by  the  commander  in  chief  placed 
on  the  right  at  the  instant  when  he  covers  the  object  in  front 
of  the  left  which  was  selected  on  the  point  of  direction  on 
the  left  of  the  new  line.  The  major  remains  steady  in  his 
place,  and  the  commander  in  chief  being  informed  of  the 
number  of  paces  which  the  major  marched  to  the  front  of  his 
battalion  will  cause  the  commander  of  the  second  line  to  be 
informed  of  the  nature  of  the  movement  which  the  first  line 
is  about  to  execute,  and  also  of  the  number  of  paces  which 
the  major  of  the  battalion  on  the  right  has  taken  to  the  front. 
We  will  suppose  the  number  to  be  sixty. 

Movement  of  the  First  Line. 

The  commander  in  chief  will  cause  two  markers  with 
bannerols,  at  the  distance  of  a  company,  to  be  placed  on  the 
new  direction  before  the  right  company  of  the  first  line,  and 
will  cause  that  company  to  be  wheeled  forward  to  the  right, 


152 

and  established  on  the  new  direction.  He  will  then  cause  the 
whole  of  the  first  line  to  change  front  forward  on  that  com- 
pany, by  thf  words  of  command  and  modes  of  proceeding  al- 
ready prescribed. 

Movement  of  the  Second  Line, 

The  commander  of  the  second  line  having  been  informed 
of  the  movement  to  be  executed  by  the  first  Ime,  and  of  the 
number  of  paces  taken  by  the  major  of  the  right  battalion  of 
that  line  to  the  front,  will  come  to  the  right  of  the  second 
line,  and  order  the  major  of  the  first  battalion  to  place  him- 
self close  to  and  in  front  of  the  right  hand  file  of  his  batta- 
lion, to  march  fifty  paces  along  the  front,  and  sixty  paces 
forward  on  a  line  perpendicular  to  that  on  which  the  batta- 
lion stands,  to  ascertain  the  direction  for  the  second  line, 
parallel  to  that  of  the  first  line. 

The  major  of  the  battalion  on  the  right  of  the  second  line 
having  executed  this  order,  the  commander  will  cause  the 
right  company  of  that  line  to  be  wheeled  forward  and  estab- 
lished on  the  new  direction;  and  he  Avill  then  cause  the  whole 
of  the  second  line  to  change  front  forward  on  the  right  com- 
pany, by  the  commands  and  means  which  have  been  pre- 
scribed. 

Changes  of  front  obliquely  forward  on  the  extremity  of  the 
left  wing,  or  obliquely  to  the  rear  on  the  extremity  of  either 
wing,  or  obliquely  on  the  centre,  with  either  wing  thrown  for- 
ward, are  all  executed  on  similar  principles. 

Remarks  on  Changes  of  Front  by  two  Lines. 

In  all  changes  of  front  by  two  lines,  the  commander  in 
chief  will  be  careful  not  to  give  the  word  "march,"  for  the 
execution  of  the  general  movement,  until  he  sees  the  second 
line  quite  ready  to  follow  it;  and  the  commander  of  the 
second  line  will  commence  the  movement  at  the  same  time 
that  he  observes  it  is  commenced  by  the  first  line. 

In  changing  the  front  perpendicularly,  the  basis  of  the 
alignment  of  the  second  line,  should  be  taken  at  the  distance 
of  battalion  and  an  interval,  more  to  the  right  or  left  than 
that  of  the  first  line. 

In  oblique  changes  of  front,  the  basis  of  the  alignment  of 
the  second  line  should  be  fixed  on  the  company  which  ex- 
actly corresponds  with  that  on  which  the  first  line  changes 
front. 

The  commander  of  the  second  line  will  observe  the  direc<» 


153 

tion  of"  the  two  lines  when  two  battalions  of  his  line  are  form- 
ed; and  if  he  perceives  that  they  are  not  parallel,  he  will  ad- 
vance or  throw  back  the  colours  already  on  the  line;  and  all 
the  battalions  will  dress  accordingly. 

If  after  an  oblique  change  of  front,  the  commander  in 
chief  should  deem  it  necessary  to  reestablish  the  interval  be- 
tween the  two  lines,  he  will  send  an  order  to  the  commander 
of  the  second  line,  who  will  face  his  line  to  the  right  about, 
march  it  to  the  rear,  and  cause  it  to  resume  its  proper  dis- 
tance. 

As  the  flanks  will  not  correspond  after  an  oblique  change 
of  front,  the  commander  in  chief  may  order  the  second  line 
to  form  the  open  column  by  filing  by  companies  to  the  rear, 
and  march,  to  bring  the  flanks  even.  Or  if  circumstances  will 
not  admit  of  this,  a  battalion  may  be  marched  from  one  flank 
of  the  second  line  to  the  other. 


Article  XL 
Of  Echellon  Movements. 

Echellons  are  formed  either  to  advance  from  a  position  sup' 
.posed  to  be  parallel  to  that  of  the  enemy;  or  to  quit  a  position 
supposed  to  be  oblique,  and  to  take  one  parallel  with  the  po- 
sition of  the  enemy.  They  may  be  formed  from  the  right  or 
left;  and  may  consist  each  of  a  battalion,  regiment,  or  bri^ 
gade. 

On  the  first  Supposition. 

The  line  being  supposed  to  be  parallel  to  the  position  of 
the  enemy,  the  brigadier  general  intending  that  the  line  shall 
advance  in  echellons  of  battalions  from  the  right  flank,  will 
command, 

1  Echellons  by  battalion,  one  hundred  paces. 

This  order  having  been  repeated,  the  brigadier  general 
will  command, 

2  By  the  right,  to  the  front,  form  echellons. 

This  order  having  been  repeated,  the  lieutenant  colonel 
of  the  right  battalion  will  command, 

Battalion,  forward. 
March. 


154 

At  the  first  word  of  command,  the  ensign's  rank  and  ge- 
neral guides  advance  six  paces.  At  the  second  command,  the 
battalion  marches  to  the  front. 

The  following  echellons  toward  the  left  will  march  in  suc- 
cession, each  lieutenant  colonel  counting  the  paces  of  the 
preceding  echellon,  and  giving  the  word  "■  march,"  when  the 
number  is  one  hundred. 

A  non-commissioned  officer  of  the  right  company  of  each 
battalion,  will  be  posted  perpendicularly  behind  the  left  file 
of  the  preceding  echellon,  and  shall  march  exactly  in  the 
steps  of  that  file,  dressing  by  his  own  battalion,  in  order  to 
preserve  the  interval,  and  the  parallelism  of  the  march  to  the 
front. 

Echellons  are  formed  from  the  left  flank,  on  the  same 
principles. 

When  the  brigadier  general  desires  to  form  the  line  again, 
he  will  halt  the  first  echellon,  dress  the  colours  and  genera! 
guides,  commanding, 

1  Colours  and  general  guides  on  the  line. 

2  Guides  on  the  line. 

These  orders  having  been  repeated  by  the  lieutenant  co- 
lonel of  the  first  battalion,  and  executed,  the  lieutenant  co- 
lonel will  then  order. 

On  the  centre  dress. 

The  following  echellons  will  continue  to  march  to  the 
front,  and  will  be  halted  successively  as  they  arrive  within 
four  paces  of  the  line  to  be  formed  on.  The  lieutenant  co- 
lonel of  each  will  dress  it  on  the  line  correctly,  by  the  words 
of  command  which  have  just  been  prescribed. 

Each  lieutenant  colonel  will  order,  "  guides  to  your  posts," 
as  soon  as  his  battalion  is  dressed  on  the  line;  but  the  ensign 
with  the  colours,  and  the  general  guides,  will  remain  on  the 
line,  until  the  brigadier  general,  observing  that  the  last  bat- 
talion is  dressed,  gives  the  order, 

Colours  to  your  posts. 

Each  battalion  may  commence  firing  as  it  arrives  on  the 
line,  by  battalion,  wings,  companies,  or  files.  In  this  case 
the  general  guides  will  retire;  but  the  colours  will  remain  on 
the  line  until  all  the  battalions  are  formed. 

The  line  may  also  retreat  by  direct  echellons.  To  effect 
this  the  brigadier  general  will  order. 


155 

1  Echellons  by  battalion,  one  hundred  paces. 
This  order  having  been  repeated,  he  will  command, 

2  By  the  right,  in  retreat,  form  echellons. 

This  command  having  been  repeated,  the  lieutenant  co- 
lonel of  the  first  battalion  will  face  it  to  the  right  about,  and 
march  it  off  to  the  rear. 

When  the  first  battalion  has  marched  sixty  paces  to  the 
rear,  the  lieutenant  colonel  of  the  second  will  face  it  to  the 
right  about,  and  cause  it  to  march  at  the  instant  when  the 
preceding  battalion  shall  have  marched  the  required  distance. 

Each  of  the  other  battalions  will  be  marched  off  in  the  like 
manner. 

When  the  brigadier  general  desires  to  form  the  line  again 
he  will  direct  the  lieutenant  colonel  of  the  first  battalion  to 
halt,  front,  and  dress  it  in  line. 

The  following  battalions  will  be  halted  successively  when 
they  have  passed  the  line  about  four  paces,  brought  to  the 
right  about,  and  dressed  in  line. 

On  the  Second  Supposition. 

The  direction  of  the  line  being  supposed  to  be  oblique  to 
the  position  of  the  enemy,  if  the  brigadier  general  desires  to 
form  echellons  parallel  to  the  enemy's  line,  the  movement 
will  be  executed  in  the  following  manner. 

If  the  right  flank  is  nearest  to  the  enemy,  the  brigadier 
general  will  come  to  that  flank,  and  by  the  method  prescri- 
bed in  the  direction  for  "  changing  the  front  obliquely  for- 
ward," under  article  the  tenth  of  this  part,  determine  a  new 
direction  supposed  to  be  parallel  with  the  position  of  the 
enemy;  and  the  major  will  proceed  to  measure  the  angle,  as 
has  been  directed. 

We  will  suppose  that  the  number  of  paces  the  major  has 
taken  to  the  front,  to  measure  the  angle  of  the  old  and  new 
direction,  is  sixty. 

The  brigadier  general  will  send  an  order  to  the  lieuten- 
ant colonel  of  each  battalion  to  change  front  forward  on  the 
right  company,  to  the  angle  given  by  sixty  paces  measured 
by  the  major  to  the  front,  in  the  manner  prescribed. 

This  order  being  executed,  and  the  echellons  formed, 
if  the  brigadier  general  wishes  them  to  form  closer  to- 
2,ether,  he  will  give  an  order  to  that  effect,  and  prescribe  the 


156 

distance.  The  first  echellon  will  stand  fast,  and  the  comman- 
der of  each  other  echellon  will  march  it  forward,  halting  at 
the  prescribed  distance  from  the  next  preceding  echellon. 
The  commander  will  immediately  dress  it,  and  command, 

1  Battalion,  forward. 

The  lieutenant  colonel  of  the  battalion  which  constitutes 
the  first  echellon,  will,  by  direction  of  the  brigadier  general 
march  it  off;  and  the  lieutenant  colonel  of  each  other  battalion, 
will,  as  soon  as  he  perceives  the  battalion  immediately  pre- 
ceding in  motion,  give  the  word, 

2  March. 

Each  battalion  will  march  at  the  prescribed  distance  from 
that  preceding  it.  A  non-commissioned  officer  from  this  bat- 
talion will  place  himself  in  rear  cif  the  file  of  the  colours  of 
the  preceding  battalion,  and  march  accurately  in  the  steps  of 
this  file,  dressing  by  the  front  rank  of  his  own  battalion,  to 
ensure  the  parallelism  of  the  march  of  the  echellon  to  the 
front. 

Should  the  left  flank  be  the  nearest  to  the  enemy,  echellons 
may  be  formed  from  the  left,  on  the  same  principles. 

Observations  on  this  Movemeyit, 

The  greater  the  angle  between  the  original  direction  and 
that  of  the  echellons,  the  more  they  will  cover  each  other; 
and  the  greater  will  be  the  space  between  them. 

Although  echellons  formed  in  this  manner  extend  behind 
each  other,  nevertheless,  by  several  methods  which  will  occur 
to  the  officer  who  has  made  himself  acquainted  with  this 
system,  the  line  may  be  again  formed. 


Article  XII. 
To  Retreat  in  Chequer. 

The  retreat  in  chequer  will  be  executed  by  the  odd  and 
iven  battalions  alternately,  as  will  be  explained. 
The  brigadier  general  will  order, 

1  Retreat  in  chequer,  one  hundred  paces. 


157 

This  order  having  been  repeated,  the  brigadier  general 
will  command, 

2  Odd  battalions,  commence  the  movement. 

This  command  having  been  repeated,  the  lieutenant  colo- 
nels of  the  odd,  or  right  hand  battalions,  will  command, 

1  Battalion,  to  the  right  about — face. 
This  command  being  executed,  they  will  order, 

2  Battalion,  forward. 
The  brigadier  general  will  order, 

3  March. 

At  this  word  of  command,  quickly  repeated  by  the  lieuten- 
ant colonels  of  the  battalions  which  have  faced  to  the  rear, 
they  will  step  off  in  v^ommon  time,  and  will  be  halted  by  their 
lieutenant  colonels  when  they  have  retired  the  requisite  num- 
ber of  paces. 

Each  lieutenant  colonel  having  halted  his  battalion,  will 
face  it  to  the  right  about,  and  dress  it  parallel  to  the  first  line, 
not  regarding  the  other  odd  battalions. 

As  soon  as  the  odd  battalions  have  fronted,  the  command- 
ant of  the  even  battalions  will  order, 

1  Battalion,  to  the  right  about — face. 

2  Battalion,  forward. 

These  orders  having  been  repeated  and  executed,  he  will 
command, 

3  March. 

The  line  of  even  battalions  will  pass  through  the  intervals 
in  the  line  of  odd  battalions,  march  one  hundred  paces  beyond 
it,  halt,  front,  and  dress  in  line,  as  has  been  explained. 

The  lines  of  odd  and  even  battalions  will  thus  retire 
through  each  other  alternately.  Each  ensign  will  direct  his 
march  for  the  middle  of  the  interval. 

When  the  brigadier  general  would  form  the  line  again,  he 
will  order  a  roll  of  the  drum,  which  will  be  repeated  by  the 
drums  of  each  battalion,  when  the  lieutenant  colonels  of  those 
battalions  which  are  hindmost,  will  halt  them  in  the  intervals 
of  those  which  were  foremost  in  retreat,  bring  them  to  the 
front,  and  dress  them  in  line.  If  necessary,  the  brigadier  ge- 
neral will  take  a  new  line. 


158 

If  a  battalion  should  evidently  be  considerably  out  of  the 
direction  of  the  other  battalions  of  the  same  line,  the  lieu- 
tenant colonel  will  cause  it  to  move  forward,  or  fall  back,  to 
its  proper  place. 

The  distance  between  the  lines  retiring,  is  never  to  be  less 
than  one  hundred  paces. 


Article  XIII. 

Passage  of  Lines. 

To  execute  the  passage  of  lines  in  retreat,  the  brigadier 
general  will  order  the  first  line  to  retreatj  and  when  it  shall 
have  arrived  within  fifty  paces  of  the  second  he  will  com- 
mand, 

1  By  the  left  flank,  pass  the  line. 

This  order  having  been  repeated,  the  lieutenant  colonels 
commanding  battalions  of  the  first  line  will  order, 

1  Battalion,  by  the  left  flank. 

2  By  company,  by  file  to  the  right. 

The  brigadier  general  will  then  order, 
2  Quick  time,  march. 

Upon  this  command,  quickly  repeated,  the  battalions  will ' 
execute  the  movement  as  prescribed  in  the  drill  of  battalion. 

The  commander  of  the  first  line  will  have  informed  the 
commander  of  the  second  line  of  the  movement  which  the 
first  is  about  to  execute.  The  latter  perceiving  the  approach 
of  the  first  line,  will,  in  sufficient  time  not  to  impede  the 
march  of  the  first  line,  order, 

1  Double  platoons. 

This  order  having  been  repeated,  the  lieutenant  colonels 
of  battalions  of  the  second  line,  will  command, 

1  Second  platoons,  by  the  right  flank. 

2  To  the  right  face. 

The  commander  of  the  second  line  will  then  command, 

2  March. 


159 

At  this  word,  quickly  repeated,  the  second  platoons  will 
double  behind  the  first,  as  directed  in  the  drill  of  the  bat- 
talion. 

When  the  first  line  has  passed,  the  lieutenant  colonels  of 
the  second  line  will,  without  waiting  for  an  order,  bring  the 
second  platoons  again  into  line,  by  the  words  of  command 
and  means  prescribed  in  the  drill  of  battalion. 

The  brigadier  general  will  halt  the  first  line,  when  it  has 
marched  to  such  a  distance  in  rear  of  the  second  as  he  deems 
sufficient;  the  companies  will  be  fronted  and  dressed;  and 
the  commander  having  arranged  the  guides,  will  wheel  the 
column  to  the  left  in  line. 

Should  the  brigadier  general  prefer  that  the  second  line 
should  advance  up  to  the  first,  rather  than  that  the  first  should 
retreat  to  the  second,  he  will  send  an  order  to  the  command- 
ant of  the  second  line  to  advance  with  his  line. 

The  line  will  advance;  and  when  it  arrives  at  the  distance 
of  fifty  paces  from  the  first,  the  commander  of  tlje  second 
will  order, 

1  Double  platoons. 

This  order  having  been  repeated,  the  commandant  of  the 
second  line  will  command, 

2  Second  platoons,  march. 

Upon  this  command,  quickly  repeated,  the  second  platoons 
will  double  behind  the  first,  as  directed  in  the  drill  of  bat- 
talion. 

The  commander  of  the  first  line,  upon  seeing  that  the  se*- 
cond  line  has  executed  that  movement,  will  order, 

1  By  the  right  flank,  pass  the  line. 

This  order  having  been  repeated,  the  lieutenant  colonels 
of  the  battalions  of  the  first  line  will  immediately  afterwards 
order, 

1  Battalion,  by  the  right  flank. 

2  To  the  right  face. 

3  By  company,  by  file  to  the  right. 

The  commander  of  the  first  line  will  then  ordec, 

2  Quick  time,  march. 

At  this  command,  quickly  repeated,  the  battalions  of  the 
first  line  will  pass  through  the  second,  as  directed  in  the  drill 
of  battalion. 


160 

When  the  battalions  of  the  first  line  shall  have  passed 
through  the  seccnd,  they  will  march  with  the  leading  flanks 
of  columns  correctly  dressed,  preserving  the  proper  distances 
and  intervals,  to  be  taken  from  the  left;  they  will  be  taken 
from  the  right,  when  the  companies  file  from  the  left.  So 
soon  as  the  first  line  has  passed  through  the  second,  the  com  - 
mandant  of  the  second  will  order, 

Form  the  line. 

This  order  having  been  repeated,  he  will  command, 

Second  platoons,  march. 

Upon,  this  command  quickly  repeated,  the  second  platoons 
move  up  into  line,  as  directed  in  the  drill  of  battalion. 

The  second  platoons  having  formed  up  into  line,  the  com- 
mandant of  the  second  line  will  halt  it,  unless  he  has  orders 
to  advance. 


Article  XIV. 

To  oppose  Cavalry. 

We  will  suppose  that  a  column  of  four  battalions  is  march- 
ing by  companies  with  the  right  in  front,  and  is  in  danger  of 
being  attacked  by  cavalry.  The  brigadier  general  will  order 
the  column  to  close  to  half  distance,  halt,  and  form  divisions; 
he  will  then  command. 

Form  the  column  against  cavalry. 

When  this  command  has  been  repeated,  the  brigadier  ge- 
neral will  cause  the  column  a  second  time  to  close  to  platoon 
distance.  The  lieutenant  colonels  of  the  three  rear  battalions, 
will  each  leave  between  his  battalion  and  that  which  precedes 
it,  about  thrice  platoon  distance.  The  cannon  of  the  batta- 
lions and  their  ammunition  carts  will  be  placed  opposite  to 
those  intervals. 

The  column  thus  prepared  vrill  be  put  in  march,  either  by 
the  route  step,  or  cadenced  step.  Marksmen  from  the  third 
rank  will  be  sent  out  on  the  flanks  to  fire  on  the  enemy; 
these  marksmen  will  keep  even  with  the  divisions  they  be- 
long to. 

When  it  is  perceived  that  the  cavalry  will  charge,  the 
marksmen  will  be  called  in;  the  brigadier  general  will  halt 
the  column,  and  command, 


161 


Form  the  square. 

This  order  having  been  repeated,  the  officer  who  com 
mands  the  second  division  of  the  leading  battalion,  will 
cause  it  to  close  within  one  pace  of  the  rank  of  file  closers 
of  the  preceding  division,  which  will  stand  fast.  The  second 
division  from  the  rear  of  the  column,  will  be  closed  up  to  the 
third  from  the  rear;  and  the  rear  division  will  be  closed  up 
to  the  second  division  from  the  rear  of  the  column. 

The  major  and  adjutant  of  the  leading  battalion  will  pro- 
ceed ten  paces  to  the  front,  and  dress  the  guides  on  those  of 
the  rear  division,  who  will  be  instructed  by  the  adjutant  of 
the  rear  battalion,  to  raise  their  firelocks  perpendicularly  be- 
fore their  eyes. 

The  guides  being  dressed,  the  brigader  general  will  order. 

By  platoons,  to  the  right  and  left  in  line  wheel. 

This  order  having  been  repeated,  the  officers  of  platoons, 
except  those  of  the  two  first  and  two  last  divisions,  will 
place  themselves  in  front  of  their  respective  platoons,  and  in- 
form them  how  they  are  to  wheel. 

The  brigadier  general  will  then  order, 

March. 

At  this  command,  quickly  repeated  by  lieutenant  colonels, 
and  by  the  captains  commanding  divisions,  except  the  two 
front  and  two  rear  divisions,  the  two  platoons  on  the  right  of 
each,  will  wheel  to  the  right  into  line;  and  the  two  platoons 
on  the  left  of  each  division,  excepting  those  mentioned,  will 
wheel  to  the  left  into  line.  The  officers  of  platoons  will  place 
themselves  on  the  line;  the  platoons  that  wheeled  to  the  right 
will  dress  to  the  left;  those  that  wheeled  to  the  left  will  dress 
to  the  right. 

The  two  divisions  at  the  head  of  the  column  are  to  stand 
fast;  the  two  divisions  forming  the  rear  of  the  square,  will, 
by  order  of  the  captains  commanding  them,  face  to  the  right 
about;  the  file  closers  passing  behind  the  first  rank,  now  in 
the  rear. 

If  there  is  a  flank  company  at  the  head  of  the  column,  and 
another  in  the  rear,  they  will  be  posted  in  platoons  so  as  to 
cover  the  flanks  of  the  two  front  and  two  rear  divisions. 

The  intervals  will  be  closed  up  with  the  carts  or  waggons, 
and  the  guns  posted  before  them. 

X 


162 
The  square  being  formed,  the  brigadier  general  will  order, 
Guides  to  your  posts. 

At  this  word,  to  be  repeated  by  the  lieutenant  colonels  of 
battalions,  the  guides  in  front  of  the  outward  platoons  take 
their  proper  places  in  line;  the  guides  of  platoons  that  wheeled 
to  the  right  into  line  will  post  themselves  on  the  right  of  their 
respective  platoons. 

The  captains  of  the  two  outward  divisions  at  the  front  and 
rear  faces  of  the  square,  will  take  their  proper  places  in  line; 
the  captains  of  the  two  inward  divisions  of  those  faces  of  the 
square  will  take  post  on  their  third  rank,  now  in  front. 

The  brigadier  general,  the  superior  officers,  the  majors., 
adjutants,  and  musicians,  will  be  within  the  square. 

The  brigadier  general  will  command. 

Fire  by  files. 

This  command  having  been  repeated,  he  will  order, 

Inward  platoons,  support  arms. 

The  inward  platoons  will  support  arms,  and  the  lieutenant 
colonels  will  order, 

Outward  platoons,  ready. 

The  brigadier  general  will  then  command. 

Commence  firing. 

At  this  command,  repeated  by  the  lieutenant  colonels,  the 
platoons  forming  the  flank  faces  of  the  oblong  square  will 
fire  by  files,  the  fire  commencing  from  the  right  of  platoons; 
the  outward  divisions  of  the  front  and  rear  faces  of  the  ob- 
long square,  will  also  fire  by  files,  commencing  from  the  right 
of  companies.  The  inward  platoons  remain  at  supported 
arms. 

Should  the  enemy  advance  to  the  charge,  the  brigadier 
general  will  command, 

Inward  platoons,  close  to  the  front. 

This  command  having  been  repeated  by  the  lieutenant 
colonels,  the  file  closers  of  the  outward  platoons  and  divisions 
will  come  within  the  inward  platoons  and  divisions.  The 
brigadier  general  will  then  order, 

March. 


163 

At  this  word,  quickly  repeated  by  the  lieutenant  colonels, 
the  inward  platoons  and  divisions  close  to  within  one  foot  of 
the  rear  rank  of  the  outward  platoons  and  divisions. 

Should  the  enemy  charge  in  order  to  break  the  square,  the 
outward  platoons  and  divisions  keep  up  the  fire  until  they 
are  very  near,  then  charge  bayonets  by  bringing  the  right 
knee  and  the  butt  of  the  musket  to  the  ground;  the  inward 
platoons  and  divisions  make  ready,  and  fire,  front  rank  stand- 
ing, aiming  well  at  the  dragoons,  and  charge  bayonet,  stand- 
ing firm. 

Should  the  firing  repulse  the  cavalry,  the  brigadier  general 
will  cause  it  to  cease  by  a  roll  of  the  drum;  the  outward 
platoons  and  divisions  will  load  and  shoulder. 

To  resume  the  march,  the  brigadier  general  will  order, 

1  Form  divisions. 

This  order  having  been  repeated,  the  lieutenant  colonels 
will  command, 

1  Battalion,  by  the  right  and  left  flank. 

2  To  the  right  and  left  face. 

3  Platoons,  by  file  to  the  right  and  left. 

At  the  first  command,  the  officers  of  platoons  of  the  flank 
faces  of  the  square,  caution  their  platoons  how  they  are  to 
face.  The  captains  commanding  the  two  divisions  forming 
the  front  face  of  the  square,  will  caution  them  to  stand  fast; 
and  those  commanding  the  two  divisions  forming  the  rear 
face  of  the  square,  will  caution  them  that  they  are  to  face  to 
the  right  about. 

At  the  second  command,  the  inward  and  outward  platoons 
of  the  right  flank  face  of  the  square,  will  face  to  the  left;  those 
of  the  left  flank  face,  will  face  to  the  right;  and  the  two  divi- 
sions of  the  rear  face  of  the  square,  will  face  to  the  right  about. 

At  the  third  command,  the  officers  of  platoons  of  the  two 
flank  faces  of  the  square,  will  inform  them  in  what  manner 
they  are  to  move. 

The  brigadier  general  will  then  command, 

2  March. 

At  this  word  of  command,  quickly  repeated  by  the  lieute- 
nant colonels,  the  platoons  of  the  right  flank  face  will  wheel  by 
files  to  the  left,  and  those  of  the  left  flank  face  will  wheel  by 
files  to  the  right;  the  two  inward  platoons  of  each  division 


164' 

will  march  towards  each  other,  and  will  be  halted  by  their 
officers  when  they  have  met;  each  outward  platoon  will  follow 
the  rear  file  of  the  inward  platoon  of  the  same  division,  and 
will  be  halted  by  its  officer,  as  soon  as  the  files  cover  accu- 
rately, at  proper  distance.  The  captain  commanding  the  di- 
vision will  then  order, 

1  Division. 

2  Front. 

Meantime  the  divisions  at  the  head  of  the  column, by  order 
of  the  captains  commanding  them,  will  take  platoon  distance; 
those  at  the  rear  will  take  distance  when  the  march  com- 
mences. 

If  platoons  of  grenadiers  flanked  the  divisions  at  the  front 
and  rear  of  the  column,  they  will,  while  the  square  is  reduc- 
ing, resume  their  situations  in  front  and  rear,  at  platoon 
distance. 

The  column  being  formed,  the  brigadier  general  will  put 
it  in  march. 


Observations  on  opposing  Cavalry. 

The  angles  of  the  square  may  be  covered  by  the  limbers 
of  the  artillery;  and  grenadiers,  light  infantry,  or  marksmen, 
may  be  posted  behind  them. 

Two  or  more  battalions  in  line,  threatened  with  being  sur- 
rounded, may  form  the  square  in  the  manner  described;  first 
forming  column  by  division,  at  platoon  distance,  upon  the 
centre  division,  the  right  or  left  in  front. 

Should  a  close  column  of  several  battalions  be  attacked 
by  cavalry,  the  two  leading  divisions  will  stand  fast,  the  two 
rear  divisions  will  face  to  the  right  about,  and  all  the  others 
would  face  outwards  to  the  right  and  left;  the  front  aad  rear 
divisions,  and  the  three  flank  files  of  the  other  divisions,  will 
fire  by  files. 

A  column  formed  of  one  battalion,  threatened  with  an  at- 
tack by  cavalry,  will  always  form  the  solid  square,  in  this 
manner. 

END  OF  THE  EVOLUTIONS  OF  THE  BRIGADE 


INSTRUCTION  FOR  INFANTRY. 

PART  THE  SECOND. 


SECTION  I. 

Of  the  March  of  an  Army. 

Article  I. 

The  Order  of  the  March, 

J  HE  order  for  the  inarch  of  an  army  being  given,  the  ad- 
jutant general  will  appoint  the  field  officers  for  the  advanc- 
ed and  rear  guards,  and  issue  orders  to  the  brigade  majors 
to  have  ready  their  respective  quotas  of  officers  and  men 
for  the  advanced  guard,  which  will  consist  of  the  number 
necessary  for  the  guards  of  the  new  camp.  These,  together 
with  a  pioneer  of  each  company,  and  a  sergeant  from  the  re- 
giment to  conduct  them,  will  be  warned  the  evening  before. 

At  the  beating  of  the  general,  the  troops  are  immediately 
to  strike  their  tents,  and  load  the  waggons,  which  will  then 
fall  into  the  line  of  march  for  the  baggage. 

At  this  signal  also,  all  guards  of  general  and  staff  officers, 
and  those  of  the  commissaries,  will  return  to  their  respective 
regiments. 

At  the  beating  of  the  assembly,  the  troops  will  assemble, 
and  be  formed  in  battalion  on  their  respective  parades. 

The  guards  ordered,  will  then  be  conducted  by  the  bri- 
gade majors,  or  adjutants  of  the  day,  to  the  rendezvous 
appointed  for  the  advanced  guard,  where  the  field  officers 
warned  for  that  duty,  will  form  them  in  battalions,  or  other 
corps,  according  to  their  strength,  and  divide  them  regularly 
into  subdivisions  and  platoons.  The  officer  commanding  the 
advanced  guard,  will  take  care  to  have  a  guide  with  him,  anr. 
to  get  every  necessary  information  of  the  road. 


166 

l"he  camp  guards  will  at  the  same  time  retire  to  the  ren- 
dezvous appointed  for  the  rear  guard,  where  they  will  be 
formed  in  the  same  manner. 

The  quarter-masters  and  pioneers  of  each  battalion  will 
assemble  on  the  ground  appointed  for  the  advanced  guard, 
where  one  of  the  deputies  of  the  quarter-master  general  will 
form  them  in  platoons,  in  the  same  order  as  their  respective 
battalions  march  in  the  column. 

Each  detachment  will  be  conducted  by  its  quarter-master, 
who  will  be  answerable  that  it  marches  in  the  order  prescri- 
bed; and  the  quarter-masters  of  brigades  will  conduct  those 
of  their  respective  brigades,  and  be  answerable  for  their 
behaviour. 

I'he  signal  for  marching  being  given,  the  whole  will  wheel 
by  companies,  and  begin  the  march,  breaking  off  as  may  be 
necessary. 

The  advanced  guard,  will  march  at  a  distance  from  the 
main  body  proportioned  to  its  strength,  having  a  patrole  ad- 
vanced; and  will  never  enter  any  defile,  wood,  &c.  without 
having  first  examined  it,  to  avoid  falling  into  an  ambuscade. 

The  pioneers  are  to  march  behind  the  advanced  guard,  and 
will  repair  the  roads,  that  the  column  may  be  obliged  to  file 
off  as  little  as  possible. 

The  advanced  guard,  besides  its  patroles  in  front,  will  have 
a  flank  guard,  composed  of  a  file  from  each  platoon,  and 
commanded  by  an  officer,  or  non-comissioned  officer,  to 
inarch  at  the  distance  of  one  hundred  paces  on  the  flank,  and 
keep  up  with  the  head  of  the  advanced  guard. 

If  it  be  necessary  to  have  a  flank  guard  on  each  side,  a 
file  will  be  sent  from  the  other  flank  of  each  platoon  to  com- 
pose it;  and  as  this  service  is  fatiguing,  the  men  should  be 
relieved  every  hour.  The  like  flank  guards  are  to  be  detached 
from  each  battalion  in  the  column. 

When  the  column  meets  with  a  defile,  or  any  obstacle,  the 
commanding  officer  will  stop  till  the  column  has  passed  it, 
taking  care  that  they  pass  in  as  great  order  and  as  quick  as 
possible,  and  when  one  half  have  marched  through,  he  will, 
if  necessary,  command  the  front  to  halt,  till  the  whole  have 
passed  and  formed,  when  he  will  coniinue  the  inarch. 

When  a  column  crosses  a  road  that  leads  to  the  enemy, 
the  patrolesor  guards  on  the  flanks  of  the  first  battalion  will 
form  on  the  road,  and  halt  till  the  patroles  of  the  next  bat- 
talion come  up,  which  will  do  the  same:  The  others  proceed 
in  the  same  manner,  till  the  whole  have  passed. 


1G7 

When  the  commanding  officer  thinks  proper  to  halt  on  the 
march,  the  advanced  flank  and  rear  guards  will  form  a  chain 
of  sentinels,  to  prevent  the  soldiers  from  straggling;  and  all 
necessaries,  as  wood,  water,  &c.  will  be  brought  by  detach- 
ments, as  in  camp. 

On  the  beating  the  long  roll,  the  whole  are  to  form  and 
continue  the  march. 

On  the  march  no  orders  are  to  be  communicated  by  calling 
out,  but  will  be  sent  by  the  adjutants  from  regiment  to  regi- 
ment. The  signals  for  halting,  marching  slower  and  quicker, 
will  be  given  by  beat  of  drum. 

The  commanding  officer  of  the  advanced  guard  being  in- 
formed by  the  quarter-master  general,  or  his  deputy,  of  the 
ground  the  troops  are  to  encamp  on,  will  go  a-head  and  re- 
connoitre it;  and  immediately  on  the  arrival  of  the  advanced 
guard,  post  his  guards  and  sentinels,  as  directed. 


Article  II. 
Of  the  Baggage  on  a  March, 

The  inconveniences  arising  to  an  army  from  having  too 
great  a  number  of  waggons,  must  be  evident  to  every  officer^ 
and  it  is  expected,  that  each  officer  will  curtail  his  baggage 
as  much  as  possible. 

The  order  of  march  for  the  army  will  always  determine 
that  for  the  baggage;  and  whatever  place  it  may  occupy  in 
the  line  of  march,  the  waggons  will  always  follow  in  the  same 
order  as  their  respective  regiments. 

The  quarter-master  general,  or  his  deputy,  will  give  the 
order  of  march  for  the  baggage;  and  the  commander  in  chief 
will  order  an  escort,  to  be  commanded  by  a  field  officer,  ac- 
cording to  its  strength. 

An  officer  of  each  battalion  will  be  appointed  to  superin- 
tend the  striking  of  the  tents,  and  loading  the  waggons;  he 
will  see  that  the  tents  are  properly  tied  up;  that  no  provi- 
sions or  other  articles  are  packed  in  them;  and  that  the  tent- 
poles  are  tied  in  a  bundle  by  themselves;  he  will  not  suffer  the 
waggons  to  be  overloaded,  or  any  thing  put  into  them  but 
what  is  allowed;  and  when  the  waggons  are  loaded,  he  will 
send  them  with  the  quarter-master  sergeant  to  the  rendez- 
vous of  the  brigade.   This  sergeant  is  to  remain  with  the 


168 

baggage  of  his  regiment,  to  see  that  the  waggons  follow  in 
order,  and  if  a  waggon  breaks  down  it  must  be  put  out  of  the 
way,  that  it  may  not  impede  the  march  of  the  rest. 

JEach  regiment  will  furnish  a  non-commissioned  officer  to 
conduct  the  sick  and  lame  who  are  not  able  to  march  with 
their  regiments.  These  men  are  to  repair,  at  the  beating  of 
the  general,  to  the  rendezvous  appointed,  where  a  sufficient 
number  of  empty  waggons  will  be  ordered  to  attend  for  the 
reception  of  their  knapsacks,  and  their  arms,  if  necessary.  A 
surgeon  of  each  brigade  is  to  attend  the  sick  belonging  to  it. 

The  surgeon  of  each  battalion  will  inspect  the  sick  before 
they  are  sent  from  the  battalion,  in  order  that  none  may  be 
sent  but  those  who  are  really  incapable  of  marching  with 
their  regiments.  And  the  officer  commanding  the  escort 
will  be  answerable,  that  no  other  soldiers  are  permitted  to 
march  with  the  baggage  on  any  pretence  whatever,  except 
the  quarter-master  sergeant  of  each  regiment,  as  before  di- 
rected. 

No  waggons  are  to  be  permitted  to  go  between  the  batta- 
lions or  brigades,  except  the  ammunition  waggons. 


SECTION  II. 

Duties  of  the  Camp. 

Article  I. 
Order  of  Encampment. 

When  the  quarter-masters  arrive  on  the  ground  where  the 
troops  are  to  encamp,  the  quarter-master  general  having  fixed 
his  line  of  encampment,  will  conduct  them  along  the  line, 
and  give  each  brigade  quarter- master  the  ground  necessary 
for  his  brigade. 

The  quarter-masters  of  regiments  will  then  have  their 
ground  given  them  by  the  brigade  quarter-masters,  and  will 
mark  out  the  place  for  each  company  and  tent,  and  for  the 
kitchens. 

The  infantry  will  on  all  occasions  encamp  by  battalions, 
t^s  they  are  formed  in  order  of  battle. 


169 

The  front  of  the  camp  will  occupy  the  same  extent  oi 
ground  as  the  troops  when  formed;  and  the  intervals  between 
the  battalions  will  be  twenty-four  paces,  with  an  addition  of 
eight  paces  for  every  piece  of  cannon  a  battalion  may  have. 

The  quarter-master  of  each  regiment  shall  be  answerable 
that  he  demands  no  more  ground  than  is  necessary  for  the 
number  of  men  he  has  actually  with  the  regiment,  allowing 
two  feet  for  each  file,  and  adding  sixteen  feet  for  the  inter- 
vals between  the  companies.  He  is  also  to  be  answerable  that 
no  more  tents  are  pitched  than  are  absolutely  necessary,  al- 
lowing one  tent  for  the  non-commissioned  officers  of  each 
company,  and  one  for  every  six  men,  including  the  musi- 
cians. 

The  tents  of  the  non-commissioned  officers  and  privates 
are  to  be  pitched  in  two  ranks,  with  an  interval  of  six  paces 
between  the  ranks,  and  two  feet  between  each  tent;  the  tents 
of  the  non-commissioned  officers  to  be  in  the  front  rank,  on 
the  right  of  their  companies.  Nine  feet  front  are  to  be  al- 
lowed for  each  tent  with  its  interval,  and  twenty  feet  in  the 
centre  of  the  battalion  for  the  adjutant. 

The  tents  of  the  company  officers  are  to  be  in  one  line, 
twenty  feet  from  the  rear  of  the  men's  tents;  the  captain's  op- 
posite to  the  right  of  the  company,  and  the  subaltern's  op- 
posite to  the  left. 

The  tents  of  the  field  officers  are  to  be  in  one  line,  thirty 
feet  from  the  line  of  the  tents  of  company  officers. 

The  surgeon,  pay-master  and  quarter-master,  encamp  in 
one  line,  with  the  front  of  their  tents  in  a  line  with  the  rear 
of  the  tents  of  the  field  officers;  the  surgeon  on  the  right,  pay- 
master on  the  left,  and  quarter-master  in  the  centre. 

The  kitchens  are  to  be  dug  behind  the  companies,  forty 
feet  from  the  tents  of  the  field  officers.  The  tents  of  the  sut- 
tlers  are  to  be  between  the  kitchens. 

The  horses  and  waggons  will  be  placed  in  a  line,  twenty 
feet  behind  the  kitchens. 

The  drums  of  each  battalion  are  to  be  piled  six  paces  in 
front  of  the  adjutant's  tent,  and  the  colours  planted  before 
them. 

The  camp.guards  are  to  be  three  hundred  paces  in  front 
of  the  first  line,  and  the  same  distance  in  the  rear  of  the  se- 
cond line. 

The  quarter-guard  is  to  be  forty  feet  from  the  waggons, 
opposite  to  the  interval  between  the  two  battalions  who  fur- 
nish it. 

The  sinks  of  the  first  line  are  to  be  three  hundred  feet  in 

Y 


170 

front,  and  those  of  the  second  line  the  same  distance  in  the 
rear  of  the  camp. 

The  commanding  officers  of  regiments  are  to  be  answer- 
able that  no  tents  are  pitched  out  of  the  line  of  encampment, 
on  any  account  whatever,  except  for  the  regimental  hospital. 

The  ground  being  marked  out,  the  quarter-masters  will 
leave  the  pioneers,  and  go  to  meet  their  regiments,  conduct 
them  to  their  ground,  and  inform  the  colonel  where  the)^are 
to  go  for  their  necessaries. 

APvTICLE  II. 

Marnier  of  entering  a  Camp. 

The  head  of  the  column  arriving  at  the  entrance  of  the 
camp,  the  commanding  officer  of  the  first  battalion  will  com- 
mand, 

Carry,  arms. 

On  which  the  men  carry  their  arms,  and  the  drums  beat  a 
march.  The  other  battalions  observe  the  same  directions, 
and  keep  their  proper  distances  from  each  other. 

The  officer  commanding  will  take  great  care  to  march  the 
troops  in  a  direct  line  along  the  front  of  the  camp,  and  at 
such  a  distance  as  to  give  sufficient  room  for  the  largest  pla- 
toons to  march  clear  of  the  line  of  tents. 

As  the  battalions  respectively  arrive  in  front  of  their 
ground,  they  halt,  form  the  line,  and  order  or  support  their 
arms. 

The  adjutants  will  immediately  turn  out  the  piquets  that 
may  have  been  ordered,  form  them  in  front  of  their  respec- 
tive battalions;  and  send  them  to  the  rendezvous  appointed. 

The  piquets  being  sent  off,  the  commanding  officers  of  bat- 
talions will  command  their  men  to  pile  their  arms,  and  dis- 
miss them  to  pitch  their  tents. 

As  soon  as  a  company  have  pitched  their  tents,  the  captain 
parades  them,  and  they  bring  in  their  arms. 

The  tents  of  the  battalion  being  all  pitched,  the  adjutant 
will  form  the  detachments  for  necessaries,  and  send  them  off. 

In  the  mean  time,  the  commanding  officer  of  the  battalion, 
having  examined  the  ground,  will,  if  necessary,  order  out  a 
party  to  open  the  communications  on  the  right  and  left;  in 
front  for  the  troops,  and  in  the  rear  for  the  baggage. 

Colonels,  lieutenant  colonels,  and  other  mounted  officers 
of  the  regiments,  will  remain  on  horseback  until  the  camp  is 


171 

established,  the  sentinels  posted,  and  the  men  dismissed  to 
their  c.uarters. 

The  ensigns  will  not  quit  their  colours  until  sentinels  are 
placed  over  them. 


Article  III. 
Police  of  the  Camp. 

When  a  regiment  enters  a  camp,  the  field  officers  will  take 
care  that  the  encampment  is  pitched  regularlyj  that  the  sinks 
and  kitchens  are  immediately  dug  in  their  proper  places;  and 
that  no  tents  are  pitched  in  any  part  of  the  camp  contrary  to 
the  order  prescribed. 

At  least  one  officer  of  a  company  must  remain  on  the  pa- 
rade to  see  that  the  tents  are  pitched  regularly  on  the  ground 
marked  out. 

The  tents  should  be  marked  with  the  number  of  each  re- 
giment, but  not  with  an  officer's  name,  to  prevent  their  being 
lost  or  exchanged,  and  the  tents  of  each  company  marked  and 
numbered;  and  each  non-commissioned  officer  should  have 
a  list  of  the  tents,  with  the  men's  names  belonging  to  each. 

The  utensils  belonging  to  the  tents  are  to  be  carried  alter- 
nately by  the  men;  and  the  non-commissioned  officers  of  the 
squads  are  to  be  answerable  that  they  are  not  lost  or  spoiled. 

Whenever  a  regiment  is  to  remain  more  than  one  night  on 
the  same  ground,  the  soldiers  shall  cut  a  small  trench  round 
their  tents,  to  carry  off  the  rain;  but  great  care  must  be  taken 
that  they  do  not  throw  the  dirt  up  against  the  tents. 

One  officer  of  a  company  will  every  day  visit  the  tents;  see 
that  they  are  kept  clean;  that  every  utensil  belonging  to  them 
is  in  proper  order;  and  that  no  bones  or  other  filth  is  in 
or  near  them:  and  when  the  weather  is  fine,  will  order  them 
to  be  struck  about  two  hours  at  noon,  and  the  straw  and  bed- 
ding well  aired. 

The  soldiers  should  not  be  permitted  to  eat  in  their  tents, 
except  in  bad  weather;  and  an  officer  of  a  company  must  often 
visit  the  messes;  see  that  the  provision  is  good  and  well 
cooked;  that  the  men  of  one  tent  mess  together;  and  that  the 
provision  is  not  sold  or  disposed  of  for  liquor. 

A  subaltern,  four  non-commissioned  officers,  and  a  drum- 
mer, will  every  day  be  appointed  for  the  police  of  each  bat- 
talion, who  are  on  no  account  to  be  absent  during  the  time 
thev  are  on  dutv. 


172 

The  officer  ot  the  police  will  make  a  general  inspection 
into  the  cleanliness  of  the  camp;  not  suffer  fire  to  be  made 
any  where  but  in  the  kitchens;  and  cause  all  dirt  to  be  imme- 
diately removed,  and  either  burnt  or  burifd.  He  will  be 
present  at  all  distributions  in  the  regiment,  and  form  and 
send  off  all  detachments  for  necessaries. 

In  case  the  adjutant  is  obliged  to  be  absent,  the  officer  of 
the  police  is  to  do  his  duty  until  his  return;  and  for  that  pur- 
pose he  will  attend  at  the  adjutant's  tent,  to  be  ready  to  re- 
ceive and  distribute  any  orders  that  may  come  for  the  regi- 
ment. 

The  drummer  of  the  police  will  attend  constantly  at  the 
adjutant's  tent,  to  be  ready  at  all  times  to  communicate  the 
necessary  signals;  nor  must  he  absent  himself  on  any  account 
during  the  twenty-four  hours,  without  leaving  another  drum- 
mer to  supply  his  place  until  his  return;  nor  then,  without 
leave  from  the  adjutant. 

When  any  of  the  men  want  water,  they  will  apply  to  the 
officer  of  the  police,  who  will  order  the  drum  to  beat  the  ne- 
cessary signal;  on  which  all  who  want  Avater  will  immediately 
parade  with  their  canteens  before  the  colours,  where  the  offi- 
cer of  the  police  will  form  and  send  them  off,  under  the  care 
of  two  non-commissioned  officers  of  the  police,  who  are  to  be 
answerable  that  they  bring  back  the  whole  detachment,  and 
that  no  excesses  are  committed  whilst  they  are  out.  Wood 
and  all  other  necessaries  will  be  brought  in  the  same  manner. 
Except  in  case  of  necessity,  not  more  than  one  detachment 
is  to  be  out  at  a  time. 

The  quarter-master  will  be  answerable  that  the  parade  and 
environs  of  the  encampment  of  a  regiment  are  kept  clean; 
that  the  sinks  are  filled  up,  and  new  ones  dug  every  four 
days,  and  oftcner  in  warm  weather;  and  if  any  animal  dies 
near  the  regiment,  he  will  cause  it  to  be  carried  at  least  half 
a  mile  from  camp,  and  buried. 

The  place  where  the  cattle  are  killed  must  be  at  least  fifty 
paces  in  the  rear  of  the  waggons;  and  the  entrails  and  other 
filth  shall  be  immediately  buried;  for  which  the  contractors 
or  commissaries  are  to  be  answerable. 

The  quarter-master  general  will  take  care  that  all  dead 
animals,  and  every  other  nuisance  in  the  environs  of  the 
camp,  be  removed. 

No  non-commibsioned  officer  or  soldier  shall  be  permitted 
to  pass  the  chain  of  the  centinels  round  the  camp,  without 
permission  in  writing  from  the  commanding  officer  of  his 


i-egiment  or  battalion;  which  permission  shall  be  dated  the 
same  day,  and  shall,  on  the  return  of  the  person  to  whom  it 
was  granted,  be  delivered  to  the  adjutant,  who  is  to  return 
it  to  the  colonel  or  commanding  officer,  with  his  report. 

Every  detachment  not  conducted  by  a  commissioned  of- 
ficer, shall  have  a  written  permission  from  a  field  officer,  or 
officer  commanding  a  regiment;  or  from  the  officer  of  the  po- 
lice if  it  be  a  detachment  going  for  necessaries;  without  which 
they  are  not  to  be  permitted  to  pass  the  chain. 

AH  officers  whatever  are  to  make  it  a  point  of  duty  to  stop 
every  non-commissioned  officer  or  soldier  they  meet  without 
the  chain,  and  examine  his  pass;  and  if  he  has  not  a  sufficient 
pass,  or  having  one  is  committing  any  excess,  the  officer 
will  conduct  him  to  the  nearest  guard,  from  whence  he  must 
be  sent,  with  his  crime,  to  his  regiment. 

The  sentinel  before  the  colours  will  have  orders,  in  case 
he  hears  any  alarm  in  camp,  or  at  the  advanced  posts,  to  ac- 
quaint the  adjutant  with  it;  who  will  inform  the  command- 
ing officer  of  the  battalion,  or  order  an  alarm  beat,  if  the  case 
requires  it. 

Article  IV". 
Of  Roll-Calls. 

The  rolls  should  be  called  in  each  battalion  at  troop  and 
retreat  beating,  at  which  times  the  men  are  to  parade  with 
their  arms;  and  at  the  beating  of  the  reveille^  and  at  noon,  the 
commanding  officers  of  companies  shall  cause  the  rolls  of 
their  respective  companies  to  be  called,  the  men  parading 
for  that  purpose  without  arms,  and  to  be  detained  no  longer 
than  is  necessary  to  call  the  roll. 

The  non-commissioned  officers  are  to  visit  their  respec- 
tive squads  a  quarter  of  an  hour  after  tattoo  beating;  see  that 
they  are  all  present,  and  retired  to  rest;  and  make  their  re- 
port to  the  first  sergeant,  wljo  will  report  to  the  commanding 
officer  of  the  company. 

No  non-commissioned  officer  or  soldier  is  to  be  absent 
from  roll-call,  without  permission  from  the  commanding  of- 
ficer of  the  company. 

No  commissioned  officer  is  to  be  absent  from  roll-call, 
without  permission  from  the  commanding  officer  of  the  re- 
giment. 


174 


Article  V. 
Of  the  Inspection  of  Companies. 

The  oftener  the  soldiers  are  under  the  inspection  of  their 
officers,  the  betit-r;  for  which  reason,  every  morning  at  troop 
beating,  they  will  inspect  into  the  dress  of  their  menj  see  that 
their  clothes  are  whole  and  put  on  properly;  their  hands  and 
faces  washed  clean;  their  hair  combed;  their  accoutrements 
properly  fixed,  and  every  article  about  them  in  the  greatest 
order.  Those  who  are  guilty  of  repeated  neglects  in  these 
particulars  are  to  be  confined  and  punished.  The  field  officers 
must  pay  attention  to  this  object,  taking  proper  notice  of  those 
companies  where  a  visible  neglect  appears,  and  publicly  ap- 
plauding those  who  are  remarkable  for  their  good  appearance. 

Every  day  the  commanding  officers  of  companies  will 
examine  the  men's  arms,  and  see  that  they  are  clean  and  in 
good  order. 

That  the  soldiers  may  always  appear  clean  on  parade,  and 
as  a  means  of  preserving  their  health,  the  non-commissioned 
officers  will  see  that  they  wash  their  hands  and  faces  every 
morning,  and  oftener  when  necessary.  And  when  any  river  is 
nigh,  and  the  season  favourable,  the  men  shall  bathe  them- 
selves as  frequently  as  may  be  advisable;  the  commanding 
officers  of  each  battalion  sending  them  by  small  detachments 
successively,  under  the  care  of  a  non-commissioned  officer; 
but  on  no  account  must  the  men  be  permitted  to  bathe  when 
just  come  off  a  march,  at  least  until  they  have  reposed  long 
enough  to  get  perfectly  cool. 

Every  Sunday  morning  the  captains  are  to  make  a  gener^ 
inspection  of  their  companies,  and  examine  into  the  state  of 
the  men's  necessaries,  observing  that  they  agree  in  quantity 
with  what  is  specified  in  the  company  book;  and  that  every 
article  is  the  man's  who  shows  it:  For  which  purpose,  and  to 
discover  theft,  every  man's  things  should  be  marked;  if  any 
thing  is  deficient,  strict  inquiry  is  to  be  made  into  the  cause 
of  it;  and  should  it  appear  to  be  lost,  pledged,  sold  or  ex- 
changed, the  off'cnder  shall  be  tried  and  punished. 

That  the  men  may  not  be  improperly  burdened  and  fa- 
tigued, the  captains  are  not  to  suflTer  them  to  carry  any  thing 
which  is  either  useless  or  unnecessarv. 


175 

Article  VI. 
Of  the  different  Beats  of  the  Drum, 

The  different  daily  beats  shall  begin  on  the  right,  and  be 
instantly  followed  by  the  whole  army;  to  facilitate  which,  the 
drummers'  call  shall  be  beat  by  the  drums  of  the  police,  a 
quarter  of  an  hour  before  the  time  of  beating,  when  the 
drummers  will  assemble  before  the  colours  of  their  respec- 
tive battalions:  and  as  soon  as  the  beat  begins  on  the  right, 
it  is  to  be  immediately  taken  up  by  the  whole  army,  the 
drummers  beating  along  the  front  of  their  respective  bat- 
talions, from  the  centre  to  the  right,  from  thence  to  the  left, 
and  back  again  to  the  centre,  where  they  finish. 

The  different  beats  and  signals  are  to  be  as  follows: 

The  General^  is  to  be  beat  only  when  the  whole  are  to  march, 
and  is  the  signal  to  strike  the  tents,  and  prepare  for  the 
march. 

The  Assembly^  is  the  signal  to  repair  to  the  colours. 

The  March^  for  the  whole  to  move. 

The  Reveille^  is  beat  at  day-break,  and  is  the  signal  for  the 
soldiers  to  rise,  and  the  sentries  to  leave  off  challenging. 

The  Troops  assembles  the  soldiers  together,  for  the  purpose 
of  calling  the  roll,  and  inspecting  the  men  for  duty. 

The  Retreat^  is  beat  at  sun-set,  for  calling  the  roll,  warning 
the  men  for  duty,  and  reading  the  orders  of  the  day. 

The  Tattoo^  is  for  the  soldiers  to  repair  to  their  tents,  where 
they  must  remain  until  reveille  beating  next  morning. 

To  Arms^  is  the  signal  for  getting  under  arms,  in  case  of 
an  alarm. 

The  Farleify  is  to  desire  a  conference  with  the  enemy. 

The  Signals, 

Adjutant's  call.  First  part  of  the  troop. 

First  sergeant's  call.   One  roll  and  three  flams. 

All  non-commissioned  officers'  call.  Txvo  rolls  and  five  flams. 

To  go  for  wood.  Poing  stroke  and  ten-stroke  roll. 


176 

To  go  for  water.  Two  strokes  and  a  Jl am. 

To  go  for  provisions.  Roast  beef. 

Front  to  halt.  Two  Jlains  from  right  to  left^  a  full  drag  with 
the  right.,  a  left  hand  flam  and  a  right  hand  full  drag.     - 

For  the  front  to  advance  quicker.  The  long  7narch, 

For  the  front  to  march  slower.  The  taps. 

For  the  drummers.  The  drummers^  call. 

For  a  fatigue  party.  The  pioneers^  7narch. 

For  the  church  call.  The  parley. 

The  drummers  will  practise  a  hundred  paces  in  front  of 
the  battalion,  at  the  hours  prescribed;  and  any  drummer 
found  beating  at  any  other  time,  except  when  ordered,  shall 
be  punished. 


SECTION  III. 

Of  the  Service  of  the  Guards. 

Article  I. 
Of  the  different  Guards  with  their  Use, 

The  different  guards  of  the  army  will  consist  of 

1st.  Out  post  and  piquet  guards. 

2d.  Camp  and  quarter  guards. 

3d.  General  and  staff  officers'  guards. 

The  piquet  guards  will  be  formed  by  detachments  from 
the  line,  and  posted  at  the  avenues  of  the  camp,  in  such  num- 
bers as  the  officer  commanding  may  think  necessary  for  the 
security  of  the  camp. 

The  camp  and  quarter  guards  are  for  the  better  security 
of  the  camp,  as  well  as  for  preserving  good  order  and  disci- 
pline. 

Every  two  battalions  will  furnish  a  camp  and  quarter  guard 
between  them,  to  consist  of 

Subalt.  Serg.  Corp.  Drum.  Priv.    f    For  the  camp 


1  1  1  1  30     I.  guard. 

For  the  quar- 
ter guard. 


{ 


177 

The  camp  guard  of  the  front  line  will  be  posted  three 
hundred  paces  in  front  of  it,  and  that  of  the  second  line  the 
same  distance  in  the  rear  of  the  second  line;  each  opposite 
to  the  interval  between  the  two  battalions. 

Each  camp  guard  will  post  nine  sentinels,  viz.  one  before 
the  guard,  two  on  the  right  and  two  on  the  left;  these  five 
sentinels,  with  those  from  the  other  battalions,  forming  a 
chain  in  front  and  rear  of  the  camp;  the  sixth  and  seventh 
sentinels  before  the  colours;  and  the  eighth,  ninth  and  tenth 
before  the  tents  of  the  colonel  and  the  commanding  officers 
of  the  two  battalions. 

In  order  to  complete  the  chain  of  sentinels  round  the  camp, 
the  adjutant  general  will  order  two  flank  guards  from  the  line, 
to  consist  of  a  commissioned  officer,  and  as  many  men  as  are 
necessary  to  form  a  chain  on  the  flanks. 

The  intention  of  the  camp  guards  being  to  form  a  chain  of 
sentinels  round  the  camp,  in  order  to  prevent  improper  per- 
sons entering,  or  the  soldiers  going  out  of  camp,  the  com- 
manding officers  of  brigades  will  add  to,  or  diminish  them, 
so  as  to  answer  the  above  purpose. 

The  quarter  guard  is  to  be  posted  twenty  paces  in  the  rear 
of  the  line  of  waggons,  and  will  furnish  three  sentinels;  viz. 
one  at  the  guard,  and  one  behind  each  battalion. 

The  guards  of  the  general  officers  will  be  as  follows: 

Sub.  Serg.  Corp.  Priv. 
A  major  general  will  have         1         1         1         20 
A  brigadier  general  O         1  1  12 

Others  according  to  circumstances. 

The  different  guards  will  all  mount  at  one  hour,  to  be  re- 
gulated by  the  commanding  officer  for  the  time  being. 

The  camp  and  quarter  guards  will  parade  before  the  inter- 
val of  the  battalions,  where  they  will  be  formed  by  the  adju- 
tant of  the  battalion  that  furnishes  the  officer,  and  immedi- 
ately sent  off"  to  their  respective  posts. 

The  guard  of  a  major  general  will  be  furnished  from  his 
own  division,  each  brigade  furnishing  it  by  turns;  it  is  to  be 
formed  by  the  major  of  brigade,  and  sent  from  the  brigade 
parade. 

The  guard  of  a  brigadier  general  will  be  furnished  by  his 
own  brigade,  and  formed  and  sent  from  the  brigade  parade 
by  the  major  of  brigade. 

The  other  guards  being  composed  of  detachments  from  the 
line  by  brigades,  each  detachment  will  be  formed  on  the  bri' 

7 


178 

gade  parade  by  the  major  of  brigade,  and  sent  with  an  adju- 
tant to  the  grand  parade. 

All  guards,  except  those  which  are  honorary,  should  or- 
dinarily be  of  force  proportioned  to  the  number  of  sentinels 
required,  allowing  three  relieves  for  each  post. 


Article  II. 
Of  the  Grand  Parade, 

As  soon  as  a  detachment  arrives  on  the  grand  parade,  the 
officer  having  dressed  the  ranks,  commands. 

Order  arms. 

and  then  takes  post  eight  paces  in  front  of  his  detachment; 
the  non-commissioned  officers  fall  two  paces  into  the  rear, 
except  one  who  remains  on  the  right  of  every  detachment. 
Each  detachment  takes  post  on  the  left  of  that  preceding  it, 
and  is  examined  by  the  brigade  major  of  the  day,  as  it  arrives. 

When  the  whole  are  assembled,  the  adjutant  of  the  day 
dresses  the  line,  counts  the  files  from  right  to  left,  and  takes 
post  on  the  right. 

The  brigade  major  then  commands, 

1  Attention. 

2  Shoulder  arms. 

3  Support  ARMS. 

4  Officers  and  non-commissioned  officers. 

5  To  the  centre,  march. 

The  officers  then  march  to  the  centre,  and  form  themselves, 
according  to  seniority,  in  one  rank,  sixteen  paces  in  front  of 
the  guards;  the  non-commissioned  officers  advance  and  form 
two  ranks,  four  paces  in  the  rear  of  the  officers,  and  with  the 
same  distance  between  their  ranks. 

The  brigade  major  then  appoints  the  officers  and  non-com- 
missioned officers  to  their  posts;  the  officers  in  the  following 
manner: 

Supposing  that  the  guards  are  divided  into  four  divisions 
and  eight  subdivisions,  the  eight  senior  officers  will  be  pla- 
ced on  the  right  of  the  eight  subdivisions,  so  that  the  first  in 
rank  will  be  on  the  right  of  the  whole,  the  second  on  the 
right  of  the  left  wing,  the  third  on  the  right  of  the  second 
division,  the  fourth  on  the  right  of  the  fourth  division.  The 


179 

officer  commanding  the  left  subdivision  of  each  division  will 
be  the  fourth  junior  to  the  officer  commanding  the  division. 

The  other  officers  and  non-commissioned  officers  will  act 
as  file  closers,  and  be  distributed  and  posted  as  in  battalion. 

Whilst  this  is  doing,  the  adjutant  divides  the  battalion  of 
guards  into  eight  subdivisions,  leaving  proper  intervals  be- 
tween the  subdivisions  for  the  officers  who  are  to  command 
them. 

The  brigade  major  having  appointed  the  officers  to  their 
places,  and  the  battalion  being  divided,  he  commands, 

1  Officers  and  non-commissioned  officers. 

2  To  your  posts.  '^ 

The  officers  and  non-commissioned  officers  face  outwards 
from  the  centre. 

3  March. 

They  go  directly  to  their  posts  in  the  battalion. 

The  brigade  major  then  advances  to  the  general  officer  of 
the  day,  informs  him  that  the  battalion  is  formed,  and  takes 
his  directions  relative  to  the  exercise. 

The  general  officer  of  the  day  will  usually  order  the  ma- 
nual exercise  to  be  performed,  and  some  manceuvres,  such  as 
he  thinks  proper;  the  major  of  brigade  of  the  day  giving  the 
words  of  command. 

The  exercise  being  finished,  the  major  of  brigade  com- 
mands, 

Order  arms. 

The  drums  then  beat  from  right  to  left  of  the  parade,  and 
passing  behind  the  officers  of  the  day,  take  post  on  their  left. 
The  major  of  brigade  then  orders, 

1  Shoulder  arms. 

2  Support  ARMS. 

3  Officers  and  non-commissioned  officers. 

4  To  the  centre,  march. 

They  advance  as  before  to  the  centre,  and  the  brigade 
major  appoints  them  to  their  respective  guards,  takes  the 
name  of  the  officer  commanding  each  guard,  and  gives  him 
the  parole  and  countersign.  The  adjutant  having  in  the  mean 
time  told  off  the  guards,  and  divided  them  into  platoons,  the 
brigade  major  then  commands. 


180 

1  Officers  and  non-commissioned  officers* 

2  To  your  posts. 

3  March. 

The  officers  go  to  their  respective  posts^ 
The  brigade  major  then  commands, 

Present  arms. 

And  advancing  to  the  general  officer  of  the  day,  acquaints 
him  that  the  guards  are  formed;  and  on  receiving  his  orders 
to  "wheel  them  to  the  right  by  platoons,  and  march  them  off," 
he  commands, 

1  Shoulder  arms. 

2  By  platoons. 

3  To  the  right,  wheel. 

4  March. 

5  Guide  to  the  right. 

The  whole  wheel,  and  march  by  the  general,  the  officers 
saluting  him  as  they  pass;  and  when  the  whole  have  passed, 
they  wheel  off  and  march  to  their  respective  posts. 


Article  III. 
Of  Relieving  Guards  and  Sentinels* 

The  guards  in  camp  will  be  relieved  every  twenty-four 
hours.  The  guards  without  the  limits  of  the  camp  will  or- 
dinarily be  relieved  in  the  same  manner;  but  this  will  depend 
on  their  distances  from  camp,  and  other  circumstances,  which 
may  sometimes  require  their  continuing  on  duty  for  several 
days.  In  this  case  they  must  be  previously  notified  to  pro- 
vide themselves  accordingly. 

The  guards  are  to  march  in  the  greatest  order  to  their  re- 
spective posts,  marching  by  platoons  and  the  cadenced  pace, 
whenever  the  roads  will  permit. 

When  the  new  guard  approaches  the  post,  they  carry 
arms;  and  the  officer  of  the  old  guard,  having  his  guard  pa- 
raded with  shouldered  arms,  on  the  approach  of  the  new 
guard,  commands, 

Present  arms. 

and  his  guard  present  their  arms. 
The  new  guard  marches  past  the  old  guard,  wheels  to  the 


181 

fight,  and  by  successive  wheel  of  platoons,  as  in  the  forma- 
tion "  on  the  right  in  line,"  forms  three  or  four  paces  on  its 
right,  and  the  officer  commands, 

Present  arms. 

and  the  new  guard  present  their  arms. 

The  two  officers  then  approach  each  other,  and  the  reliev- 
ing officer  takes  his  orders  from  the  relieved.  Both  officers 
then  return  to  their  guards,  and  command, 

1  Shoulder  arms. 

2  Non-commissioned  officers. 

3  To  the  front,  march. 

The  non-commissioned  officers  of  both  guards,  who  are  to 
relieve  the  sentinels,  advance  in  front  of  the  new  guard. 

The  sergeant  of  the  new  guard  then  tells  off  as  many  sen- 
tinels as  are  necessary;  and  the  corporal  of  the  new  guard, 
conducted  by  a  corporal  of  the  old  guard  relieves  the  senti- 
nels, beginning  with  the  most  distant  sentinel. 

When  the  sentinel  sees  the  relief  approach,  he  presents 
arms,  and  the  corporal  halting  his  relief  at  six  paces  distance, 
commands, 

1  Present  arms. 

2  Recover  arms. 

This  last  command  is  only  for  the  sentinel  relieving,  and 
the  one  to  be  relieved;  the  former  immediately  approaching 
with  the  corporal,  and  having  received  his  orders  from  the 
old  sentinel,  takes  his  place;  and  the  sentinel  relieved  marches 
into  the  ranks,  placing  himself  on  the  left  of  the  rear  rank, 
faced  to  the  rear. 

Front. 
Both  sentinels  face  to  the  front.  The  corporal  then  orders, 

1  Shoulder  arms. 

2  Support  arms. 

3  March. 

and  the  relief  proceeds  in  the  same  manner  until  the  whole 
are  relieved. 

If  the  sentinels  are  numerous,  the  sergeants  are  to  be  em 
ployed  as  well  as  the  corporals,  in  relieving  them. 

When  the  corporal  returns  with  the  old  sentinels,  he  leads 
them  before  the  old  guard,  and  dismisses  them  to  their  ranks. 


182 

The  officer  of  the  old  guard  then  forms  his  guard  in  the 
same  manner  as  when  he  mounted,  and  marches  it  in  order 
to  camp. 

As  soon  as  he  arrives  in  the  camp,  he  halts,  forms  the 
men  of  the  different  brigades  together,  and  sends  them  to 
their  respective  brigades,  conducted  by  a  non-commissioned 
officer,  or  careful  soldier. 

When  the  old  guard  march  off,  the  new  guard  present  their 
arms,  until  they  are  gone;  they  then  shoulder,  face  to  the  left, 
and  take  the  place  of  the  old  guard. 

The  officer  then  orders  a  non-commissioned  officer  to  take 
down  the  names  of  the  guard. 

Suppose  the  guard  to  consist  of  twenty-four  men,  and  to 
furnish  eight  sentinels,  they  are  divided  into  three  relieves, 
and  the  posts  being  numbered,  beginning  with  the  guard- 
house, each  man's  name  is  put  down  against  the  number  of 
the  pest  he  will  always  stand  sentry  at,  during  the  guard; 
by  which  means  an  officer  knows  what  particular  man  was  at 
any  post  during  any  hour  of  the  day  or  night. 

The  relief  of  sentinels  is  always  to  be  marched  in  the 
greatest  order,  and  with  supported  arms,  the  corporal  often 
looking  back  to  observe  the  conduct  of  the  men;  and  if  an 
officer  approaches,  he  is  to  order  his  men  to  "  carry  arms," 
supporting  them  again  when  he  has  passed. 

The  corporals  are  to  be  answerable  that  the  sentinels, 
when  relieving,  perform  their  motions  with  the  greatest 
spirit  and  exactness. 

A  corporal  who  is  detected  in  suffering  sentinels  to  relieve 
each  other,  without  his  being  present,  shall,  as  well  as  the 
sentinel  so  relieved,  be  severely  punished. 

Sentinels  are  to  be  relieved  every  two  hours,  and  are  on 
no  account  to  remain  longer  on  that  duty. 

In  winter,  should  the  cold  be  severe,  they  must  be  relieved 
every  hour,  or  even  oftener,  if  necessary. 


Article  IV. 
Instructions  to  Oncers  on  Guard. 

On  the  vigilance  of  the  officer  depends  not  only  the  safety 
of  his  guard,  but  that  of  the  whole  army. 

As  it  is  highly  necessary  an  officer  should  have  some 
knowledge  of  his  situation,  he  will  immediately  after  reliev- 
hig  the  old  guard,  visit  the  sentinels,  and  examine  the  ground 


183 

around  his  post;  and  if  he  thinks  the  sentinels  not  sufficient 
to  secure  him  from  a  surprise,  he  is  at  liberty  to  place  more, 
acquainting  therewith  the  general  or  field  officer  of  the  day 
who  visits  his  post;  but  without  their  leave  he  is  not  to  re- 
move any  that  are  already  posted.  He  will  cause  the  roads 
leading  to  the  enemy,  and  to  the  next  posts,  to  be  well  recon- 
noitred by  an  officer  of  the  guard,  or  for  want  of  one,  by  an 
intelligent  non-commissioned  officer  and  some  faithful  men, 
inform  himself  of  every  thing  necessary  for  his  security,  and 
use  every  possible  precaution  against  a  surprise.  He  will  not 
permit  a  stranger  to  enter  his  post,  nor  suffer  his  men  to  talk 
with  him.  If  a  suspicious  person,  or  a  deserter  from  the  ene- 
my approaches,  he  will  stop  him,  and  send  him  to  head-quar- 
ters, or  to  a  superior  officer.  He  will  on  no  account  suffer  the 
soldiers  to  pull  off  their  accoutrements,  or  straggle  more  than 
twenty  paces  from  the  guard;  and  if  water,  or  any  other  ne- 
cessaries are  wanted  for  the  guard,  they  must  be  sent  for  by 
a  non-commissioned  officer  and  some  men,  with  their  arms 
if  at  an  out-post,  on  no  account  suffering  a  soldier  to  go  by 
himself;  but  no  such  party  shall  be  absent  whilst  the  sentinels 
are  relieving.  He  will  examine  every  relief  before  it  is  sent 
off;  see  that  their  arms  are  loaded  and  in  order,  and  that  the 
men  are  acquainted  with  their  duty;  and  if  by  any  accident 
a  man  should  get  in  the  least  disguised  with  liquor,  he  must 
on  no  account  be  suffered  to  go  on  post  as  a  sentinel. 

At  every  relief  the  guard  will  parade,  and  the  roll  be  call- 
ed; and  the  guard  must  remain  under  arms  till  the  relief  re- 
turns. 

During  the  day,  the  men  may  be  permitted  to  rest  them- 
selves as  much  as  consistent  with  the  safety  of  the  guard;  but 
in  the  night,  no  man  is  to  be  suffered  to  lie  down  or  sleep  on 
any  account;  but  shall  have  his  arms  constantly  in  his  hands; 
and  be  ready  to  fall  in  on  the  least  alarm. 

Between  every  relief,  the  sentinels  must  be  visitedby  a  non- 
commissioned officer  and  a  file  of  men;  and,  when  more  than 
one  officer  is  on  guard,  as  often  as  possible  by  an  officer.  A 
patrol  also  must  be  frequently  sent  on  the  roads  leading  to 
the  enemy. 

During  the  day,  the  sentinels  on  the  out-posts  must  stop, 
every  party  of  men,  whether  armed  or  not,  till  they  have 
been  examined  by  the  officer  of  the  guard. 

At  retreat,  the  countersign  will  be  given  to  the  sentinels 
of  the  piquets  and  advanced  posts,  after  which  they  are  to 
challenge  all  that  approach  them;  and  if  any  person,  after  be- 
in^  ordered  to  stand^  should  continue  to  approach,  or  attemp' 


184 

to  escape,  the  sentinel,  having  challenged  him  three  timesy 
will  fire  on  him. 

The  sentinels  of  the  interior  guards  of  the  camp  will  re- 
ceive the  countersign,  and  begin  to  challenge,  at  such  hours 
as  shall  be  determined  in  orders,  according  to  circumstances. 

A  sentinel,  on  perceiving  any  person  approach,  will  chal- 
lenge briskly,  and  never  suffer  more  than  one  to  advance, 
until  he  has  the  countersign  given  him;  if  the  person  challeng- 
ed has  not  the  countersign,  the  sentinel  will  call  the  sergeant 
of  the  guard,  and  keep  the  person  at  a  little  distance  from 
his  post,  until  the  sergeant  comes  to  examine  him. 

Whenever  a  sentinel  on  an  outpost  perceives  more  than 
three  men  approach,  he  must  order  them  to  stand,  and  im- 
mediately pass  the  word  for  the  sergeant  of  the  guard;  the 
officer  of  the  guard  will  immediately  parade  his  guard,  and 
send  a  sergeant  with  a  detachment  to  examine  the  party. 
The  non-commissioned  officer  will  order  the  commanding 
officer  of  the  party  to  advance,  and  conduct  him  to  the  officer 
of  the  guard;  who,  in  cuse  he  is  unacquainted  with  his  per- 
son, and  does  not  choose  to  trust  either  to  his  clothing,  or 
to  his  knowledge  of  the  countersign,  will  demand  his  pass- 
port, and  examine  him  strictly;  and  if  convinced  of  his  be- 
longing to  the  army,  will  let  him  pass. 

If  a  sentinel,  on  challenging  a  party,  is  answered  reliefs 
patrol  or  rouyid^  he  will  desire  the  sergeant  or  corporal  to 
advance  with  the  countersign;  and  if  he  is  then  assured  of 
their  being  the  relief,  &c.  he  may  suffer  them  to  advance. 

A  sentinel  must  take  the  greatest  care  not  to  be  surprised; 
lie  must  never  suffer  the  person  who  advances  to  give  the 
countersign,  to  approach  within  reach  of  his  arms,  and  al- 
ways charge  his  bayonet. 

I'he  officers  who  mount  the  camp  guards,  will  give  orders 
to  their  sentinels  not  to  suffer  any  person  to  pass  in  or  out  of 
camp,  except  by  one  of  the  guards,  nor  until  the  officer  of 
the  guard  has  examined  him. 

In  case  one  of  the  guard  deserts,  the  officer  must  imme- 
diately change  the  countersign,  and  send  notice  thereof  to 
the  general  of  the  day;  who  will  communicate  the  same  to 
the  other  guards,  and  the  adjutant  general. 

As  soon  as  the  officer  of  a  guard  discovers  the  approach 
of  the  enemy,  he  will  immediately  send  notice  to  the  nearest 
general  officer,  call  in  the  sentinels,  and  put  himself  in  the 
best  posture  of  defence.  If  attacked  on  his  post,  he  will  de- 
fend it  to  the  utmost  of  his  power,  nor  retreat,  unless  com- 


185 

pelled,  by  a  superior  force;  and  even  then  he  will  retire  in 
the  greatest  order,  keeping  a  fire  on  the  enemy,  whose  su- 
periority, however  great,  can  never  justify  a  guard's  retiring 
in  disorder.  Should  the  enemy  pursue  a  guard  into  camp, 
the  officer  will  take  care  to  retire  through  the  intervals  of 
the  battalions,  and  forming  in  the  rear  of  the  line,  wait  for 
further  orders. 

When  an  officer  is  posted  at  a  bridge,  defile,  or  any  work, 
with  orders  to  maintain  it,  he  will  defend  himself  to  the  last 
extremity,  however  superior  the  force  of  the  enemy  maybe, 
as  it  is  to  be  supposed  that  the  general  who  gave  those  orders 
will  reinforce  him,  or  order  him  to  retire  whenever  he  thinks 
proper. 

An  officer  must  never  throw  in  the  whole  of  his  fire  at 
once;  for  which  reason  every  guard  is  to  be  divided  into  two 
or  more  platoons,  according  to  its  strength;  any  number  of 
men  above  eight,  and  under  seventy-eight,  forming  two  pla- 
toons, formed  as  a  company;  the  drum  is  to  be  on  the  right 
of  the  captain,  and  the  sentinel  one  pace  advanced  of  the 
drum.  But  if  the  guard  consists  of  no  more  than  twelve  men, 
it  forms  in  one  rank. 


Article  V. 
Method  of  going  and  receiving  the  Grand  Rounds. 

The  general  and  field  officers  of  the  day  will  visit  the  sci 
veral  guards  during  the  day,  as  often,  and  at  such  hours  as 
they  judge  proper. 

When  the  sentinel  before  the  guard  perceives  the  officer 
of  the  day,  he  will  call  to  the  guard  to  turn  out;  and  the  guard 
being  paraded,  on  the  approach  of  the  officer  of  the  day,  pre- 
sent their  arms  by  command  of  their  officer. 

The  officer  of  the  day  will  direct  him  to  bring  the  guard 
to  shouldered  arms;  and  then  examine  it;  see  that  none  are 
absent;  that  their  arms  and  accoutrements  are  in  order, 
that  the  officers  and  non-commissioned  officers  are  acquaint- 
ed with  their  duty;  and  that  the  sentinels  are  properly  posted, 
and  have  received  proper  orders. 

Not  only  the  officer  of  the  day,  but  all  general  officers  are 
at  liberty  to  visit  the  guards,  and  make  the  same  examination. 

The  officer  of  the  guard  shall  give  the  parole  to  the  officer 
of  the  day,  if  demanded. 

2  A 


186 

During  the  night,  the  officer  of  the  day  will  go  the  grand 
rounds. 

When  theofficerof  the  day  arrives  at  the  guard  from  whence 
he  intends  to  begin  his  rounds,  he  will  make  himself  known 
as  such,  by  giving  the  officer  of  the  guard  the  parole.  He  will 
then  order  the  guard  under  arms,  and  having  examined  it 
demand  an  escort  of  a  sergeant  and  two  men,  and  proceed 
to  the  next  post. 

When  the  rounds  are  challenged  by  a  sentinel,  the  ser- 
geant will  answer.  Grand  rounds!  and  the  sentinel  will  reply. 
Stand ^rand  rounds!  Adva?7ce  sergeant  with  the  countersign! 
Upon  which  the  sergeant  will  advance  and  give  the  counter- 
sign. The  sentinel  will  then  cry.  Advance^  rounds!  and  allow 
them  to  pass,  but  not  present  his  arms,  nor  suffer  any  one  to 
approach  in  reach  of  them. 

When  the  sentinel  before  the  guard  challenges,  and  is  an- 
swered, Grand  rounds!  he  will  reply,  Stand^  grand  rounds! 
Turn  out  the  guard!  Grand  rounds!  Upon  the  sentinel's  call- 
ing, the  guard  is  to  be  turned  out  and  drawn  up  in  good  order, 
with  shouldered  arms,  the  officers  taking  their  posts.  The 
officer  commanding  the  guard  will  then  order  a  sergeant 
and  two  men  to  advance  towards  the  rounds,  and  challenge. 
When  the  sergeant  of  the  guard  comes  within  ten  paces  of 
the  rounds,  he  is  to  halt  and  challenge  briskly.  The  sergeant 
of  the  rounds  will  answer.  Grand  rounds!  The  sergeant  of 
the  guard  will  reply  Starid grand  rounds!  Advance  sergeant 
xvith  the  coimtersign!  and  order  his  men  to  present  their 
arms.  The  sergeant  of  the  rounds  advances  alone,  and  giving 
the  countersign,  returns  to  his  rounds;  and  the  sergeant  of  the 
guard  calls  to  his  officer.  The  countersign  is  right!  On  which 
the  officer  of  the  guard  calls,  Advance  grand  rounds!  The 
officer  of  the  grand  rounds  then  advances  alone,  and  on  his 
approach  the  guard  present  their  arms.  He  will  pass  along 
the  front  of  the  guard  immediately  to  the  officer,  who  keeps 
his  post  on  the  right,  and  give  him  the  parole.  He  will  then 
examine  the  guard,  order  back  his  escort,  and  demanding  a 
nev,'  one.  proceed  in  the  same  manner  to  the  other  guards. 


181 


Article  VI. 

Honours  due  from  Guards  to  General  Officers  and  others. 

To  the  President  as  commander  in  chief:  All  guards  will 
turn  out  with  presented  arms;  the  drums  will  beat  a  march, 
and  the  officers  salute. 

To  major  generals:  They  will  turn  out  with  presented 
arms,  and  beat  two  ruffles. 

To  brigadier  generals:  They  will  turn  out  with  presented 
arms,  and  beat  one  ruffle. 

To  officers  of  the  day:  They  will  turn  out  with  presented 
arms,  and  beat  according  to  their  rank. 

Exceptfrom  these  rules  the  guard  of  a  general  officer,  which 
turns  out  and  pays  honours  only  to  officers  of  superior  rank 
to  the  general  whose  guard  it  is. 

To  colonels:  Their  own  quarter  guards  turn  out  once  a 
day  with  presented  arms;  after  which  they  only  turn  out 
with  ordered  arms. 

To  lieutenant  colonels:  Their  own  quarter  guards  turn  out 
once  a  day  with  shouldered  arms;  after  which  they  only  turn 
out  and  stand  by  their  arms. 

To  majors:  Their  own  quarter  guards  turn  out  once  a  day 
with  ordered  arms;  at  all  other  times  they  stand  by  their 
arms. 

When  a  lieutenant  colonel  or  major  commands  a  regiment, 
the  quarter  guard  is  to  pay  him  the  same  honours  as  are  due 
to  a  colonel. 

All  sentinels  present  their  arms  to  general  officers,  and  to 
the  field  officers  of  their  own  regiments;  to  all  other  com- 
missioned officers  they  stand  with  shouldered  arms. 

To  all  governors  in  their  own  states,  and  governors  of 
territories  in  their  territories,  there  shall  be  the  same  honours 
paid  as  to  major  generals. 

No  honours  are  to  be  paid  to  any  officer  of  the  army  unless 
he  wears  a  military  dress. 

When  a  detachment  with  arms  passes  before  a  guard,  the 
guard  shall  be  under  arms,  and  the  drums  of  both  beat  a 
march. 

When  a  detachment  without  arms  passes,  the  guard  shall 
turn  out  and  stand  by  their  arms. 

After  retreat  no  honours  are  to  be  paid;  and  when  near 
the  enemy,  no  honours  are  to  be  paid  with  the  drum. 


188 


SECTION  IV. 

Of  the  Arins  and  Ammunition^  xvith  the  Method  of  presermng 

them. 

The  preservation  of  the  arms  and  ammunition  is  an  object 
that  requires  the  greatest  attention. 

An  officer  of  each  company  must  every  morning  at  roll-call 
inspect  minutely  into  the  state  of  the  men's  arms,  accoutre- 
ments and  ammunition:  and  if  it  shall  appear  that  a  soldier 
has  sold,  or  through  carelessness  lost  or  damaged  anj^  part 
of  them,  he  must  be  confined,  tried,  punished,  and  stop- 
pages made  of  his  pay,  as  hereafter  mentioned;  for  which 
purpose  such  officer  shall  certify  to  the  commanding  officer 
of  the  regiment  the  names  of  the  delinquents,  and  the  losses 
or  damages  which  shall  appear  of  their  arms,  ammunition 
and  accoutrements;  and  the  commanding  officer,  after  sen- 
tence, shall  order  stoppages  to  be  made  for  whatever  shall 
appear  to  have  been  sold,  or  lost,  as  aforesaid;  and  for  arms, 
accoutrements,  and  ammunition  damaged,  such  sums  as  the 
repairs  shall  cost  the  government,  to  be  estimated  by  the 
court  martial;  provided  that  such  stoppages  shall  not  exceed 
one  half  of  the  delinquent's  pay  monthly. 

It  is  highly  essential  to  the  service  that  the  ammunition 
should  be  at  all  times  kept  complete;  for  which  purpose,  as 
often  as  it  is  necessary,  a  return  is  to  be  made  by  each  com- 
pany of  the  number  of  cartridges  deficient,  to  the  quarter- 
master, that  he  may  make  out  a  general  one  for  the  regi- 
ment, to  be  signed  by  the  commanding  officers  of  the  regi- 
ment and  brigade, and  no  timelost  in  supplying  the  deficiency. 
The  like  care  is  to  be  taken  that  all  deficiencies  of  arms  and 
accoutrements  are  supplied  without  loss  of  time. 

All  arms,  accoutrements,  and  ammunition  unfit  for  ser- 
vice, are  to  be  carefully  preserved  and  sent  by  the  command- 
ing officer  of  each  company  to  the  regimental  quarter-mas- 
ter, who  will  deliver  the  same  to  the  brigade  conductor, 
they  respectively  giving  receipts  for  what  they  receive.  The 
arms,  accoutrements,  and  ammunition  of  the  sick  and  others, 
when  delivered  up,  are  to  be  taken  care  of  in  the  same  manner. 
Before  the  cartridge-boxes  are  put  into  the  arm-chests,  the 
cartridges  must  be  taken  out,  to  prevent  any  loss  or  accident. 

A  conductor  of  stores  shall  be  appointed  to  each  brigade, 
who  shall  have  under  his  immediate  care  and  direction  a 


189 

Lravelling  forge  and  five  or  six  armourers,  an  ammunition 
waggon,  and  a  waggon  with  an  arm-chest  for  each  battalion, 
each  chest  to  hold  twenty-five  stand  of  arms,  to  receive  the 
arms  and  accoutrements  wanting  repair,  or  of  the  men  sick 
or  absent;  and  when  the  arms  delivered  in  by  a  battalion  shall 
exceed  the  above  number,  the  surplus  shall  be  sent  to  some 
arsenal. 

The  conductor  shall  issue  no  ammunition  but  by  order  of 
the  commanding  officer  of  the  brigade;  but  may  receive  and 
deliver  the  arms  and  accoutrements  of  each  battalion,  by 
order  of  its  commanding  officer. 

The  ammunition  waggon  shall  contain  twenty  thousand 
cartridges;  and  in  order  to  keep  the  same  complete,  the  con- 
ductor shall,  as  deficiencies  arise,  apply  to  the  brigade  quar- 
ter-master for  a  supply,  or  otherwise  for  the  necessary  ma- 
terials of  cartridges,  and  to  the  brigade  inspector  for  men  to 
make  them  up  under  the  direction  of  the  conductor;  and  for 
this  purpose  the  brigade  inspector  shall  order  out  a  party  of 
the  most  careful  soldiers. 

The  non-commissioned  officers  of  each  company  will  be 
provided  with  gun-worms;  and  every  day  those  men  who 
have  returned  from  duty  are  to  bring  their  arms  and  have 
their  charges  drawn;  the  first  sergeant  to  receive  the  powder 
and  ball,  and  deliver  the  same  to  the  quarter-master. 


SECTION  V. 

Of  Revieivs. 

Article  I. 
Of  Revieivs  of  Parade » 

When  a  regiment  is  to  be  reviewed,  it  wrll  be  drawn  up 
in  the  following  manner. 

The  ranks  at  open  order;  the  colours  advanced  six  paces 
before  the  centres  of  the  battalions;  the  colonel  on  foot, twelve 
paces  before  the  centre  of  the  interval  between  the  battalions; 
the  lieutenant  colonels  on  foot,  six  paces  before  the  colours; 
the  majors  on  the  right,  the  adjutants  on  the  left  of  the  bat- 
talions, in  the  line  of  officers;  the  captains  eight  paces  before 
their  intervals;  the  other  officers  on  the  same  line,  opposite 
to  their  respective  places;  the  covering  sergeants  in  the  front 


190 

rank;  the  other  sergeants  in  the  supernumerary  rank,  except 
one  on  the  left  of  the  front  rank  of  each  battalion;  the  musi- 
cians on  the  right  of  the  first  battalion. 

The  general  officer  who  is  to  review  the  regiment  will  ap- 
proach the  centre.  When  he  arrives  within  forty  paces  of  the 
colonel,  the  latter  will  order, 

Battalion. 

This  word  will  be  repeated  by  the  lieutenant  colonels,  and 
then  the  colonel  will  order, 

Present  arms. 

This  command  having  been  repeated^  the  regiment  will 
present  arms;  the  officers  will  salute  with  the  sword,  the  last 
motion  of  the  salute  corresponding  in  time  with  the  last 
motion  of  presenting  arms;  the  colours  will  salute  at  the 
same  time,  and  the  drums  will  beat  according  to  the  rank  of 
the  reviewing  general.  So  soon  as  he  turns  to  go  to  the  right, 
the  colonel  will  command, 

Shoulder  arms. 

This  command  will  be  repeated  by  the  lieutenant  colonels, 
and  the  regiment  will  shoulder  arms,  the  officers  recovering 
their  swords  at  the  same  time. 

The  general  having  arrived  at  the  right,  will  pass  along 
the  front  to  the  left,  the  whole  remaining  steady;  from  the 
left  he  will  turn  off  to  place  himself  in  front.  The  colonel 
and  lieutenant  colonels  will  pass  to  the  rear,  mount  on  horse- 
back, and  take  their  positions,  when  the  colonel  will  com- 
mand, 

Close  ranks. 

This  command  having  been  repeated,  the  officers  face  to 
their  companies;  the  colonel  will  then  command, 

March. 

At  this  word  repeated,  the  rear  ranks  close  to  the  front, 
and  the  officers  stepping  off  at  the  same  time,  take  their  posts 
in  the  line. 

The  colonel  will  then  form  the  open  column  of  companies 
by  wheeling  to  the  right,  and  command. 

The  regiment  will  pass  in  review. 

This  caution  will  be  repeated,  and  the  lieutenant  colonels 


191 

will  place  themselves  at  the  head  of  their  respective  batta- 
lions, each  four  paces  before  the  captain  who  commands 
the  leading  company;  the  colonel  will  place  himself  on  the 
right  of  the  lieutenant  colonel  of  the  leading  battalion;  the 
musicians  will  precede  the  colonel  six  paces.  The  colonel 
will  then  command, 

1  Support  ARMS. 

2  Column  forward. 

3  Guide  to  the  right. 

4  March. 

These  words  of  command  will  be  severally  repeated  by  the 
lieutenant  colonels,  the  last  by  the  captains  commanding  com- 
panies also,  and  the  column  will  move.  It  will  change  direc- 
tion twice  to  the  left,  the  companies  wheeling  on  a  movable 
pivot.  When  the  first  company  arrives  within  forty  paces  of 
the  general,  the  lieutenant  colonel  will  order  the  battalion  to 
carry  arms,  and  the  music  to  play. 

As  the  leading  company  wheels  the  second  time,  the  major 
will  give  the  guide  on  the  right  objects  to  direct  his  march, 
and  then  will  pass  the  head  of  the  column,  to  six  paces  on  the 
left  of  that  company. 

The  soldiers  and  guides  will  march  with  the  head  direct 
to  the  front;  the  officers  will  look  steadily  at  the  general  as 
they  pass;  when  within  six  paces  they  will  salute  with  the 
sword,  and  recover  when  they  have  respectively  passed  him 
two  paces.  The  ensign  will  salute  in  like  manner  with  his 
colours. 

When  the  colonel  has  saluted  at  the  head  of  the  regiment, 
he  will  advance  to  the  general,  and  place  himself  near  him 
until  the  whole  have  passed.  At  the  same  time  the  musicians 
will  be  wheeled  to  the  left  by  the  drum  major,  and  formed 
opposite  to  the  general,  where  they  will  play  until  the  last 
company  passes,  then  cease,  and  follow  in  its  rear. 

When  the  head  of  the  column  arrives  opposite  and  in 
front  of  the  ground  on  which  the  left  of  the  second  battalion 
stood,  it  will  change  direction  to  the  left,  march  to  its  original 
ground,  halt,  wheel  into  line,  and  order  arras;  the  general 
will  then  order  the  performance  of  such  exercise  and  ma- 
nceuvres  as  he  thinks  proper. 


192 

'  Article  II. 

Of  Reviews  of  Inspection, 

For  a  review  of  inspection  the  battalion  will  not  be  told 
off",  but  remain  in  companies,  at  open  order;  the  drums  and 
fifes  on  the  right,  and  the  ensign  with  the  colours  in  front. 

The  inspector  will  begin  with  a  general  review,  passing 
along  the  front  of  the  battalion  from  right  to  left,  accompa- 
nied by  the  field  and  staff  officers.  The  general  review  being 
over,  the  lieutenant  colonel  will  command, 

1  Close  ranks. 

2  March. 

The  rear  rank  will  close  to  the  front,  the  officers  remain- 
ing in  front. 

1  By  companies,  right  wheel. 

2  March. 

Each  company  wheels  to  the  right;  the  captains  will  then 
open  the  ranks,  and  order, 

1  Nom-commissioned  officers. 

2  To  the  front. 

3  March. 

The  officers  take  post  four  paces,  and  the  non-commission- 
ed officers  two  paces,  in  front  of  their  companies. 

The  whole  then  order  their  firelocks  by  word  of  command 
from  their  captains,  except  the  first  company,  where  the  in- 
spection begins;  when  the  first  company  has  been  inspected, 
they  order  their  firelocks,  and  the  next  company  shoulders; 
the  others  proceed  in  the  same  manner  till  the  whole  are  in- 
spected. 

The  field  and  staff  officers  accompany  the  inspector  while 
he  inspects  the  companies;  and  when  the  inspection  is  over, 
the  lieutenant  colonel  will  form  the  battalion,  and  cause  it  to 
perform  any  exercise  or  mancsuvres  the  inspector  may  think 
proper  to  see  performed. 


19: 


SECTION  VL 

Instructions. 

Article  I. 
Instructions  for  the  Commandant  of  a  Regiment. 

The  government  having  intrusted  him  with  the  care  of  a 
regiment,  his  greatest  ambition  should  be  to  have  it  at  all 
times  and  in  every  respect  as  complete  as  possible;  to  do 
which  he  should  pay  great  attention  to  the  following  objects. 

The  preservation  of  the  health  of  the  soldiers  should  be  his 
greatest  care;  and  as  that  depends  in  a  great  measure  on 
their  cleanliness  and  manner  of  living,  he  will  have  a  watch- 
ful eye  over  the  officers  of  companies,  that  they  pay  the  ne- 
cessary attention  to  their  men  in  those  respects. 

The  only  means  of  keeping  the  soldiers  in  order  is,  to 
have  them  continually  under  the  eyes  of  their  superiors;  for 
which  reason  the  commandant  should  use  the  utmost  severity 
to  prevent  their  straggling  from  their  companies,  and  never 
suffer  them  to  leave  the  regiment  without  being  under  the 
care  of  a  non-commissioned  officer,  except  in  cases  of  ne- 
cessity. And  in  order  to  prevent  any  man's  being  absent  from 
the  regiment  without  his  knowledge,  he  will  often  count  the 
files,  and  see  that  they  agree  with  the  returns  delivered  to 
him,  strictly  obliging  every  man  returned  fit  for  duty  to  ap- 
pear under  arms  on  all  occasions;  and  if  any  are  missing,  he 
will  oblige  the  commanding  officer  of  the  company  to  account 
for  their  absence.  In  a  word,  the  commandant  ought  to  know 
upon  what  duty  and  where  every  man  of  his  regiment  is.  To 
these  points  the  other  field  officers  will  also  pay  attention. 

The  choice  of  non-commissioned  officers  is  also  an  object 
of  the  greatest  importance.  The  order  and  discipline  of  a 
regiment  depends  so  much  on  their  behaviour,  that  too  much 
care  cannot  be  taken  in  preferring  none  to  that  trust  but  those 
who  by  their  merit  and  good  conduct  are  entitled  to  it. 
Honesty,  sobriety,  and  a  remarkable  attention  to  every  point 
of  duty,  with  a  neatness  in  their  dress,  are  indispensable  re- 
quisites; a  spirit  to  command  respect  and  obedience  from  the 
men,  an  expertness  in  performing  every  part  of  the  exercise, 
and  an  ability  to  teach  it,  are  also  necessary;  nor  can  a  ser- 
geant or  corporal  be  said  to  be  qualified  who  does  not  v/rite 
and  read  in  a  tolerable  manner. 

2  B 


194 

Once  In  every  month,  the  colonel  should  make  a  general 
inspection  of  his  regiment;  examine  into  the  state  of  the  men, 
their  arms,  ammunition,  accoutrements,  necessaries,  camp 
utensils,  and  every  thing  belonging  to  the  regiment,  obliging 
the  commanding  officers  of  companies  to  account  strictly  for 
all  deficiencies. 

All  returns  of  the  regiment  being  signed  by  the  command- 
ing officer,  he  should  examine  them  with  the  greatest  care 
before  he  suffers  them  to  go  out  of  his  hands. 

The  colonel  will  always  march  and  encamp  with  his  regi- 
ment; nor  will  he  permit  any  officer  to  lodge  out  of  camp,  or 
in  a  house,  except  in  case  of  sickness. 

On  a  march  he  will  keep  his  regiment  together  as  much 
as  possible,  and  not  suffer  the  officers  to  leave  their  com- 
panies without  his  permission;  nor  permit  any  of  them,  on 
any  pretence  whatsoever,  to  mount  on  horseback.  There  is 
no  fatigue  the  soldiers  go  through  that  the  officers  should 
not  share;  and  on  all  occasions  they  should  set  them  examples 
of  patience  and  perseverance. 

When  a  regiment  is  on  a  march,  the  commandant  will 
order  a  sergeant  and  six  men  into  the  rear,  to  bring  up  all 
stragglers;  and  the  sergeant  on  his  arrival  in  camp  or  quar- 
ters, will  make  his  report  to  him. 

In  a  v/ord,  the  commanding  officer  of  a  regiment  will  pre- 
serve the  strictest  discipline  and  order  in  his  corps,  obliging 
every  officer  to  perform  his  duty,  without  relaxing  in  the 
smallest  point;  punishing  impartially  the  faults  that  are  com- 
mitted, without  distinction  of  rank  or  service. 

Article  IT. 
Instructions  for  the  Adjutant* 

The  adjutant  is  to  be  chosen  from  among  the  subalterns, 
the  colonel  taking  care  to  appoint  one  of  the  most  intelligent 
and  best  acquainted  with  the  service. 

He  will  keep  an  exact  detail  of  the  dut}'  of  the  officers  and 
non-commissioned  officers  of  his  regiment,  taking  care  to  re- 
gulate his  roster  in  such  a  manner  as  not  to  have  too  many 
officers  or  non-commissioned  officers  of  the  same  company 
on  duty  at  the  same  time. 

He  will  keep  a  book,  in  which  he  will  every  day  take  the 
general  and  other  orders,  and  show  them  to  the  commanding 
officer  of  the  regiment,  who  having  added  those  he  thinks 
necessary  for  the  regiment,  the  adjutant  will  assemble  the 


195 

first  sergeants  of  the  companies,  make  them  copy  the  orders, 
and  give  them  their  details  for  the  next  day. 

He  will  attend  the  parade  at  the  turning  out  of  all  guards 
or  detachments,  inspect  their  dress,  arms,  accoutrements 
and  ammunition,  form  them  into  platoons  or  sections,  and 
conduct  them  to  the  general  or  brigade  parade. 

When  the  regiment  parades  for  duty  or  exercise,  he  will 
count  it  off,  divide  it  into  divisions  and  companies,  and  carry 
the  orders  of  the  colonel  where  necessary. 

The  adjutant  is  to  receive  no  orders  but  from  the  field  of- 
ficers, and  officer  commanding  a  battalion. 

On  a  march  he  will  ride  along  the  flanks  of  the  regiment, 
keeping  to  leeward,  if  the  roads  are  dusty,  to  see  that  regu- 
larity is  observed;  and  will  pay  attention  to  the  sergeant  in 
the  rear,  that  he  brings  up  all  stragglei-s. 

On  arrival  of  the  regiment  in  camp,  his  first  care  will  be  to 
form  and  send  off  the  guards;  and  when  the  tents  are  pitched, 
he  will  immediately  order  out  the  necessary  number  of  fatigue 
men  to  dig  the  vaults  or  sinks,  and  open  communications  where 
necessary.  He  will  then  form  the  detachments  for  wood,  water 
and  other  necessaries. 

He  will  be  constantly  with  the  regiment,  ready  to  receive 
and  execute  any  orders  that  may  come;  nor  must  he  go  from 
his  tent  without  leaving  an  officer  to  do  his  duty,  or  directions 
where  he  may  be  found. 

Article  III. 
Instructions  for  the  farter-Master, 

The  quarter-master,  being  charged  with  encamping  and 
quartering  the  regiment,  should  be  at  all  times  acquainted 
with  its  strength,  that  he  may  require  no  more  ground  than 
is  necessary,  nor  have  more  tents  pitched  than  the  number 
prescribed;  for  both  which  he  is  responsible. 

He  will  inform  the  regiment  where  to  procure  their  wood, 
water  and  other  necessaries,  and  where  to  pasture  the  horses. 

He  will  instruct  the  quarter-master  sergeant  and  pioneers 
in  the  manner  of  laying  out  the  camp,  agreeably  to  the  order 
prescribed  in  the  regulations. 

He  is  answerable  for  the  cleanliness  of  the  camp,  and  that 
the  soldiers  make  no  fire  any  where  but  in  the  kitchens. 

When  the  army  marches,  he  will  conduct  the  pioneers  to 
the  place  appointed,  and  order  the  quarter-master  sergeant 
to  take  charge  of  the  baggage. 


196 

He  will  make  out  all  returns  for  camp  equipage,  arms, 
accoutrements,  ammunition,  provisions  and  forage,  and  re- 
ceive and  distribute  them  to  the  regiment,  taking  the  neces- 
sary vouchers  for  the  delivery,  and  entering  all  receipts  and 
deliveries  in  a  book,  kept  by  him  for  that  purpose. 

He  will  pay  particular  attention  to  the  preservation  of  the 
camp  equipage,  cause  the  necessary  repairs  to  be  done  whea 
wanting,  and  return  every  thing  unfit  for  use  to  the  stores 
from  which  he  drew  them. 

The  preservation  of  the  arms,  accoutrements  and  ammu- 
nition, is  of  such  essential  importance,  thathe  must  be  strictly 
attentive  to  have  those  of  the  sick,  of  the  men  on  furlough, 
discharged,  or  detached  on  command  without  arms,  taken 
care  of  and  deposited  with  the  brigade  conductor,  as  directed 
in  the  regulations. 

Article  IV. 
Instructions  for  the  Captain, 

A  captain  cannot  be  too  careful  of  the  company  the  govern- 
ment has  committed  to  his  charge.  He  will  pay  the  greatest 
attention  to  the  health  of  his  men,  their  discipline,  arms,  ac- 
coutrements, ammunition,  clothes  and  necessaries. 

His  first  object  should  be,  to  gain  the  love  of  his  men,  by 
treating  them  with  every  possible  kindness  and  humanity, 
inquiring  into  their  complaints,  and  when  well  founded,  see- 
ing them  redressed.  He  should  know  every  man  of  his  com- 
pany by  name  and  character.  He  should  often  visit  those 
who  are  sick,  speak  tenderly  to  them,  see  that  the  public 
provision,  whether  of  medicine  or  diet,  is  truly  administered, 
and  procure  them  besides  such  comforts  and  conveniences 
as  are  in  his  power.  The  attachment  that  arises  from  this 
kind  of  attention  to  the  sick  and  wounded,  is  almost  incon- 
ceivable; it  will  moreover  be  the  means  of  preserving  the 
lives  of  many  valuable  men. 

He  will  divide  his  company  into  squads,  placing  each  un- 
der the  particular  care  of  a  non-commissioned  officer,  who  is 
to  be  answerable  for  the  dress  and  behaviour  of  the  men  of 
his  squad. 

He  will  be  very  particular  in  the  daily  and  weekly  inspec- 
tion of  his  men,  causing  all  deficiencies  to  be  immediately 
supplied;  and  when  he  discovers  any  irregularity  in  the  dress 
or  conduct  of  any  soldier,  he  will  not  only  confine  him,  but 
the  non-commissioned  officer  to  whose  squad  he  belongs. 


197 

He  will  keep  a  strict  eye  over  the  conduct  of  the  non-com- 
missioned officers;  oblige  them  to  do  their  duty  with  the 
greatest  exactness;  and  use  every  possible  means  to  keep  up 
a  proper  subordination  between  them  and  the  soldiers;  for 
which  reason  he  will  never  rudely  reprimand  them  in  the 
presence  of  the  men;  but  at  all  times  treat  them  with  proper 
respect. 

He  will  pay  the  utmost  attention  to  every  thing  which  con- 
tributes to  the  health  of  the  men,  and  oblige  them  to  keep 
themselves  and  every  thing  belonging  to  them  in  the  greatest 
cleanliness  and  order.  He  will  never  suffer  a  man  who  has 
any  infectious  disorder  to  remain  in  the  company;  but  send 
him  immediately  to  the  hospital,  or  other  place  provided  for 
the  reception  of  such  patients,  to  prevent  the  spreading  of 
the  infection.  And  when  a  man  is  sick,  or  otherwise  unfit  for 
duty,  or  absent,  he  will  see  that  his  arms  and  accoutrements 
are  properly  taken  care  of,  agreeably  to  the  regulations  pre- 
scribed. 

He  will  keep  a  book,  in  which  must  be  entered  the  name 
and  description  of  every  non-commissioned  officer  and  sol- 
dier of  his  company;  his  trade  or  occupation;  the  place  of 
his  birth  and  usual  residence;  where,  when  and  for  what  term 
he  enlisted;  discharges,  furloughs,  copies  of  all  returns,  and 
every  casualty  that  happens  in  the  company.  He  will  also 
keep  an  account  of  all  arms,  accoutrements,  ammunition, 
clothing,  necessaries  and  camp  equipage  delivered  his  com- 
pany, that  on  inspecting  it  he  may  be  able  to  discover  any 
deficiencies. 

When  the  company  arrive  at  their  quarters  after  a  march, 
he  will  not  dismiss  them  till  the  guards  are  ordered  out;  and 
he  will  strictly  prohibit  his  men  from  vexing  the  inhabitants, 
and  cause  to  be  confined  any  that  offend  in  that  respect.  He 
will  acquaint  them  with  the  hours  of  roll-call  and  going  for 
provisions,  with  their  alarm  post,  and  the  hour  of  march  in 
the  morning. 

If  the  company  make  any  stay  in  a  place,  he  will,  previous 
to  their  marching  inspect  into  their  condition,  examine  their 
knapsacks,  and  see  that  they  carry  nothing  but  what  is  allow- 
ed, it  being  a  material  object  to  prevent  the  soldier  loading 
himself  with  unnecessary  baggage. 


198 

Article  V. 

Instructions  to  an  Officer  commandmg-  a  Post. 

An  officer  arriving  at  a  post  which  he  is  to  occupy,  will  use 
every  possible  exertion  to  put  it  in  a  complete  state  of  de- 
fence. 

If  the  post  is  situated  in  a  village,  where  the  whole  cir- 
cumference cannot  be  conveniently  defended,  the  officer  will 
select  some  strong  building,  by  means  of  which  he  can  se- 
cure a  place  of  retreat,  after  disputing  the  contiguous  ground, 
and  from  which  he  can  annoy  the  enemy  in  approaching  his 
post. 

When  the  enemy  appears  in  force,  he  will  call  in  his  ad- 
vanced posts  and  sentinels,  and  barricade  all  the  avenues. 

He  will  communicate  the  circumstance  to  his  commander, 
and  give  intelligence  to  the  nearest  post,  or  body  of  troops. 

If  the  post  will  not  admit  of  defence,  the  officer  may  be 
justified  in  retreating,  when  the  enemy  appears  to  intend  to 
attack  it  with  a  very  superior  force. 

If  the  post  is  near  the  army,  or  on  its  flank,  and  sup- 
port expected,  the  officer  who  commands  it  will  make  his 
arrangements  for  a  determined  defence,  taking  no  advice. 
He  will  address  his  troops  in  a  manner  indicating  his  fixed 
resolution;  and  is  to  Ksten  to  no  summons  to  surrender. 

He  is  not  to  abandon  the  post  but  after  an  obstinate  de- 
fence, and  after  he  has  lost  hopes  of  defending  it,  or  of  being 
supported. 

If  a  retreat  is  impossible,  and  he  expects  no  succour,  still 
he  will  not  capitulate  until  reduced  to  one  of  these  extre- 
mities. 1.  Having  no  ammunition.  2.  Having  no  provisions, 
and  suffering  from  hunger.  3.  Having  lost  the  greater  part  of 
the  troops  under  his  command. 

There  are  but  two  forms  of  capitulation,  which  are  not  to 
be  deviated  from.  One  of  these  stipulates  for  all  the  honours 
of  war;  the  other  recognizes  a  surrender  as  prisoners  of  war, 
and  is  only  to  be  submitted  to  in  the  last  extremity.  Condi- 
tions not  to  serve  during  the  war,  or  in  a  certain  country,  or 
against  the  present  enemy,  are  inadmissible. 

An  officer  is  never  to  capitulate  under  pretence  of  sparing 
the  place,  the  inhabitants,  or  the  troops  under  his  command, 
unless  expressly  so  instructed.  His  object  must  be  to  defend 
himself  to  the  last,  and  ardently  to  seize  every  opportunity 
of  distinguishing  himself. 


199 

Article  VI. 
Instructions  for  the  First  Sergeant  of  a  Company, 

The  soldier  having  so  far  acquired  the  confidence  of  his 
captain  as  to  be  appointed  first  sergeant  of  the  company, 
should  consider  the  importance  of  his  office;  that  the  disci- 
pline of  the  company,  the  conduct  of  the  men,  their  exact- 
ness in  obeying  orders,  and  the  regularity  of  their  manners, 
will  in  a  great  measure  depend  on  his  vigilance. 

He  should  be  intimately  acquainted  with  the  character  of 
every  soldier  of  the  company,  and  will  take  great  pains  to 
impress  upon  their  minds  the  indispensable  necessity  of  the 
strictest  obedience,  as  the  foundation  of  order  and  regularity. 

He  will  keep  the  details  of  the  company,  and  never  warn 
a  man  out  of  his  turn,  unless  particularly  ordered  so  to  do. 

He  will  take  the  daily  orders  in  a  book  kept  by  him  for 
that  purpose,  and  show  them  to  his  officers. 

He  will  every  morning  make  a  report  to  the  captain  of  the 
state  of  the  company,  in  the  form  prescribed;  and  at  the  same 
time  acquaint  him  with  any  thing  material  that  may  have 
happened  in  the  company  since  the  preceding  report. 

He  will  parade  all  guards  and  detachments  furnished  by 
his  company,  examine  their  arms,  ammunition,  accoutre- 
ments and  dress,  before  he  carries  them  to  the  parade;  and  if 
any  man  appears  unfit,  he  will  supply  his  place  with  another, 
and  have  the  defaulter  confined:  For  this  purpose  he  will 
always  warn  a  man  or  two  more  than  ordered,  to  serve  as  a 
reserve,  who,  if  not  wanted,  will  return  to  their  companies. 

He  will  keep  the  company  book,  under  the  inspection  of 
the  captain,  in  which  he  will  enter  the  name  and  description 
of  every  non-commissioned  officer  and  soldier;  his  trade  and 
occupation;  the  place  of  his  birth  and  usual  residence;  where, 
when  and  for  what  term  he  was  inlisted;  the  bounty  paid  him; 
the  arms,  ammunition,  accoutrements,  clothing  and  neces- 
saries delivered  him,  with  their  marks  and  numbers,  and  ilie 
times  when  delivered;  also  copies  of  all  returns,  furloughs, 
discharges,  and  every  casualty  that  happens  in  the  company. 

When  each  soldier  shall  be  provided  with  a  small  book,  the 
first  sergeant  is  to  enter  therein  the  soldier's  name,  a  copy  of 
his  inlistment,  the  bounty  paid  him,  the  arms,  accoutrements, 
clothing  and  necessaries  delivered  him,  with  their  marks 
and  numbers;  for  this  purpose  he  will  be  present  at  all  dis  ■ 


200 

tributions  in  his  company;  and  as  often  as  arms,  clothing,  Scc= 
are  delivered,  he  will  enter  them  in  the  soldier's  as  well  as  the 
company's  book. 

The  first  sergeant  is  not  to  go  on  any  duty,  unless  with  the 
whole  company;  but  is  to  be  always  in  camp  or  quarters,  to 
answer  any  call  that  may  be  made. 

He  will  form  the  company  in  the  manner  following. 

The  soldiers  having  fallen  into  one  rank,  with  ordered 
arms,  the  first  sergeant  will  command:  Shoulder  arms. 
Right  FACE.  Rank  and  size.  The  tallest  man  will  place  him- 
self in  front  of  the  single  file,  and  the  shortest  in  the  rear. 
Front.  Tell  off  from  right  to  left.  The  soldiers  will  call 
out  "right,"  "left,"  alternately.  Left  files,  to  the  rear  double, 
MARCH.  Right  DRESS.  Rear  rank,  left  face.  Form  to  the 
front,  MARCH.  The  rear  rank  will  form  in  succession  on  the 
left  of  the  front  rank.  Count  off  in  threes  from  right  to  left. 
(Or  in  twos  if  the  formation  is  to  be  in  two  ranks.)  The  sol- 
diers will  call  out,  "first,"  "second,"  &c.  Second  and  third 
files,  to  the  rear,  march.  Right  dress. 

It  is  not  intended  that  either  the  smallest  men,  as  in  Steu- 
ben's system,  or  the  tallest  men,  as  in  the  French  system, 
shall  be  placed  in  front. 

Article  VII. 
Instructions  for  the  Sergeants  and  Corporals* 

It  being  on  the  non-commissioned  officers  that  the  disci- 
pline and  order  of  a  company  in  a  great  measure  depend, 
they  cannot  be  too  circumspect  in  their  behaviour  towards 
the  men,  treating  them  with  mildness,  and  at  the  same 
time  obliging  every  one  to  do  his  duty.  By  avoiding  too 
great  familiarity  with  the  men,  they  will  not  only  gain  their 
love  and  confidence,  but  be  treated  with  a  proper  respect; 
whereas  by  a  contrary  conduct  they  forfeit  all  regard,  and 
their  authority  becomes  despised. 

Each  sergeant  and  corporal  will  be  in  a  particular  manner 
answerable  for  the  squad  committed  to  his  care.  He  will  pay 
particular  attention  to  their  conduct  in  every  respect;  that 
they  keep  themselves  and  their  arms  always  clean;  that  they 
have  their  effects  always  ready,  and  put  where  they  can  get 
them  immediately,  even  in  the  dark,  without  confusion;  and 
on  every  fine  day  he  will  oblige  them  to  air  their  effects. 

When  a  man  of  his  squad  is  warned  for  duty,  he  will  ex- 
amine him  before  he  carries  him  to  the  parade,  obliging  him 


201 

to  take  all  his  effects  with  him,  unless  when  specially  or- 
dered to  the  contrary. 

In  teaching  the  recruits,  the  non-commissioned  officers 
will  exercise  all  their  patience;  by  no  means  abuse  them; 
but  instruct  them  with  coolness,  and  not  expect  precision 
in  the  first  lessons;  punishing  those  only  who  are  wilfully 
negligent. 

They  will  suppress  all  quarrels  and  disputes  in  the  com- 
pany; and  when  other  means  fail,  will  use  their  authority  in 
confining  the  offender. 

They  will  teach  the  soldiers  of  their  squads  how  to  dress 
with  a  soldier-like  air;  how  to  clean  their  arms  and  accou- 
trements; and  how  to  mount  or  dismount  their  firelocks;  for 
which  purpose,  each  non-commissioned  officer  will  always 
be  provided  with  a  turn-screw,  and  will  suffer  no  soldier  to 
take  his  arms  to  pieces  without  his  permission. 

On  a  march,  the  non-commissioned  officers  will  preserve 
order  and  regularity;  and  suffer  no  man  to  leave  his  rank, 
without  permission  of  the  officer  commanding  the  platoon. 

A  corporal  will  teach  the  sentinels  to  challenge  briskly, 
and  every  thing  else  they  are  to  do  in  their  different  situa- 
tions; and  when  he  relieves  them,  will  hear  them  deliver  the 
orders  distinctly. 

When  a  guard  is  relieved,  the  non-commissioned  officers 
will  take  the  orders  from  those  whom  they  relieve;  when  sent 
to  visit  the  sentinels,  they  will  instruct  them  in  their  duty. 
They  should  reconnoitre  the  roads  they  are  to  patrol  in  the 
night,  that  they  may  not  lose  their  way.  They  will  make 
their  patrol  with  the  greatest  silence  and  attention;  and,  when 
necessary,  send  a  faithful  soldier  forward  to  look  out.  If  they 
meet  a  detachment  of  the  enemy  stronger  than  their  own, 
they  will  retreat  in  order  to  their  post.  In  the  night  they 
must  stop  all  strangers  that  approach.  They  will  not  suflFer 
their  men  to  make  the  least  noise  with  their  arms  or  accou- 
trements, and  will  frequently  stop  and  listen.  On  their  re- 
turn from  patroling,  they  will  report  to  the  officer  what  they 
have  seen  or  heard. 

When  a  sergeant  is  a  file-closer  in  action,  he  will  take 
care  to  keep  the  ranks  and  files  properly  closed;  and  when 
too  much  crowded,  make  the  soldiers  incline  from  the  cen- 
tre. When  the  files  of  his  platoon  are  disordered  by  the  loss 
of  men,  he  will  exert  himself  to  dress  it  again  with  the  utmost 
expedition!  He  will  keep  the  greatest  silence  in  the  ranks,  see 
that  the  men  load  well  and  quick,  and  take  good  aim.  He 

2C 


202 

will  do  all  in  his  power  to  encourage  the  soldiers;  and  use 
the  most  vigorous  means  to  prevent  any  from  leaving  the 
ranks,  unless  wounded. 


Article  VIII. 
Instructions  for  the  Private  Soldier. 

The  recruit  having  received  his  necessaries,  will,  in  the 
first  place,  learn  to  dress  himself  with  a  soldier-like  air;  to 
place  his  effects  properly  in  his  knapsack,  so  as  to  carry  them 
with  convenience;  to  salute  his  officers  when  he  meets  them; 
to  clean  his  arms,  wash  his  linen,  and  cook  his  provisions. 
He  should  early  accustom  himself  to  dress  in  the  night, 
and  always  have  his  effects  in  his  knapsack,  placed  where 
he  can  put  his  hand  on  it  in  a  moment,  that  in  case  of  an 
alarm,  he  may  repair  with  the  greatest  alertness  to  the  parade. 

When  learning  to  march,  he  will  take  the  greatest  pains 
to  acquire  a  firm  step,  and  a  proper  balance;  practising 
at  all  his  leisure  hours.  He  will  accustom  himself  to  the 
greatest  steadiness  under  arms;  pay  attention  to  the  com- 
mands of  his  officers;  and  exercise  frequently  with  his  fire- 
lock, in  order  to  acquire  vivacity  in  his  motions.  He  will  ac- 
quaint himself  with  the  usual  beats  and  signals  of  the  drum, 
and  instantly  obey  them. 

When  in  the  ranks,  he  will  always  learn  the  names  of  his 
right  and  left  hand  men,  and  file  leader,  that  he  may  be  able 
to  find  his  place  readily  in  case  of  separation.  He  must  cover 
his  file-leader,  and  dress  well  in  his  rank.  Having  joined  his 
company,  he  will  no  longer  consider  himself  as  a  recruit,  but 
as  a  soldier;  and  whenever  he  is  ordered  under  arms,  will  ap- 
pear well  dressed,  with  his  arms  and  accoutrements  clean 
and  in  good  order,  and  his  knapsack  and  blanket  ready  to 
throw  on  his  back,  in  case  he  should  be  ordered  to  take  them. 

When  warned  for  guard,  he  will  appear  as  neat  as  possible, 
carry  all  his  effects  with  him,  and  even  when  on  post  as  a  sen- 
tinel, should  have  them  at  his  back;  he  will  receive  the  or- 
ders from  the  sentinel  he  relieves;  and  when  placed  before 
the  guard-house,  he  will  inform  the  corporal  of  all  who  ap- 
proach, and  suffer  no  one  to  enter  until  examined;  if  he  is 
posted  at  a  distance  from  the  guard,  he  will  have  the  orders 
well  explained  to  him  by  the  corporal;  learn  which  is  the 
nearest  post  between  him  and  the  guard,  in  case  he  should 


203 

fae  obliged  to  retire,  or  h?ve  any  thing  to  communicate;  and 
what  he  is  to  do  in  case  of  an  alarm;  or  if  in  a  town,  in  case 
of  fire,  or  any  disturbance.  He  will  never  go  more  than  twen- 
ty paces  from  his  post;  and  if  in  a  retired  place,  or  in  the 
night,  suffer  no  one  to  approach  within  ten  paces  of  him. 

When  on  the  approach  of  an  officer,  a  sentinel  is  to  pre- 
sent or  carry  arms,  he  will  face  to  his  proper  front. 

A  sentinel  must  never  quit  or  rest  upon  his  arms,  read, 
sing,  or  talk  unnecessarily,  but  keep  walking  on  his  post,  and 
looking  about.  He  must  never  suffer  himself  to  be  relieved 
but  by  his  corporal;  challenge  briskly  in  the  night,  and  stop 
those  who  have  not  the  countersign;  and  if  any  will  not  an- 
swer to  the  third  challenge^  and,  having  been  ordered  to  stand^ 
should  attempt  to  advance  or  escape,  he  may  fire  on  them. 

When  on  patrol,  the  soldier  will  observe  the  strictest  si- 
lence, nor  make  the  least  noise  with  his  arms  or  accoutre- 
ments. 

When  ordered  to  march,  he  must  not  charge  himself  with 
any  unnecessary  baggage;  he  will  march  at  his  ease,  without 
however  leaving  his  rank  or  file;  he  should  drink  seldom, 
and  never  stop  but  when  necessity  obliges  him;  in  which 
case  he  must  ask  leave  of  the  commanding  officer  of  the  pla- 
toon, hand  his  arms  to  a  comrade,  and  run  some  distance 
forward. 

When  arrived  at  camp  or  quarters,  he  will  clean  his  arms, 
prepare  his  bed,  and  go  for  necessaries,  taking  nothing  with- 
out leave,  nor  committing  any  kind  of  excess. 

In  action  he  will  pay  the  greatest  attention  to  the  com- 
mands of  his  officers;  level  well,  and  not  throw  away  his  fire; 
take  particular  care  to  keep  his  rank  and  file;  incline  to  that 
side  he  dresses  to;  and  encourage  his  comrades  to  do  their 
dutv. 


Article  IX. 
Instructions  for  the  Drmn  Major. 

In  column  of  manoeuvre,  the  musicians  will  march  on  the 
reverse  flank,  dressing  with  the  front  of  the  fifth  company. 

In  column  of  route,  and  in  passing  defiles,  they  will  march 
at  the  head  of  the  battalion. 

They  will  always  wheel  in  echellon  of  files,  by  advancing 
a  shoulder. 


204 


Signals  for  the  Evolutions  of  the  Musicians. 

To  march  to  the  front.  Point  the  cane  directly  forward, 
and  then  bring  it  to  the  position  of  the  carried  sword. 

To  march  by  a  flank.  Take  the  cane  by  the  middle,  and 
extend  the  arm  to  the  right,  if  they  are  to  march  by  the  right 
flank;  or  to  the  left,  if  they  are  to  march  by  the  left  flank. 

To  break  into  subdivisions.  Extend  the  left  hand  at  the 
height  of  the  eyes,  and  strike  the  point  of  the  cane  into  it. 

To  form  up  into  one  division.  Extend  the  left  hand  at  the 
height  of  the  eyes,  and  strike  the  butt  of  the  cane  into  it. 

To  zvheel  into  a  7iexu  direction.  Turn  round  to  the  musi- 
cians, and  by  pointing  with  the  cane,  indicate  to  them  the 
new  direction  into  which  they  are  to  wheel. 

To  march  oblique.  Grasp  the  cane  by  the  middle,  hold  it 
horizontally  before  the  musicians,  and  move  it  forward  in 
the  oblique  direction  they  are  to  take. 

To  halt.  Face  the  musicians,  bring  the  heels  even,  and  set 
the  point  of  the  cane  on  the  ground,  the  right  arm  stretched 
out  to  the  right. 

The  drums  should  be  put  on  the  ground,  or  taken  up,  by 
all  the  drummers  at  the  same  instant.  To  effect  this,  a  signal 
of  three  motions  will  be  made. 

1  To  put  up  the  drumsticks.  Grasp  the  staff  at  the  butt, 
raise  it  as  high  as  the  eyes,  the  point  down,  and  extend  the 
arm  to  the  front. 

2.  To  detach  the  dwns.  Draw  in  the  cane  to  the  breast. 

0.  To  ground  the  drions.  Extend  again  the  hand  grasping 
the  cane,  to  the  front. 

1.  To  take  up  drums,  2.  To  suspend  drums.  3.  To  draw  the 
drumsticks.  Make  the  same  three  motions  with  the  cane, 
which  have  just  been  described. 

To  commence  beating.  Flourish  the  cane,  the  point  held 
horizontally  forward,  and  strike  in  the  left  hand  at  the  height 
of  the  waist. 

To  cease  beating.  Flourish  the  cane,  the  point  upward., 
and  then  bring  the  point  to  the  ground. 


205 


SECTION  VII. 

Various  Regulations. 

Article  I. 
Regulation  relative  to  Subordination. 

It  is  the  intention  of  the  government  that  there  shall  be  es- 
tablishtd  in  every  regiment  a  subordination  descending 
through  all  ranks,  which  without  losing  its  force  and  effi- 
cacy, shoU  exclude  oppression,  and  be  maintained  on  the 
basis  of  justice. 

Soldiers  shall  be  treated  with  humanity  and  kindness; 
they  shall  never  be  wronged  or  injured;  their  superiors  shall 
be  beneficent  friends;  the  punishments,  sometimes  unavoid- 
able, shall  be  strictly  conformable  to  martial  law,  and  the 
feelings  of  humanity;  and  their  officers  shall  direct  and  pro- 
tect them,  ivith  the  regard  and  care  due  to  men,  on  whose 
obedience  and  valour  greatly  depend  their  own  future  repu- 
tation and  glory. 

The  government  requires  from  inferiors  a  passive  obe- 
dience to  those  placed  over  them;  and  that  all  orders  shall 
be,  at  all  times,  implicitly  executed.  But  it  is  understood 
that  orders  are  not  to  be  manifestly  against  law  and  reason. 
And  all  superiors,  of  whatever  rank,  are  strictly  forbidden 
to  injure  those  under  their  command,  by  harsh,  abusive,  and 
unbecoming  language,  or  by  overbearing,  unjust,  and  ty- 
rannical conduct.  I 


Article  II. 

Regulation  respecting  Roll  calls. 

At  the  first  appearance  of  day,  the  officer  of  the  guard 
will  cause  the  taps  to  be  given  on  the  orderly  drum;  the  mu- 
sicians will  assemble  on  the  parade;  and  in  five  minutes  after 
the  caps  have  been  given,  they  will  commence  the  reveille; 
every  officer  and  soldier  will  instantly  rise;  so  soon  as  it  is 
finished,  the  rolls  shall  be  called. 


206 

From  the  20th  of  March  until  the  20th  of  September,  the 
troop  will  be  beat  at  nine  o'clock  in  the  morning,  and  the 
tattoo  at  nine  o'clock  at  night.  During  the  other  half  of  the 
year,  the  troop  will  be  beat  at  eight  o'clock  in  the  morning, 
and  the  tattoo  at  eight  o'clock  at  night. 

The  retreat  will  always  be  beat  fifteen  minutes  before  sun- 
setting. 

At  troop  and  retreat  beating,  the  troops  will  parade  with 
arms.  Should  the  detachment  present  consist  of  various 
corps,  the  infantry  would  take  the  centre,  flanked  by  the  light 
troopsj  the  artillery  on  the  right. 

The  senior  officer  present  at  the  last  stroke  of  the  drum, 
shall  command  the  parade;  and  for  that  purpose  will  post 
himself  thirty  paces  before  the  centre. 

Ten  minutes  before  the  hour  prescribed  for  roll  call,  the 
orderly  drummer  will  beat  the  drummer'' s  call;  the  musicians 
will  repair  to  the  grand  parade;  the  soldiers  will  fall  in  with 
arms  on  their  company  parade,  where  the  first  sergeant  will 
form  the  company,  bring  them  to  an  order,  and  take  post  on 
the  right. 

Five  minutes  after  the  Jirst  call^  the  whole  of  the  musi- 
cians on  the  parade  shall  beat  the  second,  or  adjutant's  call. 
At  this  signal,  each  first  sergeant  will  bring  his  company  to 
a  shoulder,  march  it  to  its  place  on  the  grand  parade,  open 
the  ranks,  order  arms,  and  take  post  on  the  line  of  file  closers, 
on  the  right,  opposite  the  interval.  The  company  officers  will 
at  the  same  time  take  post  eight  paces  in  front  of  their  com- 
panies, opposite  to  their  places  in  the  line,  facing  toward 
their  companies,  and  standing  at  ease. 

From  the  beating  of  the  second  call  until  the  hour  pre- 
scribed for  troop  or  retreat  beating  shall  arrive,  the  band  will 
play. 

The  hour  of  troop  or  retreat  beating  having  arrived,  the 
adjutant  will  direct  the  drum  major  to  "  beat  oflf."  The  mu- 
sicians, on  receiving  the  signal  from  the  drum  major,  will 
commence  beating  at  the  centre;  they  will  bear  to  the  left, 
then  to  the  right,  and  back  to  the  centre,  where  they  will 
conclude  with  three  rolls  and  a  flourish;  at  the  last  of  the 
rolls,  the  company  officers  will  face  to  the  front,  and  draw 
their  swords.  The  musicians  will  vake  post  on  thf:  right. 

The  adjutart  will  then  dra>v  his  sword,  advance  a  few 
paces  from  the  right,  and  command, 


207 

1  Attention. 

2  Shoulder  arms. 

3  Right  DRESS. 

He  will  see  that  the  different  ranks  are  dressed,  and  com- 
mand, 

4  Steady. 

He  will  then  march  along  the  front  to  the  centre,  advance 
directly  to  the  front  twelve  paces,  face  to  the  right  about,  and 
command. 

Present  arms. 

The  detachment  or  battalion  will  present  arms;  the  adju- 
tant will  face  to  the  front,  and  advance  to  within  twelve  paces 
of  the  commanding  officer,  halt,  salute  with  the  sword,  and 
announce,  "  Sir,  the  parade  is  formed."  The  commanding  of- 
ficer will  reply,  "  Take  vour  station."  The  adjutant  will  put 
up  his  sword,  advance,  and  place  himself  on  the  left  of  the 
commanding  officer,  a  pace  retired.  The  commanding  officer, 
on  giving  the  order  to  the  adjutant,  will  draw  his  sword,  and 
command.  Shoulder  arms.  Eyes  right.  Eyes  left.  Stea- 
dy. Support  ARMS.  Carry  arms.  Present  arms.  Shoulder 
ARMS.  Order  arms.  Rest.  He  will  then  direct  the  adjutant 
to  "  call  the  rolls."  The  adjutant  will  draw  his  sword,  ad- 
vance twelve  paces,  and  command, 

1  First  sergeants,  to  the  front. 

2  March. 

They  will  advance  arms,  march  through  the  intervals  four 
paces  to  the  front,  and  halt.  The  adjutant  will  order,  "  Call 
rolls;"  on  which  the  captains  and  first  sergeants  will  go  to 
the  right  about,  and  the  first  sergeant  of  each  company  will 
call  the  roll,  under  the  inspection  of  the  captain;  which  being- 
done,  they  will  face  to  the  front.  The  adjutant  will  com- 
mand, 

1  First  sergeants,  right  and  left  face. 

2  To  the  centre,  march. 

At  the  first  command,  they  will  face  to  the  centre,  and  at 
the  second,  march  until  they  meet  at  the  centre.  The  adju- 
tant will  command, 

1  Front. 

2  Report. 


208 

At  the  first  command,  they  front;  at  the  second,  each  with 
recovered  arms,  commencing  on  the  right,  reports  distinctly, 
and  then  advances  arms.  The  adjutant  will  command, 

1  First  sergeants,  to  the  right  and  left  face. 

2  To  your  posts,  march. 

At  the  first  command,  they  will  face  outwards  from  the 
centre;  at  the  second  command,  they  will  march  to  the  right 
of  their  respective  companies,  take  post  in  the  mterval  on  the 
front  rank,  and  order  arms.  The  adjutant  will  then  face  to 
the  right  about,  salute  with  his  sword,  and  report  to  the  com- 
manding officer,  who  will  direct  him  to  read  the  orders  of 
the  day,  if  any;  this  being  done,  the  adjutant  will  return  his 
sword,  and  resume  his  place  near  the  commanding  officer, 
who  will  then  return  his  sword,  and  by  a  salute  with  the  hat, 
intimate  that  th  parade  is  dismissed.  Each  captain  will  di- 
rect his  first  sergeant  to  take  off  his  company,  who  will  bring 
them  to  shouldered  arms,  march  them  to  the  company  pa- 
rade, face  them  to  the  right  about,  and  dismiss  them.  The 
company  officers  at  the  same  time  will  advance  to  the  com- 
manding officer,  salute  with  the  hat,  and  retire. 


Article  III. 

Regulation  of  the  Salute  xvitJi  Sword  or  Colours* 

The  sword  will  be  carried  with  the  right  hand  at  the  haunch, 
the  blade  leaning  against  the  shoulder.  The  salute,  standing 
or  marching,  will  be  performed  in  four  motions. 

1.  Raise  the  sword  perpendicularly  before  the  eyes,  the 
hand  as  high  as  the  breast,  the  flat  side  of  the  sword  blade 
next  to  the  face. 

2.  Bring  down  the  blade,  the  flat  side  up,  extending  the 
arm  so  as  to  form  with  the  sword  a  straight  line,  forty-five 
degrees  to  the  right  of  a  line  drawn  direct  to  the  front,  and 
as  many  below  a  horizontal  line,  drawn  from  the  shoulder. 
Let  the  sword  remain  in  this  position,  if  the  salute  is  given 
marching,  until  the  officer  saluted  has  been  passed  two  paces. 

3.  Bring  up  the  sword  to  the  position  taken  by  the  first 
motion. 

4.  Bring  it  down  to  its  original  position. 


209 

The  colours  will  be  borne  with  the  butt  of  the  stafF  at  the 
right  haunch. 

The  salute  with  the  colours  will  be  performed  by  gently 
lowering  them  until  the  point  is  within  six  inches  of  the 
ground.  If  the  salute  is  given  marching,  they  will  be  raised 
when  the  officer  saluted  has  been  passed  two  paces.  They 
shall  descend  on  the  right,  and  rise  on  the  left,  with  a  circu- 
lar sweep,  the  butt  remaining  in  the  rest,  at  the  haunch. 


Article  IV'. 
Regulatio7i  rcspecWig  Funerals. 

On  the  day  of  the  interment  of  a  commanding  general,  a 
gun  will  be  fired  every  half  hour  until  the  procession  moves. 

All  the  troops  of  his  command  will  remain  under  arms 
during  the  movement  of  the  funeral  procession. 

The  funeral  escort  at  the  interment  of  a  major  general, 
will  consist  of  a  regiment  of  infantry,  and  tvro  troops  of  cav- 
alry, preceded  by  two  field  pieces. 

On  lowering  the  body  into  the  earth,  three  rounds  will  be 
fired  by  the  artillery,  and  the  troops  of  the  line. 

The  funeral  escort  at  the  interment  of  a  brigadier  general 
will  consist  of  a  regiment  of  infantry,  and  one  troop  of  cav- 
alry. 

On  lowering  the  body  of  a  brigadier  general  into  the  earth, 
three  rounds  will  be  fired  by  the  line. 

In  either  case,  the  firing  will  be  concluded  by  the  escort 
of  infantry,  who  will  fire  three  rounds  over  the  grave. 

The  escort  at  the  interment  of  a  colonel,  shall  consist  of  a 
regiment;  of  a  lieutenant  colonel,  a  battalion;  of  a  major,  four 
companies;  of  a  captain,  three  companies;  of  a  subaltern,  two 
companies;  of  a  sergeant,  one  company;  of  a  corporal,  one 
platoon;  of  a  private,  one  squad,  commanded  by  a  corporal. 

The  funeral  escort  shall  always  be  commanded  by  an  of- 
ficer of  the  same  rank  with  the  deceased;  or  if  none  such  be 
present,  by  one  of  the  next  inferior  grade. 

The  armed  escort  shall  not  exceed  the  number  prescribed 
in  any  case.  The  procession,  and  the  number  who  may  join 
in  it,  will  be  regulated  according  to  circumstances. 

Officers  for  funeral  parties  shall  be  detailed  by  the  roster 
kept  for  regulating  the  duty  of  guards  of  honour.  The  pall 
bearers,  of  whom  there  shall  be  six,  will  be  detailed  in  the 
like  manner. 

2D 


210 

The  colouvs  of  the  regiment,  if  present,  will  be  borne  co- 
vered with  crape,  at  the  funeral  of  a  colonel,  as  will  those  of 
the  battalion,  if  present,  at  the  funeral  of  a  lieutenant  colonel. 

The  drums  shall  be  muffled,  and  covered  with  thin  black 
serge. 

The  escort  being  formed  in  line,  with  shouldered  arms, 
without  bayonets,  before  the  tent  or  quarters  where  the  corpse 
lies,  it  will  be  brought  out.  On  its  appearance,  the  detach- 
ment will  present  arms,  and  the  music  will  play  an  appro- 
priate air.  The  corpse  will  be  borne  to,  and  halted  on  the 
right;  the  detachment  will  shoulder  arms,  and  form  the  open 
column,  with  the  left  in  front.  The  commanding  officer  will 
then  order, 

1  Reverse  arms. 

2  Column  forward. 

3  Guide  to  the  right. 

4  March. 

At  the  first  command,  the  soldiers  will  come  to  the  posi- 
tion of  "  secure  firelock;"  the  officers  will  bring  their  swords 
under  the  right  arm,  the  right  hand  at  the  hilt. 

At  the  fourth  command,  the  column  followed  by  the  mu- 
sic and  procession,  will  be  marched  to  the  grave,  taking  a 
direction  to  leave  it  on  the  directing  flank  of  the  column. 

When  the  centre  of  the  column  is  opposite  to  the  grave,  it 
will  be  halted,  brought  to  shouldered  arms,  and  w^heeled  into 
line.  The  commanding  officer  will  then  order. 

Rest  on  arms. 

1.  2.  The  same  as  the  two  first  motions  of  "  present  arms." 

3.  Turn  up  the  butt  with  the  right  hand,  place  the  muzzle 

on  the  left  toe,  the  barrel  to  the  front,  lay  the  right  hand  on 

the  butt  and  the  left  hand  on  the  right,  bend  the  right  knee, 

incline  the  head  forward,  and  look  downward. 

The  corpse  will  then  be  interred;  this  being  done,  the  com- 
manding officer  will  order. 

Attention. 
Shoulder  arms. 

Seize  the  piece  with  the  right  hand,  thumb  downward,  at 
the  small,  and  with  the  left  at  the  swell,  bring  it  to  the  shoul- 
der, the  left  hand  on  the  butt,  and  the  right  down  by  the 
side. 


211 

Prime  and  load. 

This  command  will  be  executed  as  has  been  prescribed; 
and  the  detachment  will  fire  three  rounds  over  the  grave. 
This  being  done,  they  will  be  ordered  to  shoulder  arms, 
wheeled  into  open  column  to  the  right,  and  marched  off  in 
quick  time,  the  music  playing  a  sprightly  air. 


THE  END. 


EXPLANATION  OF  THE  PLATES. 


GENERAL  REMARKS. 

IN  all  the  plates,  the  strong  line  represents  the  front  rank. 

The  dotted  double  lines  indicate  the  position  occupied  pre- 
vious to  the  movement. 

The  parallelogram  figures  not  etched,  represent  the  troops 
subsequent  to  the  first  movement. 

Those  etched,  or  filled  up  with  small  lines,  represent  the 
bodies  of  men  after  executing  the  whole  movement,  or  in  the 
last  stage  of  it. 

The  single  dotted  lines  mark  the  paths,  or  lines,  over 
which  the  troops  move  from  one  position  to  another. 

The  arrow  on  a  dotted  line,  shows  the  direction  in  which 
the  guides  on  the  flanks  of  companies  are  to  march. 

The  letter  C  represents  the  captains  of  companies,  and  the 
way  in  which  they  are  facing. 

The  lieutenant  colonels,  or  commandants  of  battalions, 
are  in  all  the  plates  represented  on  horseback. 

The  major  is  represented  on  foot  with  a  sword,  and  the 
adjutant  on  foot  with  a  cane. 

The  arrow  in  many  of  the  figures,  indicates  the  direction 
of  the  march. 

PLATE  1. 

Represents  the  formation  of  a  regiment  in  line. 

The  drum  major  is  placed  before  the  musicians  of  the  first 
battalion,  and  the  second  senior  musician,  or  corporal  drum- 
mer, before  the  musicians  of  the  second  battalion;  the  band 
two  paces  in  the  rear  of  the  fifers  of  the  first  battalion. 

Note.  One  of  the  sergeants  is  omitted,  in  laying  down  the 
line  of  file  closers. 

2E 


214 


PLATE  2. 

Fig.  1.  Position  of  the  soldier  under  arms,  being  a  front 
view. 

Fig.  2.  Tiie  position  of  the  soldier,  represented  in  profile. 

Fig.  3.  Position  of  the  soldier  in  marching. 

Fig,  4,  5,  and  6.  Positions  of  the  first,  second,  and  third 
ranks,  taken  on  receiving  the  word,  "•  Ready." 

Fig.  7,  8,  and  9.  Positions  of  the  first,  second,  and  third 
ranks,  taken  on  receiving  the  word,  "  Aim." 

Fig.  10.  Represents  the  position  of  the  three  ranks,  taken 
on  receiving  the  word,  "  Charge  bayonet." 


PLATE  3. 

Fig.  1.  Represents  a  company  marching  by  the  right  flank, 
wheeling  its  head  by  files  to  the  left,  and  afterwards  to  the 
right. 

The  captain  (b)  is  beside  the  covering  sergeant  (a),  who 
leads  the  company;  the  instructer  (c)  is  placed  at  the  wheeling 
point. 

Fig.  2.  Represents  a  company  marching  by  the  right  flank, 
and  forming  on  the  right,  by  files  in  succession. 

Fig.  3.  Represents  a  company  marching  by  the  right  flank, 
and  forming  to  the  front. 


PLATE  4. 

Fig.  1.  Represents  a  company  wheeling  forward  from 
line,  into  open  column  of  platoons. 

The  right  hand  man  of  the  front  rank  of  each  platoon  has 
faced  to  the  right  (c);  the  officers  of  platoons  (d)  have  placed 
themselves  to  dress  the  platoons;  the  guides  (e)  have  taken 
their  stations  on  the  left;  finally  the  officers  place  themselves 
before  their  platoons  (f). 

Fig.  2.  Represents  a  company  marching  in  column  of  pla- 
toons, and  wheeling  on  the  march  into  a  new  direction,  on 
the  side  of  the  guide,  by  echellons  of  files. 

The  guide  (g)  has  turned  to  the  left,  without  altering  his 
step;  a  marker  (h)  shows  the  wheeling  point;  some  files  (i) 
ire  advancing  by  the  quick  step;  others  (k)  have  formed, 


215 

and  are  advancing  in  common  timejthe  instrircter  (1)  re- 
mains at  the  wheeling  point,  to  observe  the  movement. 

Fig.  3.  Represents  a  company  marching  in  column  of  pla- 
toons, and  wheeling  on  a  movable  pivot. 

The  guide  (e)  follows  the  steps  of  the  guide  (d);  the  pivot 
man  (  f )  takes  steps  of  six  inches;  a  marker  (m)  shows  the 
point  where  the  wheeling  commences;  the  officers  of  pla- 
toons face  them  while  they  wheel,  and  conduct  the  move- 
ment. 

Fig.  4.  Represents  a  company  in  column  of  platoons 
wheeling  forward  to  the  left  into  line. 

The  left  hand  front  rank  man  (b)  faces  to  the  left;  the 
guides  (e)  stand  fast;  the  platoon  is  halted  when  the  march- 
ing flank  has  arrived  within  two  paces  of  the  line  of  guides; 
the  officer  of  the  second  platoon  having  given  the  command 
"  halt,"  retires  to  the  line  of  file  closers;  the  captain  directs 
the  dressing  of  the  company. 


PLATE  5. 

Fig.  1.  Represents  a  company  marching  as  if  in  column, 
forming  platoons  on  the  march. 

The  two  officers  who  are  to  command  the  platoons  are 
marked  (a)  and  (bj. 

Fig.  2.  Represents  a  company  in  column  of  platoons,  with 
the  right  in  front,  forming  company  on  the  march. 

Fig.  3.  Represents  a  company,  suppesed  a  part  of  a  co- 
lumn, with  the  right  in  front,  executing  the  countermarch. 

The  guide  on  the  left  (a)  has  faced  to  the  right  about;  the 
company  wheels  by  files  at  (b);  and  when  the  leading  file 
arrives  at  the  guide  (a)  who  faced  about,  and  stood  fast,  the 
company  halts,  fronts,  and  dresses  by  him.  At  the  word 
"  STEADY,"  the  guide  (d),  the  proper  guide  of  the  right, 
takes  the  place  of  the  guide  (a),  who  goes  along  the  front  to 
the  left;  the  instructer  (f)  remains  on  the  flank  to  observe 
the  movement. 

PLATE  6. 

Fig.  1.  Represents  a  battalion  in  line,  wheeling  forward 
by  companies  from  line  into  open  column,  the  right  in  front. 

The  letters  (a),  (f ),  and  (g),  show  the  positions  of  tht 
commandant,  major,  and  adjutant. 


216 

Fig.  2.  Represents  a  battalion  in  line,  wheeling  iorward 
into  open  column,  the  right  in  front,  in  order  to  march  to- 
wards the  left. 

The  unetched  figures  of  companies,  show  their  situation 
when  the  leading  company  had  marched  forward  twice  the 
extent  of  its  front,  while  the  other  companies  wheeled;  the 
companies  wheel  at  the  point  marked  by  the  marker  (b);  the 
major  (f )  marches  even  with  the  first  company;  the  com- 
mandant (a)  observes  the  wheeling. 

Fig.  3.  Represents  a  battalion  in  line,  filing  into  column 
from  the  right  of  companies  to  the  rear. 

The  figure  (a)  shows  the  battalion  after  it  has  faced  to  the 
right,  and  the  heads  of  companies  have  been  disengaged  to 
the  rear.  The  figure  (b)  shows  the  open  column  formed. 
The  two  lines  are  laid  down  to  represent  the  movement  dis- 
tinctly; but  the  left  guides  of  the  column,  when  formed,  are 
on  the  original  line. 

PLATE  1. 

Fig.  1.  Represents  a  battalion  forming  close  column  of 
divisions  in  rear  of  the  right  division. 

The  major  and  adjutant  (d  and  f,)  dress  the  guides  (b)  on 
the  directing  flank. 

Fig.  2.  Represents  a  battalion  forming  a  close  column  of 
divisions,  on  a  central  division,  with  the  right  in  front. 

Fig.  3.  Represents  a  battalion  forming  a  close  column  oT 
divisions,  in  front  of  the  left  division. 


PLATE  8. 

Fig.  1.  Represents  a  battalion  close  column,  with  the  right 
in  fro  •  ,  countermarching. 

The  representation  above,  shows  the  movement  during  itis 
execution. 

The  representation  below,  shows  the  movement  com- 
pleted. 

i*  ig.  2.  Shows  a  battalion  close  column  with  the  right  in 
front,  forming  divisions  from  the  halt. 

Fig.  3.  Represents  the  mode  of  ascertaining  two  points  for 
a  line  to  form  on,  between  two  distant  conspicuous  objects. 

Fig.  4.  Represents  a  battalion  in  open  column  with  the 
right  in  front  arriving  in  front  of  the  line  on  which  it  is  to 


217 

form,  and  marching  along  that  line  by  means  of  the  general 
guides,  and  the  colours. 

Fig.  5.  Represents  a  battalion  in  open  column,  with  the 
right  in  front,  arriving  behind  the  line  on  which  it  is  to  form, 
and  pursuing  that  line  by  means  of  the  general  guides,  and 
the  colours. 

The  directing  flank  has  been  conducted  more  to  the  left  by 
the  extent  of  a  company,  than  the  intermediate  point  (d)  pre- 
viously ascertained  on  the  line;  and  after  wheeling,  is  four 
paces  in  the  rear  of  the  line. 


PLATE  9. 

Fig.  1.  and  2.  Represent  a  battalion  marching  in  open 
column,  at  full  distance,  with  the  right  in  front,  changing  di- 
rection on  the  reverse  flank,  on  a  movable  pivot;  and  after- 
wards wheeling  to  the  left,  into  a  new  direction. 

Fig.  3.  Represents  a  battalion  marching  in  open  column, 
at  full  distance,  with  the  right  in  front,  changing  the  direc- 
tion of  its  march  by  the  prompt  manceuvre. 


PLATE  10. 

Fig.  1  Represents  a  battalion  marching  in  open  column  at 
half  distance,  with  the  right  in  front,  and  changing  direction 
on  the  reverse  flank,  on  a  movable  pivot. 

The  pivot  man  takes  steps  of  one  foot,  instead  of  six  inches. 

Fig.  2.  Represents  a  battalion  (A)  in  close  column,  with 
the  right  in  front,  halted,  and  changing  direction  to  the  right 
or  left. 

The  letters  (e,  d,  g,  h,)  represent  markers  placed  on  the 
new  directions;  (b)  and  (f  )  are  points  of  direction. 


PLATE  11. 

Fig.  t.  Represents  a  battalion  in  open  column,  at  full  dis- 
tance of  companies,  with  the  right  in  front,  forming  line  on 
the  right  fl^nk,  by  the  successive  wheeling  and  formation  of 
the  companies. 

The  column  marching  on  the  direction  (d,  e,)  changed  its 
direction  at  the  point  (  I  )  to  march  on  a  line  parallel  to  that 
on  which  it  is  to  form;  the  adjutant  (m)  has  placed  two  mar- 


218 

kers  on  the  line  between  (a)  and  (b);  the  first  (k)  at  the  point 
of  rest;  the  second  ( i  )  at  a  little  less  than  company  distance. 

The  major  (h)  corrects  the  position  of  the  guides;  the  com- 
mandant (g)  will  still  be  opposite  to  the  company  about  to 
form  on  the  line. 

Fig.  2.  Represents  a  battalion  open  column  at  full  distance, 
with  the  right  in  front,  forming  forward  to  the  front  of  the 
march  into  line,  on  the  leading  company,  by  an  echellon 
movement. 

The  column  is  halted  at  the  distance  of  a  company  from 
the  line;  two  markers  (a  b)  are  established  on  the  line  by  the 
adjutant  (m);  the  leading  company  will  form  on  the  markers^ 
the  others  wheel  into  echellon,  and  march  to  their  front;  the 
right  guides  of  companies  (  f  )  march  in  the  steps  of  the  files 
before  them  (d)  until  the  preceding  company,  arriving  at  (e), 
wheels,  as  at  (o),  to  march  up  square  on  the  line;  the  com- 
mandant of  the  battalion  (g)  attends  to  the  successive  forma- 
tion; the  major  (h)  corrects  and  establishes  the  position  of 
the  guides,  as  they  successively  come  on  the  line. 


PLATE  12. 

Fig.  1.  Represents  a  battalion  open  column,  at  full  dis- 
tance, with  the  right  in  front,  forming  the  line  faced  to  the 
rear. 

Two  markers  (c  d)  have  been  previously  placed  on  the 
line;  on  them  the  first  company  forms;  the  left  guide  (e)  will 
precede  the  company  ten  paces,  and  place  himself  on  the  line 
at  the  point  where  the  company  will  cross  it  to  countermarch 
into  its  position. 

Fig.  2.  Represents  a  battalion  close  column  previous  to 
displaying;  and  the  same  column  displaying*  into  line  on  a 
central  division. 

PLATE  15. 

Fig.  1.  Represents  a  battalion  which  is  to  advance  in  line. 

Fig.  2.  Represents  a  battalion,  which,  after  having  ad- 
vanced in  line,  is  to  be  dressed  on  a  line  parallel,  or  oblique 
to  its  position. 

•  The  French  word  "deployment,"  is  rejected  as  unnecessary  and  in- 
definite; being  used  to  sij^nlty  as  well  the  movement  from  line  into  columi!- 
•IS  the  movement  from  column  into  line. 


219 


PLATE  14. 

Fig.  1.  Represents  a  subordinate  battalion  marching  in 
line,  and  committing  the  fault  of  taking  a  false  direction. 
The  figure  shows  the  effects  of  the  error. 

Fig.  2.  Shows  the  means  to  be  used  to  bring  the  battalion 
parallel  to  its  original  position. 

Fig.  3.  Represents  the  same  battalion,  which,  by  obliquing, 
brings  its  centre  on  the  original  perpendicular  line,  from 
which  it  deviated,  and  re-establishes  the  proper  interval. 

PLATE  15. 

Fig.  1.  Represents  a  battalion  advancing  in  line,  and  pass- 
ing an  obstacle  which  presented  itself  before  the  second  and 
third  battalion  companies. 

Fig.  2.  Represents  a  battalion  marching  in  line  to  the  front, 
and  passing  an  obstacle  which  presented  itself  before  the  four 
companies  on  the  left. 

PLATE  16. 

Fig.  1.  and  2.  Represent  a  battalion  advancing  in  line, 
and  changing  direction  by  wheeling  in  line  forward  on  its 
right  flank. 

Fig.  3.  Represents  the  same  battalion,  after  changing  front 
on  its  right  flank  a  certain  number  of  degrees,  marching  di- 
rect to  its  new  front. 

PLATE  ir. 

Fig.  1.  Represents  a  battalion  (a)  of  the  first  line,  passing 
through  a  battalion  of  the  second  line. 

Fig.  2.  Represents  a  battalion  after  having  passed  through 
the  second  line,  and  marched  one  hundred  paces  to  the  rear, 
halted,  and  wheeled  up  to  the  left  into  line. 

Fig.  3.  Represents  a  battalion  of  the  second  line,  that  ha? 
halted,  and  doubled  the  left  platoon  of  each  company  behind 
the  right  platoon,  in  order  to  open  spaces  through  which  the 
companies  of  the  battalion  of  the  first  line  may  pass  by  file. 

(f3*  The  file-closers  are  not  laid  down  correctly. 


220 


PLATE  18. 

Fig.  1.  Represents  a  battalion  in  line,  changing  fronton 
the  first  company,  throwing  forward  the  other  companies  by 
an  echellon  movement. 

Two  markers  (a  and  b)  are  represented  in  front  of  the 
first  company,  on  whom  it  forms. 

Fig.  2.  Represents  a  battalion  in  line  changing  front  to  the 
rear,  on  the  first  company. 

Two  markers  are  represented  (a  and  b)  in  front  of  the 
first  company. 

It  has  been  deemed  preferable  to  place  the  two  markers 
on  the  right  of  the  battalion,  in  the  new  direction.  See  page 
93. 

PLATE  19. 

Fig.  1.  Represents  a  battalion  in  line  executing  a  central 
change  of  front  on  the  fifth  company,  formed  on  two  markers 
(a  and  b).  The  left  wing  is  thrown  forward,  and  the  right 
wing  is  thrown  to  the  rear. 

(]^J*  In  this  system,  this  manoeuvre  is  performed  with 
more  celerity  than  in  that  of  which  it  is  an  imitation.  In  this 
system,  three  proceedings  effect  the  manoeuvre:  1.  Placing 
the  markers;  2.  Facing  the  companies  on  the  right,  to  the 
right  about;  3.  The  general  movement,  and  formation  of  all 
the  companies  on  the  new  direction.  In  the  system  imi- 
tated, five  proceedings  effect  the  manoeuvre:  1.  Placing  the 
markers;  2.  Forming  the  fifth  company  by  them;  3.  Forming 
the  fourth  company  by  the  fifth;  4.  Facing  the  companies  on 
the  right  to  the  right  about;  and  5.  The  general  movement, 
and  formation  of  the  remaining  companies  on  the  new  di- 
rection. 

There  are  similar  variations  in  other  manoeuvres. 

Fig.  2.  Represents  a  battalion  in  line,  passing  a  defile  in 
its  rear,  by  filing  from  the  right  flank  of  companies  suc- 
cessively. 

PLATE  20. 

Fig.  1.  Represents  a  battalion  forming  from  the  line  a 
column  of  attack.  The  figure  shows  that  the  companies  on 
the  right  and  left  of  the  two  centre  companies  disengaged 
their  inner  flanks  to  the  rear,  and  formed  column  at  platoon 
distance,  on  the  fourth  and  fifth  companies. 


^1 

Fig.  2.  Represents  a  column  of  attack  displaying  into  line. 

PLATE  21. 

Fig.  1.  Represents  a  line  of  four  battalions,  forming  a 
close  column  on  the  second  division  of  the  second  battalion, 
with  the  right  in  front. 

The  letter  (a)  represents  the  division  marching  in  file, 
after  having  broke  off  from  the  line;  (d)  shows  the  battalion 
close  columns  formed  on  the  march;  (o)  represents  the  ma- 
jor, who  conducts  the  leading  division  to  the  point  where  it 
is  to  enter  into  the  column. 

Fig.  2.  Represents  four  battalions  marching  in  line,  and 
executing  a  change  of  direction  to  the  front,  on  the  right 
flank,  by  wheeling  each  battalion  on  its  right,  and  marching 
to  the  new  direction. 

Fig.  3.  Represents  a  line  of  four  battalions  retreating  in 
chequer,  and  again  forming  the  line. 

The  even  battalions  have  commenced  the  movement,  and 
retired  one  hundred  paces;  the  odd  battalions  have  retired 
in  their  turn,  one  hundred  paces  to  the  rear  gf  the  even  bat- 
talions; and  so  alternately. 

PLATE  22. 

Represents  a  column  of  four  battalions  at  full  distance  of 
companies,  with  the  right  in  front,  arriving  behind  the  right 
of  the  line  to  be  formed  on,  and  forming  in  line  on  the  lead- 
ing company  of  the  first  battalion,  by  an  echellon  movement 
of  the  rear  companies  of  each  battalion,  on  the  front  com- 
pany, brought  up  to,  and  placed  on  the  line. 

There  are  two  representations  of  the  line.  The  brigadier 
general  (k)  stationed  the  two  mounted  officers  (a  and  b)  pre- 
vious to  the  commencement  of  the  movement.  The  third 
battalion  has  nearly  effected  its  movement;  and  the  fourth 
has  arrived  at  its  major  (d),  who  has  relieved  the  mounted 
officer. 

PLATE  23. 

Represents  a  column  of  four  battalions,  at  full  distance  of 
companies,  with  the  right  in  front,  arriving  in  front  of  the 
line  to  be  formed  on,  and  forming  the  line  faced  to  the  rear, 
on  the  leading  company  of  the  first  battalion. 

The  brigadier  general  (k)  is  on  the  right  of  the  line  form- 

2F 


222 


cd,  from  whence  he  directs  the  dressing  of  the  colours;  the 
second  battalion  has  nearly  effected  its  formation;  the  third 
has  arrived  at  its  major  (d);  the  fourth  is  on  the  march  to 
its  place  in  the  line,  marked  by  its  major  (d),  who  has  taken 
the  position  shown  by  the  aid-de-camp. 


PLATE  24. 

Fig.  1.  Represents  an  open  column  of  four  battalions,  with 
the  right  in  front,  forming  line  to  the  front,  on  the  eighth 
company  of  the  second  battalion. 

The  second  and  third  battalions  are  formed  on  the  line; 
the  first  and  fourth  are  effecting  their  formation. 

Fig.  2.|Represents  an  open  column  of  four  battalions,  with 
the  right  in  front,  arriving  behind  the  line  to  be  formed  on, 
pursuing  that  line,  and  halted  at  the  instant  when  the  fourth 
company  of  the  second  battalion  has  wheeled  into  the  new 
direction. 

Two  representations  of  the  line  are  given;  the  companies 
that  have  wheeled,  march  with  the  directing  flank  four  paces 
from  the  line,  and  are  wheeled  up  to  the  left  in  line;  the 
fourth  company  of  the  third  battalion,  with  the  colours,  have 
formed  on  the  line;  the  remaining  four  companies  of  the  bat- 
talion are  marching  in  echeilons  to  the  line;  the  fourth  batta- 
lion is  on  its  march  in  column. 

Fig.  3.  Represents  a  similar  column,  arriving  in  front  of 
the  line  to  be  formed  on.  The  movement  is  similar  to  that 
exhibited  in  figure  2,  except  that  such  companies  and  batta- 
lions as  have  not  wheeled  into  the  direction  to  be  formed  on, 
form  the  line  facing  to  the  rear,  as  is  represented  in  the 
figure  of  the  third  battalion. 

PLATE  25. 

Fig.  1  and  2.  Represent  a  close  column  of  four  battaliotis, 
by  divisions,  displaying  into  battalion  close  columns,  on  the 
second  battalion. 

The  second  battalion  having  been  uncovered,  has  marched 
up  to  the  markers  (e  f  ),  previously  placed  on  the  line  A  B. 

F.g.  3.  Represents  the  battalion  close  columns  on  the  same 
division  of  the  second  battalion. 

Two  markers  (g  and  h)  have  been  placed  in  front  of  the 
right  and  left  of  the  leading  division  of  the  second  battalion. 


223 

The  battalions  have  all  displayed,  except  the  fourth,  which 
has  commenced  displaying.  The  first  battalion  has  displayed 
on  its  rear  division;  the  third  and  fourth  have  displayed  on 
their  front  divisions. 

Fig.  4.  Represents  the  line  completely  formed* 


PLATE  26. 

Fig.  1.  Represents  a  line  of  four  battalions  accurately 
dressed,  about  to  advance  in  line.  The  second  has  been  ap- 
pointed the  battalio7i  of  direction. 

Fig.  2.  Represents  the  same  line  on  its  march  to  the  front. 

Fig.  3.  Represents  the  same  line.  The  brigadier  general, 
after  halting  the  line,  takes  the  necessary  measures  for  dres- 
sing it  correctly.  For  this  purpose  he  has  placed  himself  a 
few  paces  to  the  right  of  the  colours  of  the  battalion  of  di- 
rection, to  establish  the  basis  of  the  line. 

Fig.  4.  Represents  the  four  battalions  in  line,  after  having 
been  correctly  dressed,  and  after  the  colours,  general  guides, 
and  guides  of  companies,  have  resumed  their  posts  in  the 
line. 


PLATE  27. 

Represents  a  line  of  five  battalions,  which  on  its  march  ta 
the  front  met  a  defile,  which  presented  itself  before  the  cen- 
tre; the  line  is  represented  passing  in  double  column  of  pla- 
toons. 

The  first  and  second  positions  of  the  third  battalion,  and 
part  of  the  second  and  fourth,  are  exhibited;  and  the  last  po- 
sition of  all  the  five  battalions. 


PLATE  28. 

Represents  five  battalions  retreating  in  line,  and  meeting 
with  a  river  having  a  bridge  over  it,  opposite  to  the  interval 
between  the  third  and  fourth  battalions. 

The  first  battalion  has  passed  the  bridge  in  a  single  column, 
by  itself,  as  it  was  the  most  remote  from  the  defile.  The  se- 
cond and  fifth  battalions  pass  the  bridge  together,  in  double 
column,  by  files,  and  form  companies. 


224 


PLATE  29. 

Fig.  1.  Represents  two  lines,  each  ot  four  battalion^ 
drawn  up  one  behind  the  other,  and  both  changing  front  per- 
pendicularly forward  to  the  right,  on  the  right  flank  of  the 
first  line. 

Fig.  2.  Represents  two  lines,  one  in  rear  of  the  other,  con- 
sisting each  of  four  battalions,  executing  a  change  of  front, 
perpendicularly  to  the  rear,  on  the  right  flank  of  the  first  line. 

PLATE  30. 

Represents  two  lines,  each  of  four  battalions,  drawn  up 
one  behind  the  other,  executing  a  perpendicular  change  of 
front  on  the  right  company  of  the  third  battalion  of  the  first 
line,  by  throwing  the  left  wing  forward,  and  the  right  wing 
to  the  rear. 

PLATE  31. 

Fig.  1.  Represents  two  lines,  each  of  four  battalions,  exe- 
cuting an  oblique  change  of  front,  forward,  on  the  extremity 
of  the  right  flank  of  the  lines. 

Fig.  2.  Represents  two  lines,  each  of  four  battalions, 
drawn  up  one  behind  the  other,  executing  an  oblique  change 
of  front,  to  the  rear,  on  the  extremity  of  the  right  flank  of  the 
lines. 


PLATE  32. 

Fig.  1.  Represents  a  line  of  six  battalions,  marching  to  the 
front  by  direct  echellons  of  regiments,  formed  from  the  right. 

A  non-commissioned  officer  (a)  is  placed  in  rear  of  the 
left  file  of  the  preceding  echellon,  and  marches  in  the  steps 
of  that  file,  dressing  with  the  front  of  his  own  battalion. 

The  full  line  represents  the  battalions,  which  have,  from 
echellon,  formed  the  line  again,  by  moving  up  successively, 
halting,  and  dressing  by  the  first  regiment. 

Fig.  2.  Represents  a  line  of  four  battalions,  supposed  in  a 
direction  oblique  to  that  of  the  enemy,  and  forming  parallel 
to  the  hostile  line,  by  echellons  of  regiments. 

A  non-commissioned  officer  marches  in  the  steps  of  thfe 


225 

iUe  of  the  colours  of  the  preceding  battalion,  dressing  with 
the  front  rank  of  his  own  battalion. 

The  echellons  after  closing  to  a  prescribed  distance  from 
each  other,  move  on  to  the  front. 


PLATE  33* 

Fig.  1.  Represents  a  column  of  four  battalions,  with  the 
right  in  front,  in  divisions  at  platoon  distance,  covered  by 
marksmen,  to  keep  off  cavalry. 

Fig.  e.  Represents  the  same  column,  after  having  been 
halted,  and  after  calling  in  the  marksmen, forming  the  square, 
in  order  to  oppose  cavalry. 

Fig.  3.  Represents  the  same  oblong  square,  with  the  in- 
ward platoons  and  divisions  closed  up  to  within  a  foot  of  the 
outward  platoons  and  divisions. 

Fig.  4.  Represents  the  same  square,  forming  a  column  of 
divisions  at  platoon  distance,  and  resuming  the  order  of  the 
march. 


PLATE  34. 

Represents  four  battalions  on  the  left  of  the  first  line,  sup- 
posed to  be  encamped,  with  the  position  of  their  camp  and 
quarter  guards,  sentinels,  and  vaults. 

(a)  Camp  guards,  (b)  Quarter  guards,  (c)  Flank  guard, 
(d)  Vaults. 


Ph  I . 


Fen 


jiBo'fi      ODHnK       ofisnS      nfiEnfi      nAsaffi      nAnnffi 


AN   EXP  LACTATION    OF    THE      FIGXTIES 


D       Thf,  he<ir-<'T  (if  tlw   (\'l<n/7V 
6       ScTiifV  ('irrJyoraJ 


<\  77?^,  Co7-onc7 

d  c.' .  Z if!7/  .'*  Coloiiel 
f  /■/'<■  MaJoT' 
S'  77?y  Adjutant 
K  TJn"  J)rn7>i  2ifaJ<'7- 
i  Z7/<»  C-cr-poTol.  J)rnnnne7^ 
I    Is.  Jiarid  vf  Tvfi/^ic 


J^ 


iani     aiaa    t     oi^nnS      aiscS     niaoS      nrbaoS      oAoaS      nSooa      n6BnS 
J.  A,  .^i 


4^ 


FnrimitifH  c/'r;  Rft/imrti/  in  Line 


AN   EXPLANATIOX    OF    THE      FIGTTIES 


B     77/-e  Ensign 

D       Seije<tnt.f 


t'  TV?*-  Miy'of 
&'  T??*-  Adpit<mt 

i  77*-  C<rrpvralJ)ruimnrr 
I  i.  Jiaritl  of  ^fi/dic 


ri  Q. 


I'l  'i. 


"iMMam^Bn-aMaaaBi  -«-> 


TIllJ— 111"!  ■■!— ■ 


■<  ii'iKijm 


J)ir'<-lphn  e  crihtFlatorn.  ,S  tM\^W,  N  iij\v"vO 


mmmmm 


'.^\f 


figi. 


lU 


.-LI.i  JLHH  ■■""■  WJ 


jc^^'.-ug.'aii jjL 


L 


mniplin <■ , /•rhfl'liifivn  . 


# 
^ 


— TT-T 

-! 


♦^ 


^i 


bh 


# 


■J. 


-^ 


'=^=^ 

^ 


^/. 


Lh 


TJi/ri/i'/iiifoftheFlatrt'ii 


.izriitcx;;tT:x.:£:xj* 
:..x:.i;;c;i:x;xni.:x;Enra 


Kg.3- 


l),snf)Une  I'/lJir  BalitUi' 


HgL 


bo 


I 


d"? 


h 


i^41 


Itisapliiu-   i>/' llli-  JlfMi/ir'/i 


}    I 


yj/.,;-,/,/,,!,-  ef  l/),£nft„{ 


ity. 


_  _gLLLLI_LLL//^ 

,^_«jfiiiyBiyBfi^:,. „    lli  lv~" 

c     ififiB^**, ,.yffliiiii,i.ii/^ 

^  ^eS  I  ni  11  r«r :::::::::::  111  iiii  h  ^ 


J 11 II  fir 


iiiiiiii:o[:[ic;:. 

It         .■i,tlifi»i|^,. 


.I__I_ 


^ 


■111 


msE 


I 


Mirifi/w,-  oiylifBnlliiJi 


l^U'ipTmf  of  the  Baffalion. 


f,Tmm„l,   /li, /-r,!,/ m  /m , 


en  ' 


^d 


t: 


VhCfffjhfU    i-r  flif   BfUtnh. 


I 


!l  ! 


J 


.^ 


DLti/>7im  oftheSaffaUon . 


^ 


i' 


Ufa 


^ 


Vuiiphiir    cf'  the  BnlM/iim  . 


I0!lEi'.:ZiXl!T 


I 


illlllilill!!i!llllllllllHI|i|||||l!!l:!ftHii 


Ti^.i 


■H 


.^JS^'K" 


I 


',:Miii!ii'i:iipi:i'iiii!^,CT 


Si 


ISW''      'im% 


% 


..:^ ... ::  JH 


iig.i. 


i),y., ,•>,„.■  .1  .■!,.ll.,:i.,l,, 


Hg. 


W 


e        ^      '^iiiiuiir 


m 


IJisaphiir  11/  till-  llnnnnii 


I  I 


Kfl. 


^ 


Discipline  cf  the  Sattalun. 


FiSL 


^.  ^.  '^.  "Q,  ^:  '=^:^: "?. "^:.  ^. 


.n 


■lis  3 


JJIHUk-'l 


m.r  ■ 


Es.2. 


AnmiBiS' 


Bf. 


Di.icipluij'  cf  rki  Bathilio 
Chajujvuj  Front 


rig.2. 


/" 


/ 


/ 


^ 


<^ 


> 


^m'tL 


<i 


JB 


Bisapline  of  t/u  Biittali on 


T 


't 


Disnpline  cftht'EaUvIii 
Column  ol'  ,JUaet . 


Evi'lulifllut  of  Hu  Lii 


Kg-.  2. 


Kg:.3. 


i-_.       ^-_^ 


III 


A 


_^ .!» _..jj....^.  ■■■■ ^■■ 


..^JL^ 


^.B«'^. 


•iB*"^. 


1 

Erfliilii'tn    ' 

/  //„ 

/// 

/*/   :^^ 

1 

k ^ 

A 

\ _... 

^ 

:. t 

Ji. 

1          on 

/ 

""       :        ~ 

!          =1 

/ 

A 

/ 

// 

em! 

/ 

/:■ 

X? 

//. 

as 

/■:- 

^ 

//-. 

■■  '■'"■ 

^':  .B-. 

/>  :ijj«. 

//        IB-" 

C2S 

^•. 

<?^ 

■^ 

Eia 

.^^3 

& 

& 

1           =. 
i 

j 

1^^ 

F.j.    1 

4^~ 

^3 

4     ! 

^   i£?"       j 

i 

D- 


L 


£voUmo/is  ^  t/ir  Line. 


I   i    1/ 


xe  i I E  E I  I  i 


.-^ 


i  I  n  I 


1 1  n  1 8 1 


il_ 


^l^.y  ^  ^  G  -  <S  i^  2  0  D  0  D    \^  IN]  D  D  D  D  tj   \^  [^0  Q  0  0 


I 

i-V 

I 


I 


I 


'  ■ .  •.'  /. 

'     i' 

r 

1 

'    Li 

Li      !■• 

'•■"'     i 

u. 

immi 

HUHUdl 

TT 

nr 

Kvi'liilK'H.!    t'l  tlu  llrui<i<lf 


li  y  'li  y  Li  y  u 


^, 


nfnnr  nTmhmr 


^ 


s 


V 


^^^ 


JS"  «».> 


li 


^^B^-fHi-^   nrfThrT 


lie.. 


A I 


^ 


A: 1 


£vphfrions  ofthmAurad 


E rcluticfur  (^r  tifw  Line. 


/v.  -i- 


iinmiiijimi II      iiiiiii,ii,iwimMiJiii..i.i„ii!iiiiiiiji,iiiii 


IB  lillllllllllillHIIIIIHI.III.M,l..,1!l  .■B.llllll    n 


J-iy.X. 


!> b 


i.B? 


3.B? 


■2   B^ 


/Jrrliff/c/hr  (^r  Hw  L/nr. 


f'^-}- i ,     , ^. 


l.B? 


3.B? 


i   B? 


£yc/uh.'iu  cttlu£iu/,i 


hhhM^MMAA^hHA. 


LkH: 


hk 


J 


kllrhr    .      M' 


"-vTC-J 


i: — --~r 


ri.  'iS. 


2.«°." 


i    "    i 


PI.  '^8. 


2.«' 


.)       "J. 


— ^ 


f/if  /frff/<j</f' 


I  II 

.1:/.,  III'." 


1  :  1:  m 


f 


\       \ 

I  DO  DD  D  D  D  D 


!l  !,l   1.1   ii 
j;£.lB' 


/ 
/ 

fi-  FL. 


^   SB" 


\    '     »    *     '- 


,.,^^^^>^^^ 


^"■if'jfvf' 


j_!_l      l_ 


i!  I!   li  l! 

>rz.3.»f" 


ng-.fi.-' 


■^■ 


^Z.3.B1»  j..  ;  iPZ.  4.B: 


/ 


// 


1 


C- 

cd 

r  f 

3  B*:" 

4, 

1  / 

IB" 

..'*^^ 


,.'*% 


Evolulions    of  the   Line. 


/'/.3P- 


in 
■zx 


era 


rrrit  \  \   \    ■.. 

'■••.  \   \    '"■■:  ■'■< 
c:::a   \,  \.    \    ■•■■, 


/'/.3P- 


_3 


J.,  \'\  ■••■...    • 
13  \  \.  \  N 


cm. 


s 


KroU/tr^iiU:  of  tii-c  Jdri<',n/.. 


■is- 2 


IfP 


\ 
3  B""^ 


■      4 


4:3". 


ID 


3.B° 


Juoffffffifn  of'  the  Jj77f//{f/( 


\ 


n\ 


51 


M^2.V,° 


^51_3.B-' 


j5y-4. 


jai^5.B° 


H' 


» 


I 


dik^ 


^>y/ 


^c^\^' 


f      B 


a^2B" 


MM^xr" 


^S_4.B" 


^ 


,fii^  5.B° 


Evotiihnns   of'  tJie   f^''i^  ■ 


k                     o      1.B7'    o 

H^            ** 

4                     o                      a                       « 

*     1              o                    o                ,     ** 

1 1 

4  ,,... 

J-: 

c,                                    4 

.  1     o       o      ,  ^ 

*  f 

*  31           o    .,.B->    o 

o                     o                     * 

:  1    o      o     ,  *: 

11          o    4.B*?^    ° 

0                             O                             *   ^ 

'                          0                              O                              ^   * 

. 

M"          4 

II 


■i        i^ 


K-li    nil 

II 
II 


II    iiii 


N; 


w 

I- 


■i 


1^— * ^f-k 

||«^ -^w 

it  i 

il- Hlii 


i 


I- 


i 


i 


d 


iiniinaMiiiiiiiii  naiiimiiiiiHMii 


wmmm 


m-iiM    i^- 


i 


t^ 


k 


Fig-.  4. 


A 


i 


nnn 


(>/,/,/-   ../     /■:„,.:in/,in.<:l 


( 


UNIVERSITY  OF  CALIFORNIA  LIBRARY 
BERKELEY 

Return  to  desk  from  which  borrowed. 
This  book  is  DUE  on  the  last  date  stamped  below. 


^"'V^-? 


%/ 


SEP. -4 1975  2  3 


m.m.  SB' 03 '75 


f 

>- 

rr 
S     to 


01 


REC.  CIE.    JANS       1^79 


I 


LD  21-100m-ll,'49(B7146sl6)476 


/ 


ivi2l08fil 


0 

,  J 


/  d 


THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CALIFORNIA  UBRARY 


U.C.  BERKELEY  LIBRARIES 


CDS^flED^Sb 


'■*»:%■''• 


